B Tech

GMRIT
Academic Regulations, Curriculum and Syllabi
2016
B. Tech.
Electrical and Electronics Engineering
(4 Year Program)
Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering

GMR Institute of Technology
Rajam, Andhra Pradesh
(An Autonomous Institute Affiliated to JNTU Kakinada, AP)
NBA Accredited and NAAC Accredited
Academic Rules and Regulations
2016
Undergraduate Programmes
GMR Institute of Technology

Rajam 532 127, Andhra Pradesh
(An Autonomous Institute, Affiliated to JNTU, Kakinada, AP)
Accredited by NAAC & NBA
GMR Institute of Technology (GMRIT) | Regulation 2016
Contents
1. Eligibility for Admission……………………………....................................................... iv

2. Duration of B. Tech. Programme……………………………………………………….. iv
3. Branches of Study…………………………………………………………………………….. iv
4. Programme Structure………………………………………………………………………. v
4.1. Credit Distribution for the Courses Offered………………………………… viii
4.2. Structure of the Curriculum……………………………………………………….. viii
4.3. Credits Break-up for Various Category of Courses………………………. x
4.4. Division of Marks for Continuous and Semester End Assessment.. xi
5. Evaluation Methodology…………………………………………………………………... xii
5.1. Continuous Assessment Pattern for all Courses…………………………... xii
6. Attendance Requirements………………………………………………………………... xvi
7. Promotion Policies…………………………………………………………………………… xvi
8. Graduation Requirements………………………………………………………………… xvii
9. Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses……………………………………………………. xix
10. Withdrawal from Examination…………………………………………………………. xix
11. Curriculum……………………………………………………………………………………… xx
ii
The Vision of GMRIT
 To be among the most preferred institutions for engineering and technological

education in the country
 An institution that will bring out the best from its students, faculty and staff – to learn,
to achieve, to compete and to grow – among the very best
 An institution where ethics, excellence and excitement will be the work religion, while
research, innovation and impact, the work culture
The Mission of GMRIT
 To turnout disciplined and competent engineers with sound work and life ethics
 To implement outcome based education in an IT-enabled environment
 To encourage all-round rigor and instill a spirit of enquiry and critical thinking among
students, faculty and staff
 To develop teaching, research and consulting environment in collaboration with
industry and other institutions
iii
Academic Regulations for B. Tech. Programme*

(For all the batches of candidates admitted in the Academic Year 2016–2017 and subsequently)
1. Eligibility for Admission

The total seats available as per the approved intake are grouped into two categories viz.
category A and Category B with a ratio of 70:30 as per the state government guidelines vide G.O
No.52
a. The admissions for category A and B seats shall be as per the guidelines of Andhra
Pradesh State Council for Higher Education (APSCHE) in consonance with
government reservation policy.
 Under Category A: 70% of the seats are filled through EAMCET counseling.
 Under Category B: 30% seats are filled based on 10+2 merits in compliance
with guidelines of APSCHE
b. Admission eligibility-Under Lateral Entry Scheme
Students with diploma qualification have an option of direct admission into 2nd year
B. Tech. (Lateral entry scheme). Under this scheme 20% seats of sanctioned intake
will be available in each course as supernumerary seats. Admissions to this three
year B Tech later entry Programme will be through ECET. The maximum period to
complete B. Tech. under lateral entry scheme is six consecutive academic years from
the date of joining.
2. Duration of the Programme
The course duration for the award of the Degree in Bachelor of Technology will be four
academic years, with two semesters in each year. However if a student is unable to complete the
course within 4 years, he/ she can do so by giving more attempts but within 8 consecutive
academic years from the date of admission.
Academic Calendar
For all the eight semesters a common academic calendar shall be followed in each semester by
having sixteen weeks of instruction, one week for the conduct of practical exams and with three
weeks for theory examinations and evaluation. Dates for registration, sessional and end
semester examinations shall be notified in the academic calendar of every semester. The
schedule for the conduct of all the curricular and co-curricular activities shall be notified in the
planner.
3. Branches of Study
B. Tech. Programmes
I. Chemical Engineering (CH)
II. Civil Engineering (CE)
*
Approved in the Academic Council Meeting held on March 24, 2018 (Satruday)
iv
III. Computer Science and Engineering (CS)

IV. Electrical and Electronics Engineering (EE)
V. Electronics and Communication Engineering (EC)
VI. Information Technology (IT)
VII. Mechanical Engineering (ME)
VIII. Power Engineering (PE)
4. Programme Structure
The curriculum will consist of courses of study (Theory, Practical, Contemporary Courses,
Mini Project, Term Papers, Project, Audit Courses, Self-study Courses, MOOCs, Summer
Internship and Full Semester Internship and Courses related Employability Skills) and
syllabi as prescribed by the respective Boards of Studies from time to time. The curriculum is
bifurcated into FSI and Non-FSI modes from 7th semester onwards.
Every student will be required to opt for six elective courses spanned across the semester from
4th to 8th semester from the list of electives as prescribed in the curriculum. Under Choice Based
Credit System (CBCS), the students may take one elective from the list of open electives offered
by other branches of engineering technology in consultation with their respective department.
a. Integrated Courses: Integrated courses are exclusively designed to provide a

unique learning experience to the students with the concept of layered learning
where in the students have the chances to practice while learning. These courses
designed by blending both theory and laboratory components in their core
curriculum and will be evaluated for 130 marks.
b. Contemporary Courses: These courses are designed with the help of experts from
industries and driven by experts from industries along with the internal faculty
members on the recent developments in core areas of engineering and technology.
These courses shall be registered as an elective course during their course of study
c. Mini Project: The curriculum offers Mini Projects in two different forms viz: (i) Mini
Project as a mandatory component in all lab courses (ii) 2 credit Mini Project during
5th or 6th semester. With respect to second one (ii) students will take mini project
batch wise and the batches will be divided as similar to lab courses. The report will
be evaluated by a committee as nominated by CoE constituted with internal &
external panels
d. Term Paper: The Term Paper is a self-study report and shall be carried out either
during 5th or 6th semester in choice with Mini Project. Every student will take up
this term paper individually and submit a report. The scope of the term paper could
be an exhaustive literature review choosing any engineering concept with reference
to standard research papers or an extension of the concept of earlier course work in
consultation with the term paper supervisor. The report will be evaluated by a
committee as nominated by HoD with the approval of CoE
v
e. Project work: The final project work shall be carried out during the 8th semester in
the non- FSI Model. Projects will be taken up batch wise. Internal evaluation will be
done by the Project Review Committee (PRC), comprising of HOD and two senior
faculty members along with the project supervisor. Semester end evaluation will be
done by Project Evaluation Committee (PEC) comprising of three members
including HOD, project guide and an external examiner nominated by the CoE
f. Audit Courses: Audit courses are among the compulsory courses and do not carry
any credits. All the students shall register for one Audit courses in the beginning of
3rdsemester. List of the courses will be notified at the beginning of the third
semester for all students and the student has to choose one audit course under self-
study mode at the beginning of third semester. All the students (regular and lateral
entry students) shall complete the audit course similar to other regular courses and
the results will be indicated with “Satisfactory” or “Not Satisfactory” performance.
g. Self-Study Courses: Self-study courses are the courses which are more similar to
theory courses where in the students learn the courses on independent mode. The
evaluation and assessment pattern for such courses shall be carried out as similar to
regular theory course. These courses shall be opted after getting proper approval
from the respective head of the department as well from the other head of the
department which is offering the course. The credits earned through these self-
study courses over and above the mandatory courses, and it will not be accounted in
CGPA calculation.
h. MOOCs: Meeting with the global requirements, to inculcate the habit of self-learning
and in compliance with UGC guidelines, MOOC (Massive Open Online Course) have
been introduced as electives
 The proposed MOOCs would be additional choices in all the elective
groups subject to the availability during the respective semesters and
respective departments will declare the list of the courses at the
beginning of the semester, which are having a minimum of 45 hours in a
given semester
 Course content for the selected MOOCs shall be drawn from respective
MOOCs links or shall be supplied by the department. Course will be
mentored by faculty members and Assessment & evaluation of the
courses shall be done by the department
 Three credits will be awarded upon successful completion of each
MOOCs
i. Summer Internship: As a part of curriculum in all branches of Engineering, it is
mandatory for all students to undergo summer internship Programme at industries
(core or allied) / R & D organization to get practical insight of their subject domain
during summer break after the 4th semester. This summer internship Programme
shall be availed to a maximum duration of 4 weeks and the assessment shall be
vi
carried out with both internal and external experts leading to “Satisfactory” and
“Non-Satisfactory Performance” and it will not be accounted for the calculation of
CGPA
j. Employability Skills: It is mandatory for all students to take a course on
Employability Skills from 3rd Semester to 6th Semester. The Employability Skills are
covered under two broad streams viz. Aptitude skills and Soft Skills. The credits
earned through these courses will be indicated in the grade sheet and will not be
taken into account for CGPA calculation.
k. Industry Driven One Credit Courses (IDC): Meeting with the industry
requirements, to reduce the gap between industry and academia this one credit (15
hrs.) course has been introduced over and above regular courses from 3rd Semester
to 6th Semester for the interested students. The credits earned through these
courses will be indicated in the grade sheet and will not be taken into account for
CGPA calculation.
l. Full Semester Internship: Students can opt for full semester Internship
Programme at industries based on their self-interest either during 7th or 8th
semester to get practical insight relevant to their core branch of engineering or in
allied branch of study under the guidance of internal and external expert members
in the institute and at Industries respectively. All Students who wish to choose FSI
pattern shall exercise this option well before the commencement of 7th semester.
Students who wish to take FSI during 8th semester will have to take one additional
course in 7th semester when compared with Non FSI stream. In case of some
extraordinary cases, students may be permitted to choose the FSI pattern even
before the commencement of 8th semester. In all such cases student shall take one
additional course offered during 8th semester under self-study mode and acquire
the required credits.
i. Minimum CGPA cut-off up to 5th semester as prescribed by CDC
ii. Competency mapping
iii. Students who opt for FSI either in 7th or 8th will be provided with Internship
subject the availability/selection by the industries
Further the credits earned through FSI Programme will be indicated in the grade sheet
and will be accounted for the calculation of CGPA.
FSI final evaluation will be done by the FSI Review Committee (FSIRC), comprising of
HOD, one senior faculty member and External (Industry) expert nominated by HOD.
vii
4.1. Credit Distribution for Courses Offered
No Course Credits
1 Theory Course 3
2 Integrated Course 4
3 Laboratory/Drawing Course 2
4 MOOCs 3
5 Elective courses 3
6 Audit Course 0
7 Term Paper 2
8 Mini Project 2
9 Summer Internship 0
10 Project work 10
11 Full Semester internship 16
Co-curricular and Extra-Curricular
12 2
Activities(CCEC)
13 Employability Skills (ES) 2
14 Industry Driven One Credit Courses (IDC) 1
4.2. Structure of curriculum

Following are the TWO models of course patterns out of which any student shall choose
one model based on the notified criteria for selection.
a. Full Semester Internship (FSI) Model

b. Non Full Semester Internship Model
In the Full semester internship Model, the students selected/opted for internship will be
distributed in both the 7th and 8th semester based on the internships available. In the Non
Full Semester Internship Model, all the selected students shall carry out the Project work
as per the norms.
A. Course Pattern for Four year Regular Programme (FSI)
Total
Sem. No. of Theory Courses No. of Lab Courses
Credits
I 21
5 3
II 21
III 3 + Employability Skills+ CCEC 25
6(5 Theory + 1 Integrated) 3+ CCEC Activities+
IV 25 + 1 + 1
Employability Skills
Summer Internship (Audit course) 0
6 (4 Compulsory Theory + 1 1+ Term paper/Mini Project +
V 23
Integrated + 1 Elective) Employability Skills + CCEC
6 + Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project +
VI (3 Compulsory Theory + 1 CCEC Activities + Employability 23 + 1+1
Integrated + 2 Elective) Skills
VII Full semester internship 16
viii
VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16

16+Term paper +Mini project+
Internship +CCEC +
Total 34+4+1 Audit courses 174
Employability Skills+ Audit
Course
B. Course Pattern for Four Year Regular Programme (Non - FSI)

Total
Credits
I 21
5 3
II 21
III 3+ Employability Skills + CCEC 25
6 (5 Theory + 1 Integrated)
IV 3+ Employability Skills +CCEC 25 + 1+1
V 23
Integrated + 1 Elective) Employability Skills+ CCEC
6+ Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project+
VII 3 (1 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 13
VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

16+Term paper + Mini project +
36+4+1 Audit courses Project work + CCEC + 174
Total
C. Course Pattern for Three Year Lateral Entry Programme (FSI)
Total
Credits
6 (5 Theory + 1 Integrated) 3+ CCEC Activities+ Employability
IV 25 + 1+1
Skills
V 23
6+ Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project
VII Full semester internship 16
VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16
Total 24+4+1 Audit courses 10 + Term paper +Mini project+ 132
ix
Internship report +CCEC +

D. Course Pattern for Three year Lateral Entry Programme (Non FSI)
Total
Credits
6 (5 Theory + 1 Integrated)
IV 3+ CCEC Activities+ Employability
24 + 1+1
Skills
V 23
6 + Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project +
VII 3 (1 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 13
VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

10 + Term paper +Mini project+
Total 26+4+1 courses Internship report +CCEC + 132
4.3 Credit Break-up for Various Category of Courses

a. For Four year regular Programme (FSI)
Total Theory Courses : 34 @ 3 credits each = 102
(29 Core Courses + 5 Elective Courses)
Total Integrated Courses : 4 @ 4 credits each = 16
Total Laboratory Courses : 16 @ 2 credits each = 32
Term Paper with self-study report : 1 @ 2 credits = 2
Mini Project with self-study report : 1@ 2 credits = 2
CCEC Activities : 2 @ 1 credits = 2
Employability skills : 2@ 1 credits = 2
FSI internship : 1 @ 16 credits = 16
b. For Four year regular Programme (Non FSI)

x

Project work : 1 @ 10 credits = 10
c. For three year lateral entry Programme (FSI)

Internship report : 1 @ 16 credits = 16
d. For three year lateral entry Programme (Non FSI)

Project work : 1 @ 10 credits = 10
4.4 Division of Marks for Continuous and Semester End Assessment
Marks Marks for

Course Continuous Semester end
Assessment Assessment
Theory 40 60
Integrated Course 40 (60T+30L)
Drawing courses 25 50
Laboratory 25 50
Term Paper 50 --
Audit Courses 50 --
Mini Project 25 50
Industry Driven Courses (IDC) 25 --
Full semester Internship 200 200
Project work 100 100
xi
5. Evaluation Methodology
a. The assessment will be based on the performance in the semester-end examinations and /
or continuous assessment, carrying marks as specified in Clause 10
b. At the end of each semester, final examinations will normally be conducted during
October/November and during April / May of each year. Supplementary examinations may
also be conducted at such times as may be decided by the Institute
c. Continuous Assessment Marks will be awarded on the basis of Continuous Evaluation made
during the semester as per the scheme given in Clause 10
d. The letter grade and the grade points are awarded based on the hybrid grading system
having earned grades and awarded grades. Grading is done based on the percentage of
marks secured by a candidate in individual course as detailed below:
Range of Percentage Letter Qualitative Grade

of Marks Grade Meaning Point
90-100 A+ Outstanding 10
Earned grade
85-89 A Excellent 9
Due to relative B+ Very Good 8
grading system the B Good 7
ranges of marks may C+ Average 6 Awarded grade
vary for each course C Satisfactory 5
based on the normal D Pass 4
distribution of marks
< 40 for theory and F Fail 0
Earned grade
< 50 for Lab
e. After completion of the Programme, the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) from the I
Semester to VIII Semester (from III to VIII semester for lateral entry) is calculated using the
formula:
Where n is the number of courses registered for, ‘c i’ is the credits allotted to the given
course and ‘gi’ is the grade point secured in the corresponding course.
5.1 Continuous Assessment Pattern for all Courses

a. Theory Course
 Out of 40 marks allotted for continuous assessment 30 marks will be awarded based
on two tests (Each Test will be conducted for 40 marks and scale down to 30 marks)
conducted and 10 marks shall be awarded based on assignment test given below:
Internal Test 1 & Test 2 : 30 Marks (80 % of marks secured in 1st best internal tests
and 20% marks secured in 2nd best internal test)
 The duration of each internal test will be 90 minutes addressing predominantly
on lower order thinking skills and shall cover two units of syllabus in each test
 All the students will be notified with the marks secured within one week after the
completion of the sessional exams
xii
 Students are permitted for reconciliation with in a period of two working days
after the notification of marks
 The evaluation methodology of Design and Drawing Courses coming under
theory will be given in their respective course handouts which will be approved
by department HOD.
Assignment Test : 10 Marks (Test will be conducted for 30 marks and scale
scale down to 10 marks)
 The duration of each test will be 120 minutes predominantly focusing on Higher
Order Thinking Skills covering all the possible range of all such HOTs. In case, if
the course has little scope of HOTs, assessment shall be carried out with LOTs
b. Integrated Course
40 marks allotted for continuous assessment as given below:
Theory Course
20 marks will be awarded based on two tests conducted similar to theory( Each Test
will be conducted for 40 marks and scale down to 20 marks) as given below:
Internal Test 1 & Test 2 : 20 Marks (80 % of marks secured in 1st best internal tests
and 20% marks secured in 2nd best internal test)
Laboratory
20 marks are awarded for continuous assessment and following is the pattern for the
award of 20 marks
Preparation, Observation & Result : 10 Marks
Record : 05 Marks
Internal Test : 05 Marks
External Exam (Lab) : 30 Marks
External Exam (Theory) : 60 Marks
c. Laboratory Course:
25 marks are awarded for continuous assessment and following is the pattern for
the award of 25 marks
Without Mini Project:
Record : 05 Marks
Viva – Voce : 05 Marks
With Mini Project (through Augmented Experiments):
Record : 05 Marks
Viva – Voce : 05 Marks
Augmented Experiment : 05 Marks
xiii
Engineering drawing course is evaluated in line with lab courses and the
pattern of awarding 25 marks for continuous evaluation is as following
Day-to-day work : 15 marks
Internal test : 10 marks
There shall be two internal tests for 10 marks each during the semester and the
average shall be considered.
d. Term Paper
Continuous Assessment : 50 Marks
Distribution
Literature Survey : 10 Marks
Review 1 : 15 Marks
Review 2 : 15 Marks
Final Presentation : 10 Marks
e. Audit Courses
Online Objective Test : 50 Marks
f. Mini Project
Distribution
Review 1 : 05 Marks
Review 2 : 05 Marks
g. Project
Distribution
Innovativeness of the Project : 05 Marks
Experimentation / Simulation : 20 Marks
Result Analysis : 05 Marks
Review 1 : 20 Marks
Review II : 20 Marks
Project Report : 10 Marks
h. Full Semester Internship

Distribution
Internship Progress Report : 20 Marks
xiv
On Site Assessment : 30 Marks

Assessment by Industry : 100 Marks
(Intern Assessment Tool)
Final Assessement on Campus : 50 Marks
Total : 200 Marks
Distribution
Project Report : 120 Marks
i. Co-Curricular and Extra Curricular (CCEC) Activities
Students shall acquire 1 credit each in 2nd and 3rd years with the following
scheme:
Scheme of evaluation for the CCEC activities:
 No. of slots in each Semester @ 2 slots every week : 24
 No. of Stream (2-CC + 1-EC) :3
 No. of slots allotted for each stream :8
Requirement for the award of 1- Credit
 Students shall choose at least two streams of events in each semester
 Students shall secure 75% attendance in each stream of events to obtain
a certificate
 Students shall obtain 2 certificates of Participation in each semester.
The credits earned through these courses will be indicated in the grade sheet and
will not be taken into account for CGPA calculation.
j. Employability Skills (ES)
Students have to take up these courses from 3rd – 6th semesters. In both streams i.e
Aptitude Skills & Soft Skills (AS and SS) Students will be assessed in each semester.
Based on the marks secured in continuous assessment, students will be assessed for
AS. Based on the attendance for the various activities scheduled, students will be
assessed for SS. 16 periods are allotted for each stream per semester.
 Assessment for Aptitude skills

Continuous assessment : 30 Marks
Comprehensive Test : 20 Marks
For continuous assessment one examination will be conducted after every 5 weeks for
a maximum of 10 marks each (3x10=30). At the end of the semester a comprehensive
test will conducted for 20 marks. The student shall secure at least 40% marks in each
semester to get qualified.
xv
Assessment of Soft Skills

Continuous Assessment for Soft skill is done based on the participation of the students
in the various activities schedule during each semester. In every semester 6 activities
under SS will be organized and students are expected to attend at least 4 activities to
get qualified.
Student will secure 1 credit at the end of 4th semester and at the end of 6th semester
subject to the condition that he/she secures 40% marks in AS and 75 attendance in SS
in each semester.
h. Industry Driven One Credit Courses

Online Objective Test : 25 Marks
Grading:
Marks 25 ≤ and 20 ≥ : Excellent
Marks 20 < and 15 ≥ : Very Good
Marks 15 < and 10 ≥ : Good
Marks < 10 : Satisfactory
6. Attendance Requirements
a) It is desirable for a candidate to put on 100% attendance in all the subjects.

However, a candidate shall be permitted to appear for the semester end
examination by maintaining at least 75% of attendance on an average in all the
courses in that semester put together
b) The shortage of attendance on medical grounds can be condoned to an extent of
10% provided a medical certificate is submitted to the Head of the Department
when the candidate reports back to the classes immediately after the leave.
Certificates submitted afterwards shall not be entertained. Condonation fee as fixed
by the college for those who put on attendance between ≥ 65% and <75% shall be
charged before the end examinations. Attendance may also be condoned as per the
State Government rules for those who participate in sports, co-curricular and extra-
curricular activities provided their attendance is in the minimum prescribed limits
for the purpose and recommended by the concerned authority
c) In case of the students having overall attendance less than 65% after condonation
shall be declared detained and has to repeat semester again
d) In case of the student having less than 65% of attendance in any of the course
during a particular semester, he/she is not permitted to appear for that particular
course in the semester end examinations. In such cases, the students need to
undergo extra classes during the vacation or at convenient time to earn the shortage
of attendance. After completing the attendance requirements he/she may be
permitted to appear for the examination and it will be treated as a second attempt
e) His / her academic progress and conduct have been satisfactory
7. Promotion Policies
xvi
 In four year B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be promoted from 2nd year to 3rd
year only if s/he fulfills the academic requirements and earning of minimum 50% of
credits up to 2nd year
 In four year B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be promoted from 3rd year to 4th
year only if s/he fulfills the academic requirements and earning of minimum 50%
credits up to 3rd year
 In three year lateral entry B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be promoted from 3rd
year to 4th year only if s/he fulfills the academic requirements and earning of
minimum 50% credits up to 3rd year
8. Graduation Requirements
a) The following academic requirements shall be met for the award of the B. Tech. Degree
 Student shall secure 174 credits for regular B. Tech. Programme and 132 credits for
the students who entered in second year through lateral entry scheme. However, the
CGPA obtained for the best 167 credits (Excluding any one 3 credit course, CCEC and
ES) and 125 credits(Excluding any one 3 credit course, CCEC and ES)respectively
shall be considered for the award of Grade/Class/Division
 A student of a regular Programme who fails to earn 174 credits within eight
consecutive academic years from the year of his/her admission with a minimum CGPA
of 4.0 shall forfeit his/her degree and his/her admission stands cancelled
 A student of a lateral entry Programme who fails to earn 132 credits within six
consecutive academic years from the year of his/her admission with a minimum CGPA
of 4.0 shall forfeit his/her degree and his/her admission stands cancelled
b) Award of degree
Classification of degree will be as follows:
i. CGPA ≥ 7.5 : Degree with Distinction

ii. CGPA ≥6.5 and < 7.5 : Degree with First Class
iii. CGPA ≥5.0 and < 6.5 : Degree with Second Class
iv. CGPA ≥4.0 and < 5.0 : Degree with Pass Class
 First Class with Distinction: A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree
(vide clause 8 (a) having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters
(six semesters for lateral entry candidates) at the first opportunity, within eight
consecutive semesters (six consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after
the commencement of his /her study and securing a CGPA of 7.5 and above shall be
declared to have passed in First Class with Distinction. For this purpose the
withdrawal from examination (vide clause 9) will not be construed as an
opportunity for appearance in the examination
 First Class: A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 8 (a)
having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters (six semesters for
lateral entry candidates) within maximum period of ten consecutive semesters
xvii
(eight consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after the commencement
of his /her study and securing a CGPA of 6.5 and above shall be declared to have
passed in First Class
 Second Class : A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 8
(a) having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters (six semesters
for lateral entry candidates) within maximum period of ten consecutive semesters
(eight consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after the commencement
of his /her study and securing a CGPA of 5.0 and above shall be declared to have
passed in Second Class
 Degree with Pass Mark : All other candidates who qualify for the award of the
degree shall be declared to have passed in Degree with Pass Mark
c) Grafting
In order to extend the benefit to the students with one/ two backlogs after either 6th
semester or 8th semester, GRAFTING option is provided to the students enabling their
placements and fulfilling graduation requirements. Following are the guidelines for the
Grafting:
 Grafting will be done among the courses within the semester. Shall draw a
maximum of 7 marks from the any one of the cleared courses in the semester and
will be grafted to the failed course in the same semester.
 Students shall be given a choice of grafting only once in the 4 years Programme,
either after 6th semester (Option#1) or after 8th semester (Option#2)
 Option#1: Applicable to students who have maximum of TWO theory courses in 5th
and/or 6th semesters
 Option#2: Applicable to students who have maximum of TWO theory courses in 7th
and/or 8th semesters.
 Eligibility for grafting:
i. Prior to the conduct of the supplementary examination after the
declaration of the 6th or 8th semester results.
ii. She/he must appear in all regular or supplementary examinations as
per the provisions laid down in regulations for the courses s/he
appeals for grafting.
iii. The marks obtained by her/him in latest attempt shall be taken into
account for grafting of marks in the failed course(s).
d) Betterment chance
Student who clears all the subjects up to 6th semester and wish to improve their CGPA
can register and appear for one betterment chance for maximum of any five theory
courses up to 6th semester. Betterment chance can be availed along with 7th and 8th
semester examinations
e) Quick Supplementary Examination

Student who clears all the courses up to 7th semester shall have a chance to appear for
Quick Supplementary Examination to clear the failed courses of 8th semester
xviii
f) All the candidates who register for the semester end examination will be issued
memorandum of marks by the Institute. Apart from the semester wise marks memos,
the institute will issue the provisional certificate subject to the fulfillment of all the
academic requirements
9. Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses
a. It is mandatory that all the students need to earn the minimum number of credits (as
per clause 8) for the award of B. Tech. degree in their respective disciplines. However a
student can earn more number of credits if they wish, by registering one additional
course, from the list of courses available in the curriculum of all disciplines, over and
above to the existing courses from 4th semester to 6th semester
b. The students who are opting for full semester internship (FSI) in the 7th or 8th Semester,
they are permitted to take the courses as listed in 7th and 8th semester of the curriculum
are from the list of electives furnished in the curriculum
c. The students, who are in non FSI mode, shall register for the project work in the 8 th
semester only
d. The student shall be permitted to drop any SSC at any point of time
e. All the courses registered and cleared by a student in this mode will be mentioned in the
Cumulative Grade Memo (CGM) as additional acquired. However the CGPA is calculated
for the best 167/125 credits only (as mentioned in the clause 8)
10. Withdrawal from the Examination
a. A candidate may, for valid reasons, be granted permission by the Principal to withdraw
from appearing for the examination in any course or courses of only one semester
examination during the entire duration of the degree Programme. Also, only ONE
application for withdrawal is permitted for that semester examination in which
withdrawal is sought
b. Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to write
the examination and if it is made prior to the commencement of the examination in that
course or courses and also recommended by the Head of the Department
c. Such Withdrawal from the examination shall be treated as absent for the 1st attempt to
the respective examination and will lose the eligibility for First Class with Distinction
d. The student shall be allowed to drop FSI course either 7th or 8th semester within 4
weeks from the commencement of the FSI Programme due any uncertainty from either
side. In such case s/he will automatically entered into Non-FSI pattern of curriculum,
and s/he needs to register for respective courses in that semester and appear for
semester end examinations. In case if s/he has earned equivalent number of credits or
near to the equivalent number of credits with respect to clause 9, s/he shall forbid the
courses either partially or fully
e. If any student withdraws from FSI course after the stipulated period mentioned in the
clause 10.d, s/he will be considered as detained from the semester. S/he needs to
register for the semester in the next academic year
xix
General
a. s/he represents “she” and “he” both

b. Where the words ‘he’, ‘him’, ‘his’, occur, they imply ‘she’, ‘her’, ‘hers’ also
c. The academic regulations should be read as a whole for the purpose of any interpretation
d. In the case of any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of
the Chairman, Academic Council will be final
The college may change or amend the academic regulations or syllabi from time to time and the
changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students with effect from the dates
notified by the institute.
11. Curriculum: The curriculum of all the UG Programmes is given below
xx
Department of Electrical & Electronics Engineering, GMRIT | Curriculum | Regulation 2016
Department Vision
To be a nationally preferred Electrical & Electronics Engineering department of learning for

students and teachers alike, with dual commitment to research and serving students in an
atmosphere of innovation and critical thinking.
Department Mission
1. To provide high-quality education in Electrical & Electronics Engineering to prepare

the graduates for a rewarding career in Electrical & Electronics Engineering and
related industries, in tune with evolving needs of the industry
2. To prepare the students to become thinking professionals and good citizens who
would apply their knowledge critically and innovatively to solve professional and
social problems
Program Educational Objectives (PEOs)
PEO 1: Engage in ongoing learning and professional development through self-study,

continuing education in Electrical & Electronics Engineering and also in other allied
fields.
PEO 2: Apply their engineering skills, exhibiting critical thinking and problem solving
skills in professional engineering practices or tackle social, technical and business
challenges.
PEO 3: Adopt ethical attitude and exhibit effective skills in communication, management,
teamwork and leadership qualities.
1
Program Outcomes (POs)

Engineering graduate will be able to:
PO 1: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an
engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.
(Engineering knowledge)
PO 2: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex engineering
problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics,
natural sciences, and engineering sciences. (Problem analysis)
PO 3: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or
processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public
health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.
(Design/development of solutions)
PO 4: Use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of
experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to
provide valid conclusions. (Conduct investigations of complex problems)
PO 5: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering
and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with
an understanding of the limitations. (Modern tool usage)
PO 6: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health,
safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice. (The engineer and society)
PO 7: Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions in societal and
environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable
development. (Environment and sustainability)
PO 8: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice. (Ethics)
PO 9: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and
in multidisciplinary settings. (Individual and team work)
PO 10: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering
community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions. (Communication)
PO 11: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and management
principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to
manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments. (Project management and
finance)
PO 12: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent
and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change. (Life-long
learning)
PO 13: Utilize statistics, transformation methods, discrete mathematics and application of
differential equations in analyzing and design of electrical/electronic systems..
(Program Specific)
PO 14: Analyze, design and implement computer control of electrical systems in any
problem/application of electrical/electronic (c) engineering. (Program Specific)
2
Department of Electrical & Electronics Engineering

[Minimum Credits to be earned: 174 (for regular students)/132(for Lateral entry students)]
Periods
No Course Code Course POs
L T P C
First Semester
1 16HSX01 English Communication Skills I 10 3 1 - 3
2 16MAX01 Engineering Mathematics I 1,2 3 1 - 3
3 16PYX01 Engineering Physics 1,2 3 1 - 3
4 16MEX01 Engineering Mechanics 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
5 16CSX01 Problem solving using C 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
6 16PYX02 Engineering Physics Lab 4 - - 3 2
7 16CSX02 Problem solving using C Lab 4 - - 3 2
8 16MEX02 Engineering Drawing 4,9,10 - - 3 2
Total 15 5 9 21
Second Semester
1 16HSX03 English Communication Skills II 10 3 1 - 3
2 16MAX02 Engineering Mathematics II 1,2 3 1 - 3
3 16CYX01 Engineering Chemistry 1,2 3 1 - 3
4 16EEX01 Basic Electrical Engineering 1,2 3 1 - 3
5 16CHX01 Environmental Studies 1, 3, 6,7 3 1 - 3
6 16HSX02 English Communication Skills Lab 10 - - 3 2
7 16CYX02 Engineering Chemistry Lab 4, - - 3 2
8 16MEX03 Engineering Workshop 1,2,10,12 - - 3 2
Total 15 5 9 21
Third Semester
Periods
L T P C
1 16MA303 Engineering Mathematics III 1,2 3 - 2 4
2 16EE302 Circuit Theory 1,2 3 1 - 3
3 16EE303 DC Machines 1,2 3 1 - 3
4 16EE304 Electromagnetic Field Theory 1,2 3 1 - 3
5 16EC302 Digital Electronics 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
6 16EC303 Electronic Devices & Circuits 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
7 16EC307 Digital Electronics Lab 4 - - 3 2
8 16EC308 Electronic Devices & Circuits Lab 4 - - 3 2
9 16EE309 Electrical Engineering Lab 4 - - 3 2
10 16HSX05 CC & EC Activities I 10 - - 3 -
11 16ESXIA Employability Skills I 8,10 - 2 - -
Total 20 4 12 25
Fourth Semester
1 16EC503 Linear IC Applications 1, 2,3 3 1 - 3
2 16EE402 Control Systems 2,3,5,13,14 3 - 2 4
3 16EE403 Network Analysis & Synthesis 1, 2,13 3 1 - 3
4 16EE404 Transformers & Induction Machines 2,3,14 3 1 - 3
5 16EE405 Power Plant Engineering & Economics 2,6,7 3 1 - 3
6 16EE406 Electrical Measurements & Instrumentation 2,3,14 3 1 - 3
7 16EC607 Linear IC Applications Lab 4 - - 3 2
Electrical Measurements & Instrumentation
8 16EE408 4 - - 3 2
Lab
9 16EE409 DC Machines Lab 4 - - 3 2
10 16HSX05 CC & EC Activities I 10 - - 3 1
11 16ESXIB Employability Skills II 8,10 - 2 - 1
Total 21 3 12 27
Fifth Semester
No Course Code Course POs Periods
3
L T P C
1 16CS307 Object Oriented Programming 2,3,4,5,11,12 3 - 2 4
2 16EE502 Power Electronics 2,3,13,14 3 1 - 3
3 16EE503 Power Transmission & Distribution 2,3,13 3 1 - 3
4 16EE504 Signal and Systems Theory 2,3,13 3 1 - 3
5 16EE505 Synchronous & Special Machines 2,3,14 3 1 - 3
6 Elective I / CC 3
7 16EE507 AC Machines Lab 4 - - 3 2
16EE508 /
8 Term Paper / Mini project 9,10,11,12 - - 3 2
16EE509
9 16HSX06 CC & EC Activities II 10 - - 3 -
10 16ESX2A Employability Skills III 8,10 - 2 - -
11 Summer Internship 10, 11 - - - -
Total 16 4 12 23
Sixth Semester
1 16EE601 Discrete Signal Processing 2, 3,13,14 3 1 - 3
2 16EE602 Electrical Drives 2,3,14 3 1 - 3
3 16EE603 Power System Analysis 2,3,5,14 3 1 - 3
4 16EC602 Microprocessors & Microcontrollers 1,2,3,4,5,10 3 - 2 4
5 Elective II / CC 3
6 Elective III (Open Elective) 3
7 16EE607 Power Electronics Lab 4, 5 - - 3 2
16EE508 /
8 Term Paper / Mini project 9,10,11,12 - - 3 2
16EE509
9 Audit Course 8 - - - -
10 16HSX06 CC & EC Activities II 10 - - 3 1
11 16ESX2B Employability Skills IV 8,10 - 2 - 1
Total 16 0 12 25
Seventh Semester
Periods
L T P C
Engineering Economics & Project 1,2,3,9,11
1 16HSX04 3 1 - 3
Management
2 Elective IV / CC 3
3 Elective V / CC 3
4 16EE704 Electrical Systems and Simulation Lab 4,5 - - 3 2
5 16PE704 Power Systems Lab 4 - - 3 2
9, 10, 11,12,
6 16EE706 Full Semester Internship* - - - 16
13, 14
Total 3 1 6 13/16
Eighth Semester
1 16EE801 Ethics for Electrical Engineers 6,7,8,12 4 - - 3
2 16EE802 Power System Protection 2,3,14 4 - - 3
3 Elective VI / CC 3
9, 10, 11,12,
4 16EE804 Project - - - 10
13, 14
9, 10, 11,12,
5 16EE706 Full Semester Internship** 16
13, 14
Total 8 0 0 19/16
*Student who opt for FSI-16EE706 during 7th semester, have to register one more additional elective and
16EE704 & 16PE608 as additional lab courses during 8 th semester.
** Student who opt for FSI-16EE706 during 8th semester, have to register an additional course in consultation
with HoD during 7th semester.
4
List of Electives
Elective I
Course Periods
No Course POs
Code L T P C
1 16EE001 Electrical Machine Design 2,3 3 1 - 3
2 16EE002 Automotive Electrical Engineering 2,3 3 1 - 3
3 16EE003 Advanced Control Systems 2,3 3 1 - 3
4 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective II
1 16IT504 Computer Networks 1,2 4 - - 3
2 16CS304 Data Base Management Systems 2,3 4 - - 3
3 16CSX15 Fundamentals of Software Engineering 2,3,5 4 - - 3
4 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective III (Open Electives – Mathematics, Chemistry, Entrepreneurship Skills, Industrial Safety and
Engineering & Technology)
1 16CE007 Disaster Management 2 3 1 - 3
2 16EE004 Renewable Energy Sources 2,7 3 1 - 3
3 16ME009 Principles of Entrepreneurship 1,5,8,11 3 1 - 3
4 16EC004 Fundamentals of Global Positioning System 1,2,6 3 1 - 3
5 16CS006 Computational Intelligence 3,5,6 3 1 - 3
6 16CS007 IoT for Engineering Applications 1,5 3 1 - 3
7 16CH007 Industrial Safety & Hazard Management 1,2,3,6,8 3 1 - 3
8 16IT005 Fundamentals of Cloud Computing 2,5,6 3 1 - 3
9 16PE007 Smart Grid Technology 3,5 3 1 - 3
10 16MA001 Computational Mathematics 1,2 3 1 - 3
11 16CY001 Nano Science and Technology 1,2,12 3 1 - 3
Elective IV
1 16EE005 Flexible AC Transmission Systems 2,3 4 - - 3
2 16EE006 High Voltage DC Transmission 2,3 4 - - 3
3 16EE007 Power System Deregulation 2,3 4 - - 3
4 16EE008 Power System Operation and Control 2,3 3 1 - 3
5 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective V
1 16EC023 Communication Systems 1,2 4 - - 3
2 16EE009 Electric Locomotives, Traction and Vehicles 2,6 4 - - 3
3 16EE010 PLCs & SCADA 2,3 4 - - 3
4 16EC505 VLSI Design 1,2,3 4 - - 3
5 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective VI
Artificial intelligence applications to power
1 16EE011 2,3,5 4 - - 3
systems
2 16EE012 Design and Layout of Power Systems 2,3,8 4 - - 3
3 16EE013 Electrical Installation, Design & Estimation 2,3 4 - - 3
4 16EE014 Energy Audit, Conservation &Management 2,3,6,8 4 - - 3
5 16EE015 Power Quality 2,3,8 4 - - 3
6 16EC011 Embedded Systems 1,2,3 4 - - 3
MOOCs - - - 3
Contemporary Courses (CC)1
1 16CSX16 Digital Marketing (Self Study Mode) 3,14 - - - 1
2 16EE017 Batteries & Super Capacitors 3,14 4 - - 3
3Contemporary and One Credit Courses may vary from one Academic Year to another academic year and
depends on the recent trends in the industries
5
3 16EE018 Power System Devices 3,14 4 - - 3

4 16EE019 Railway Signaling System 3,14 4 - - 3
One Credit Course (s)3
1 16EEI01 Automotive Electrical and Electronics 2,3,14 1 0 0 1
2 16EEI02 Solid State Lighting 2,3,14 1 0 0 1
3 16EEI03 Air field Ground Lighting System 2,3,14 1 0 0 1
4 16EEI04 Power plant Familiarization 2,3,14 1 0 0 1
Audit Courses
1 16AT001 Contemporary India: Economy, Polity & Society
(ME)
2 16AT002 Indian Heritage and Culture (EEE)
3 16AT003 Intellectual Property Rights and Patents (ECE)
4 16AT004 Introduction to Journalism (CSE)
5 16AT005 Professional Ethics and Morals (CE) ---
6 16AT006 Science, Technology and Development (Chem)
7 16AT007 Industrial sociology (PE)
8 16AT008 Organizational Behavior (IT)
9 16AT009 Communication Etiquette in workplaces (BS& H)
6
CURRICULUM FEATURES
UNDER ACADEMIC REGULATION 2016
1. Choice based credit system
2. Types of learning strategies
Curriculum is designed and developed in such a way that it provides a high degree of flexibility to
promote a learner centric environment through different types of learning strategies viz.
Independent learning, collaborative learning and interactive learning.
 Independent learning
o Self study elective courses
o Self study topics in each unit in all the courses
 Collaborative Learning
o Laboratory classes
o Mini projects in all laboratory courses
o Main project to demonstrate all the possible learning outcomes
 Interactive Learning
o Tutorial classes in all the courses wherever possible
3. Industry engagement
 Industry driven 3-credit elective courses

 Industry driven 1-credit courses from 3rd semester onwards
 Summer internship (One month duration) at the end of 2nd year during the program of
study
 Full semester internship (FSI) (Six month) during fourth year during the program of
study
4. Layered learning
5. Research oriented electives in the form of term paper
6. Credited courses for employability skills, extra- and co- curricular activities
7. Assessment pattern for all courses in accordance with revised Bloom’s taxonomy
8. Distribution of courses
7
Department of Electrical & Electronics Engineering, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016
16HSX01 English Communication Skills I

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Infer explicit and implicit meaning of a text

2. Construct clear, grammatically correct sentences using a variety of sentence structures
3. Analyze and Produce various types & formats of emails, letters in formal & informal ways to meet
particular purposes
4. Select and apply appropriate words and phrases in different contexts
5. Formulate and present ideas effectively in spoken form
6. Discuss social issues with concern and imagine possible solutions
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO10
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
CO6 3
3–Strongly linked | 2–Moderately linked | 1–Weakly linked
Unit I
In London by M. K. Gandhi
Using appropriate word/phrases, synonyms and antonyms, nouns, pronouns, paragraph writing, changing
autobiography into biography
Montgomery Bus Boycott
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Pecuniary Independence by P. T. Barnum
Using appropriate word/phrases, synonyms and antonyms, Adjectives, Adverbs, Note-making, Rewriting
sentences and Short talk
TED-Sashi Tharoor
12+3 Hours
Unit III
The Drunkard by W. H. Smith
Similes, Rhythmic expressions, One-word substitution, Describing people, Synonym and Antonyms, Tenses
(past and present), Gerund and Verbal Adjective, Summarizing, essay writing, writing paragraph
Essay writing tips
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Three Days to see by Hellen Keller
Deriving words, adjective formation, Tenses (future), prefixes, ModalAuxiliary verbs, Dialogue writing,
Expressing opinions/ideas, collecting information
Famous Indians with disability
11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. M. S. Rama Murty and M. Hariprasad, Prose for Communication Skills, Ravindra Publishing House,
Hyderabad, 2012
Reference (s)
1. J. Seely, Oxford Guide to Effective Writing and Speaking, OUP, 2013

2. Quirk, Greenbaum, Leech and Svartvk, A Comprehensive Grammar of the English language, Pearson,
India, 2010
3. R. Murphy, English Grammar in Use, 4th Ed, CUP, Cambridge, 2012
4. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Montgomery_Bus_Boycott
8
5. https://www.ted.com/talks/shashi_tharoor?language=en
6. http://www.internationalstudent.com/essay_writing/essay_tips
7. http://www.thebetterindia.com/16449/famous-indians-with-disability
Sample question (s)

Internal Assessment Pattern
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test 1 (%)
Remember 25 25 ---
Understand 25 25 ---
Apply 50 50 40
Analyze --- --- 30
Evaluate --- --- ---
Create --- --- 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Find a synonym for each of the following words.
i. Emulate ii. Mend
2. Find an antonym for each of the following words
i. Intensive ii. Extravagance
Understand
1. Sketch the personality of Edward Middleton as he emerges from the conversation in the play.
2. Summarize Gandhi’s attempts to model himself on the English gentleman and which circumstances
force him to realize that he has been pursuing a false idea?
Apply
1. Construct a dialogue between students about organizing music club activities in their college.
2. Construct a dialogue between two friends about how they plan their own careers.
Analyze
1. Prepare an essay in about 300 words on ‘some concrete measures to combat pollution.
2. Create an imaginary conversation between a blind boy and his friend on their visit to a drama.
1
Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course
9
16MAX01 Engineering Mathematics I

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Classify and solve analytically a wide range of first and higher order ordinary differential equations
with constant coefficients
2. Apply the knowledge of Mean value theorems, Maxima and Minima of functions of several variables
3. Analyze the characteristics and trace the curve of an equation
4. Adapt methods for measuring lengths, volumes, surface area of an object and transformation of
coordinates in practical situations
5. Utilize basic knowledge of conservative field, potential function and work done in engineering
problems
6. Identify the relationships between line, surface and volume integrals
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Differential Equations
Differential equations of first order and first degree–exact, linear and Bernoulli Applications to Newton’s Law
of cooling, Law of natural growth and decay, orthogonal trajectories, Non-homogeneous linear differential
equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients with RHS term of the type e ax, Sin ax, cos ax,
polynomials in x, eaxV(x), xV(x)
Heat flow problems–Variation of parameters 11+4 Hours
Unit II
Mean Value Theroms and Functions of Several Variables
Generalized Mean Value theorem (All theorems without proof), Functions of several variables-Partial
differentiation, Functional dependence, Jacobian, Maxima and Minima of functions of two variables with
constraints and without constraints. Curve tracing-Cartesian-Polar and Parametric curves
Rolle’s, Lagrange’s and Cauchy’s mean value theorems–Generalized Mean Value theorem proofs
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Applications of Integration
Applications of Integration to Lengths, Volumes and Surface areas of revolution in Cartesian and Polar
Coordinates. Multiple integrals-double and triple integrals, change of variables (Cartesian and Polar
coordinates), Change of order of Integration
Applications of Integration–Centroid–Mass 12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Vector Calculus
Vector Differentiation-Gradient, Divergence, Curl and their related properties of sums-products,
Laplacianoperator, Vector Integration - Line integral, work done, Potential function, area, surface and volume
integrals, Vector integral theorems: Greens, Stokes and Gauss Divergence Theorems (All theorems without
proof) and related problems
Vector identities–Proof of Green’s theorem 11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42 nd Ed., Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012
2. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9 th Ed., Wiley, 2012
10
3. R. K. Jain, S. R. K.Iyengar, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 4 th Ed., NarosaPublishingHouse,

NewDelhi, 2014
Reference (s)
B. V. Ramana, Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009
1. D. S. Chandrashekharaiah, Engineering Mathematics, Volume 1, Prism Publishers, 2010
2. T. K. V. Iyengar, B. Krishna Ghandhi, S. Ranganathan and M.V. S.S.N. Prasad, Engineering
Mathematics, Volume-I, 12th Ed., S. Chand Publishers, 2014
3. U. M. Swamy, P. VijayaLaxmi, K. L. Sai Prasad and M. Phani Krishna Kishore, A Text Book of
Engineering Mathematics–I, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2010
Sample question (s)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test2 (%)
Remember 30 30 ---
Apply 30 30 60
Analyze --- --- -
Evaluate --- --- 30
Create --- --- 10
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Find the Integrating factor of x 2
  
y  2 xy 2 dx  x3  3x 2 y dy  0

Define solenoidal and irrotational for a Vector point function f .
2.
3.
Find the volume of solid generated by the revolution of the cardioid r = a(1+cos ) about the initial line
=0
Understand
1. ( D 2  4 D  4) y  0
Solve
d2 y dy
2. Solve 2
 6  25 y  e 2 x  Sin x
dx dx
3. Find the volume of the greatest rectangular parallelopiped that can be inscribed in the ellipsoid
x2 y 2 z 2
  1
a 2 b2 c2
Apply
1. A body originally at 80 0Ccools down to 60 oC in 20 minutes, the temperature of the air being
40oC.What will be the temperature of the body after 40 minutes from original?
2. Evaluate the integral by the change of order of integration
3. Show that the vector + is irrotational and find its Scalar
potential
Create
1. Apipe 20 cm in diameter contains steam at 200 0C. It is covered by a layer of insulation 6cm thick and
thermal conductivity 0.0003. If the temperarature of the outer surface is 30 oC. Find the heat lose per
hour from 2 meter length of the pipe
2
11
16PYX01 Engineering Physics

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the concepts of Interference, Diffraction, Polarization and their applications

2. Summarize the concepts of electric fields, magnetic fields and superconductivity and make out the
scope of applications in various engineering fields
3. Outline the quantum mechanics to infer conductivity nature of metals
4. Explain the properties and application of dielectric, magnetic and Nano-materials
5. Demonstrate the emission of laser light, optical fibers and their applications in various Engineering
fields
6. Analyze the engineering Applications based on Fundamental concepts
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Optics
Interference:Superposition of waves-Coherence-Young's double slit experiment-Interference in thin films by
reflection (Qualitative treatment)–Newton's rings.Diffraction: Fresnel and Fraunhoffer diffractions-Fraunhoffer
diffraction at a single slit-Diffraction grating-Grating spectrum, Polarization–Types of Polarization-Double
refraction-Nicol prism-Quarter and Half wave plate. Lasers: Characteristics of laser–Stimulated absorption–
Spontaneous emission-Stimulated emission–Population inversion–Pumping mechanism–Active medium–Laser
systems: Ruby laser-He-Ne laser–Semiconductor laser–Applications of Lasers
Wedge shaped film–Polarization–Holography
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Electrostatics and Electromagnetism
Gauss law in electricity and it’s applications: Coulomb’s law from Gauss law-spherically distributed charge-
Infinite line of charge-Infinite sheet of charges–Ampere's Law-Magnetic field due to current (Biot-Savart’s
Law)-B due to a current carrying wire and a circular loop,-Faraday’s law of induction-Lenz’s law-Induced
fields-Maxwell’s equations (Qualitative treatment)-Hall Effect-Electromagnetic Wave and poynting vector
(Qualitative treatment), Superconductivity–Superconductivity phenomenon-General properties-Meissner effect-
Penetration depth-Type I and type II superconductors-Flux quantization-DC and AC Josephson effect-
Applications of superconductors
Infinite line of charge–Infinite sheet of charges Quantum Interference (SQUID)
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Quantum Theory of Solids–Semiconductors–Optical Fiber
Quantum theory of solids: Dual nature of matter, properties of matter waves-Schrödinger’s wave equation–
Physical significance of wave function–Particle in a box (one dimensional)-Free electron theory of metals,
electrical conductivity-quantum free electron theory–Fermi Dirac Distribution-Kronig-Penney model
(qualitative)-Classification of materials into conductors-semi-conductors & insulators. Semiconductors: Carrier
Concentration (Intrinsic and Extrinsic, qualitative treatment only), Carrier drift, Carrier diffusion, Optical Fiber:
–principle and propagation of light in optical fibers–Numerical aperture and acceptance angle–types of optical
fibers–single and multimode, step index and graded index fibers–applications–fiber optic communication
system
Uncertainty principle–Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductor–Fiberoptic sensors
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Magnetic, Dielectric & Nanomaterials
12
Magnetic Materials: Origin of magnetic moment (Bohr Magneton)-Classification of Magnetic materials-Dia,

para, ferro, Anti-ferro and Ferri magnetism-Domain and Weiss field theory (qualitative treatment only)-
Hysteresis Curve-Soft and Hard magnetic materials-Applications of magnetic materials
Dielectric Materials: Dielectric Polarization-Electronic, ionic and orientation polarizations (Qualitative treatment)
-Dielectrics in alternating fields-frequency dependence of the Polarizability ((Qualitative treatment), Important
dielectric materials
Nanomaterials: Introduction to nano materials-Physical, mechanical-electrical and optical properties of nano
materials-Preparation techniques of nano materials (Sol-Gel, CVD, Ball Milling)-Nano tubes-Different methods
of preparation carbon nano tubes (CNT’s) (CVD)-Applications of Nanomaterials
Permeability–Magnetization–Dielectric constant–Ferro and Piezo electric effect and materials
10+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Halliday, Resnick and Krane, Physics Part-II, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2012
2. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, 6th Ed., Newage International Publishers, 2015
3. M. R. Srinivasan, Engineering Physics, 2 nd Ed., Newage International Publishers, 2014
4. A. S. Vasudeva, Modern Engineering Physics, S. Chand and Company, New Delhi, 2006
5. C. M. Srivastava and C.Srinivasan, Science of Engineering Materials, Wiley Eastern Pvt. Ltd, 1997
6. C. P. Poole and F. J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley, New Delhi, 2007
Reference (s)
1. R. K. Gour and S. L. Gupta, Engineering Physics, Dhanpathrai Publications, New Delhi, 2002
2. V. Rajendran, Engineering Physics, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private LTD, 2010
3. M. Armugam, Engineering Physics, Anuradha Agencies, 2007
Sample question (s)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test 3(%)
Remember 40 40 ---
Apply 20 20 80
Analyze --- --- 20
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Principle of Superposition?
2. State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction and Lenz’s law.
3. Summarize Meissenr’s effect of super conductors.
Understand
1. Explain the construction and working principle of Nicole’s prism.
2. Construct Ruby laser and explain its working principle with energy level diagram.
3. Conclude the inferences from the M-H characteristics of Type-1 and Type-2 super conductors.
Apply
1. List any four applications of lasers with reference to their characteristics.
2. Apply Biot-Savart’s law, and calculate the Magnetic field induction along the infinite length of a straight
conductor at points close to the conductor.
3. Calculate electric field intensity due to infinite line of charge by applying Gauss law.
Analyze
1. Compare Fraunhoffer’s diffraction and Fresnel’s diffractions.
2. Discuss the role of Meta stable states in lasing action.
3. Discuss the BCS theory of Superconductors.
3
13
16MEX01 Engineering Mechanics

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Draw the free body diagram of a given physical system and compute the resultant of a given coplanar
system of forces
2. Estimate the centroid of composite figures and bodies
3. Estimate area moment of inertia and mass moment of inertia of composite figures and bodies
4. Explain concepts of friction and principle of virtual work
5. Summarize power transmission through belts
6. Analyze plane truss (frame) by method of joints and method of sections
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 2 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 2 2
4 3 2 2
5 3 2 2
6 2 3 3
Unit I
System of forces-Equilibrium of system of forces
Types of Force systems-Coplanar Concurrent Forces–Resultant–Moment of a Force and its application–
Couples and Resultant of a Force System, Free body diagrams, equations of equilibrium of coplanar concurrent
and non-concurrent force systems, Lami’s theorem, resolution of a force into a force and a couple
Polygon law of forces for resultant
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Centroid-Centre of Gravity-Area Moments of Inertia-Mass Moment of Inertia
Centroids of simple figures (from basic principles)-Centroids of Composite Figures, Centre of gravity of simple
body (from basic principles), center of gravity of composite bodies, Definition–Moments of Inertia of simple
Figures, Polar Moment of Inertia, Transfer Theorem, Moments of Inertia of Composite Figures. Definition,
Moment of Inertia of simple bodies, Transfer Formula for Mass Moments of Inertia
Mass moment of inertia of composite bodies
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Friction-Power transmission through belts
Theory of friction–Angle of friction–Laws of friction-static friction–Kinetic friction, friction in bodies moving
up or down on an inclined plane-Introduction to belt and rope drives, types of belt drives, velocity ratio of belt
drives, slip of belt drives, tensions for flat belt drive, angle of contact, centrifugal tension, maximum tension of
belt
Condition for transmission of maximum power
11+4Hours
Unit IV
Analysis of perfect frames (Analytical Method)-Virtual Work
Types of Frames-Assumptions for forces in members of a perfect frame, Method of joints, Method of sections,
Force table, Cantilever Trusses, Structures with one end hinged and the other freely supported on rollers
carrying horizontal or inclined loads, Principle of Virtual Work-Application of the Principle of Virtual Work-
potential Energy and Equilibrium
Stable and Unstable Equilibrium 11+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. . Vi ay umar eddy, J. Suresh Kumar, Singer's Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics, BS
Publications, 3rd Edition, 2011
2. A. K. Tayal, Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics, Umesh Publications, 14th Edition, 2011
14
3. S. S. Bhavikatti, Engineering Mechanics, New Age International, 2008

4. S. Timoshenko & D. H. Young, and JV Rao, Engineering Mechanics, 4th Ed., TMH Education, 2006
Reference (s)
1. Irving H. Shames and G. Krishna MohanaRao, Engineering Mechanics, 4 th Ed., Pearson, 2006
2. R. K. Bansal, Engineering Mechanics, Laxmi Publications, 3rd Edition, 2004
Sample question (s)

Remember 20 20 ---
Apply 50 50 60
Analyze --- --- 40
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define centroid
2. List the different types of belt drives
3. Define angle of repose
Understand
1. Explain Lami’s theorem
2. Compare mass moment of inertia and area moment of inertia
3. Explain the difference between frame and truss
Apply
1. Solve the resultant of three forces acting on a hook as shown in below figure
2. Identify the centroid of T-section shown in below figure
3. Solve to find the power transmitted by a belt running over a pulley of 600 mm diameter at 200 r.p.m.
The coefficient of friction between the belt and the pulley is 0.25, angle of lap 160° and maximum
tension in the belt is 2500 N
4
15
16CSX01 Problem Solving using C
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Develop the flow charts and algorithms, and then implement, compile and debug programs in C
language for solving a problem
2. Design programs involving decision structures, loops for problem solving
3. Design programs to develop applications using array data structure
4. Solve scientific problems using functions
5. Make use of pointers to design applications for efficient and dynamic memory allocation
6. Design programs to create/update basic data files
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3

1 3 3 3
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2
4 3 3 3
5 2 2 3
6 2 3 3
Unit I
Programming Basics
Introduction, Algorithm / pseudo code, flowchart, program development steps, structure of a C program, Types,
Operators, and Expressions: C-tokens, Variable Names, Data Types and Sizes, Constants, Declarations, C-
operators, Type Conversions, Precedence and Order of Evaluation
Control Flow: Statements and Blocks, If-Else, Else-If, Switch, Loops-While and For, Loops- Do-while, Break
and Continue
Comma and size of operators–Conditional Expressions–goto and Labels
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Arrays and Functions
Array concept, definition, declaration, accessing elements, storing elements, strings and string manipulations, 2-
D arrays, Multidimensional arrays, Array Applications
Basics of Functions, Functions Returning Non-integers, External Variables, Scope Rules, Static Variables,
Block Structure, Storage Classes, user defined functions, standard library functions, recursive functions, passing
Arrays to functions, Functions Applications
Arithmetic operations on string–nesting of functions–preprocessor commands
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Pointers and Structures
Pointer concepts, initialization of pointer variables, pointers and function arguments, passing by address,
dangling memory, address arithmetic, Character pointers and functions, pointers to pointers, dynamic memory
management functions
Basics of Structures, Structures and Functions, Arrays of Structures, Pointers to Structures, Self-referential
Structures, typedef, Unions
Programs on Dynamic memory management using functions–Table Lookup
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
File Structures
Standard Input and Output, Formatted Output-printf, Variable-length Argument Lists, Formatted Input-scanf,
File Access
Data Structures: Introduction to linear and non-linear data Structures, definition: stack, queue
Error Handling-stderr and exit–Introduction to Single Linked Lists
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. B. W. Kernighan, Dennis M. Ritchie, The C–Programming Language-, 2nd Ed., PHI, 1990
2. H. Sahni and A. Freed, Fundamentals of Data Structures in C, 2 nd Ed., Universities Press, 2008
16
Reference (s)
1. Y. Kanetkar, Let us C, 8th Ed., BPB Publication, 2004
2. F. E. V. Prasad, C Programming: A Problem-Solving Approach, Giliberg, Cengage, 2010
3. A. S. Tenenbaum, Y. Langsam and M. J. Augenstein,Data Structures using C, Pearson Education, 2009
Sample question (s)

Remember 25 20 ---
Understand 35 40 30
Apply 40 40 40
Analyze --- --- 30
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define computer
2. List out operators
3. What is dangling pointer
Understand
1. Explain structure of a c program
2. Describe linear and nonlinear data structures
3. Explain multidimensional arrays
Apply
1. Implement matrix multiplication using arrays
2. Draw flow chart of program development steps
3. Demonstrate pointe to pointer concept.
Analyze
1. Compare structure and union
2. Differentiate logical and relational operators
3. Classify linear and nonlinear data structures
5
17
16PYX02 Engineering Physics Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Build the knowledge in the scientific methods and learn the process of measuring different physical
parameters
2. Develop the laboratory skills in handling of electrical and Optical instruments
3. Demonstrate the interference and diffraction phenomena of light
4. Inspect and experience physical principles of Magnetic fields and optical fiber communications
5. Apply the principles of physics and measure the solid state properties of materials
6. Design and analyze experiment based on physics concepts
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
1. Variation of magnetic field along the axis of current-carrying circular coil-Stewart and Gee’s Method
2. Determination of wavelengths of spectral line of mercury spectrum using diffraction grating
3. Determination of radius of curvature of convex lens by forming Newton’s rings
4. LCR circuit- Study of parallel and series Resonance
5. Measurement of thickness of a thin paper using wedge method
6. Fiber optics-Numerical aperture of a given fiber and study of bendig losses
7. Meldie’s Experiment–Transverse and longitudinal modes
8. Determination of wave length of Laser by diffraction grating
9. Determination of Hall Coefficient and charge carrier density of semi-conductor
10. Determination of Band gap of a semiconductor
List of Augmented Experiments6
1. To study the magnetization (M) of a ferromagnetic material in the presence of a magnetic field B and to
plot the hysteresis curve (M vs. B)
2. Study theThermoemf of the thermo couple
3. LCR Series and Parallel–Design of circuit for various resonance frequencies
4. Determination of characteristics of Laser beam
5. Determination of Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field
6. Study of double refraction in calcite crystals
7. Dispersive power of various liquids using spectrometer
8. Photo cell–Characteristics and determination of Planks constant
Reading Material (s)
1. Physics Lab manual–Department of Physics, BS & H, GMRIT, Rajam, 2015

2. Y. Aparna and K. Venkateswararao, Engineering Physics–I and II, VGS Techno series, 2010
3. S. Panigrahi and B. Mallick, Engineering Practical Physics, Cengage leaning, Delhi, 2015
6
Students shall opt any one of the Augmented Experiments in addition to the regular experiments
18
16CSX02 Problem Solving using C Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Implement, compile and debug programs in C language for solving a problem

2. Design programs involving decision structures, loops for problem solving
3. Design programs to develop applications using array data structure
4. Apply functions to solve real world problems
5. Make use of pointers to design applications with efficientuse of memory
6. Design programs to create/update basic data files
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
1. Algorithms and Flow charts design and evaluation (Minimum 2)
2. Write C Programs to demonstrate C-tokens and operators
3. Write C Programs to demonstrate Decision Making And Branching (Selection)
4. Write a C program to demonstrate different loops
5. Write a C program to demonstrate arrays
6. Write a C program to demonstrate functions
7. Write a C program to implement the following
A. To manipulate strings using string handling functions.
B. To manipulate strings without using string handling functions
8. Write a C program to demonstrate different library functions
9. Write a C program to implement the following
A. To exchange two values using call by value and reference
B. To multiply two matrices using pointers
10. Write a C program to demonstrate functions using pointers
11. Write a C program to implement the following operations using structure and functions:
i) Reading a complex number ii) Writing a complex number
12. Write a C program
A. To copy data from one file to another
B. To reverse the first n characters in a given file (Note: The file name and n are specified on the
command line)
1. Merging of two arrays
2. Arithmetic operations on two complex numbers
3. Employee's Management System
4. Library management
5. Department store system
6. Personal Dairy Management System
7. Telecom Billing Management System
8. Bank Management System
9. Contacts Management
10. Medical Store Management System

1. C Programming Lab manual–Department of CSE-GMRIT Rajam
7
19
16MEX02 Engineering Drawing

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Understand Principles of engineering drawing

2. Construct Conic sections using general methods and other methods
3. Construct Orthographic projections of Points, Lines and Planes
4. Construct Orthographic projections of Solids using basic drafting software
5. Construct Isometric projections using basic drafting software
6. Construct Orthographic projections from given isometric projections of an object and vice versa
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4 PO9 PO10

1 3 3 3
2 3 3 3
3 3 3 3
4 3 3 3
5 3 3 3
6 3 3 3
List of Experiments
Unit I
Conic Sections-Introduction to Orthographic Projections
Construction of conics using general method and other special methods
Orthographic Projections of Points, Straight Lines parallel to both planes, parallel to one plane and inclined to
other plane
9 Hours
Unit II
Orthographic Projections of Straight Lines and Planes
Projections of Straight Lines inclined to both planes; Projections of Planes; Regular Planes Perpendicular
Parallel to one Reference Plane and inclined to other Reference Plane; inclined to both the Reference Planes
Practice the following topics by using any one 2D drafting software

9 Hours
Unit III
Projections of Solids &Isometric Projections
Projections of Prisms, Cylinders, Pyramids and Cones with the axis inclined to one Principal Plane and Parallel
to the other, Projections of Prisms, Cylinders, Pyramids and Cones inclined to both the Principal Planes
Introduction to Isometric Projections, Isometric axes, angles, Isometric views, Construction of Isometric views
of Simple planes and Solids in various positions
15 Hours
Unit IV
Conversion of Engineering Views
Conversion of Orthographic Views of Simple Solid objects into Isometric View, Conversion of Isometric View
of Simple Solid objects into Orthographic Views
9 Hours
Total: 42 Hours
List of Drawing Sheets
1. Conics by General Method
2. Conics by using Special Methods
3. Projections of Points and Straight lines in Simple Positions
4. Projections of Lines inclined to both planes
5. Projections of Planes in Simple positions
6. Projections of Planes inclined to both planes
7. Projections of Solids
8. Projections of Solids inclined to both planes
9. Isometric Projections
20
10. Conversion of Orthographic views into Isometric views

11. Conversion of Isometric views into Orthographic views
1. Draw the Knuckle Pin and fork end of the knuckle joint
2. Draw the Socket and spigot cotter joint
3. Draw the Tommy bar and body of the Screw jack
4. Draw the Cup and Big and Small screws of screw jack
5. Draw the Connecting rod of IC Engine using AutoCAD
6. Draw the Pipe spool with flanges and a valve
7. Draw a sample pipe line construction design in oil and gas industries using AutoCAD
8. Draw the Pipe truss design using AutoCAD
9. Draw a 3-D bolt and nut with Threads using AutoCAD
10. Draw a 3-D Cross head pattern using AutoCAD
11. Draw the sample Bridge using AutoCAD
12. Draw the pipe vice using AutoCAD
13. Draw the Ni-Cd Battery zapper circuit diagram using AutoCAD
14. Draw the circuit diagram of battery charger with automatic cutoff using AutoCAD
15. Draw the satellite dish and Antenna using AutoCAD
Textbook (s)
1. N.D. Bhatt, V. M. Panchal, Pramod R. Ingle, Engineering drawing, Charotar Publications, 54 th Edition,
2014
2. D. M. Kulkarni, A.P. Rastogi, Ashoke K. Sarkar, Engineering Graphics with Auto CAD, Prentice Hall
of India, 2nd Edition, 2010
Reference (s)
1. K. C. John, Engineering Graphics for Degree, PHI Publications, 2 nd Edition, 2009
2. M. B. Shah and B. C. Rana, Engineering Drawing, Pearson Publishers, 2 nd Edition, 2009
3. D. A. Jolhe, Engineering Drawing, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 1st Edition, 2008
8
21
16HSX03 English Communication Skills II

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Build new academic vocabulary & phrases and make use of them in different contexts
2. Construct clear, grammatically correct sentences using a variety of sentence structures
3. Analyze and Produce various types & formats of emails, letters in formal & informal ways to meet
particular purposes
4. Compose and present ideas logically in written form
5. Organize ideas effectively in spoken form
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO10
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
The Knowledge Society by A. P. J. Abdul Kalam
Forming Negative words, Quantifiers, Letter Writing, Interviews, Scientific Terminology
Famous Indian Scientist Inventions
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Principles of Good Writing by L. A. Hill
Word definitions, Articles, e-mail writing, Debates, Noticing changes in English, Origin and meaning of
borrowed words
Effective writing tips
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Man’s Peril by Bertrand Russell
Deriving nouns, Prepositions, Phrasal verbs, Speeches, Report Writing, Problem solving
Bertrand Russell and Einstein Manifesto
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Shooting an Elephant by George Orwell
Using an appropriate word, conjunctions, voices, Cover letters, Resume, Dialogue writing, Group Discussion
Abridged version of Animal Farm
11+4 Hours
Total :45+15Hours
Textbook (s)
1. M. S. Rama Murty and M. Hariprasad, Prose for Communication Skills, Ravindra Publishing House,
Hyderabad, 2012
Reference (s)
1. J. Seely, Oxford Guide to Effective Writing and Speaking, OUP, 2013
2. Quirk, Greenbaum, Leech and Svartvik, A Comprehensive Grammar of the English language, Pearson,
India, 2010
3. Raymond Murphy, English Grammar in Use, 4th Ed, CUP, Cambridge, 2012
4. http://www.famousscientists.org/15-famous-indian-scientists-inventions/
5. http://www.grammarbook.com/grammar/effWrite.asp
6. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russell%E2%80%93Einstein_Manifesto)
22
7. http://cbhs.portlandschools.org/UserFiles/Servers/Server_1098483/File/Migration/Animal-Farm-
Abridged.pdf
Sample question (s)
Remember 25 25 ---
Apply 50 50 40
Analyze --- --- 30
Create --- --- 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Write one synonym for each of the following words.
a) Generate (b) Vivid
2. Write an antonym for each of the following words.
a) Unique (b) Interesting
3. Fill in the blanks with some or any in the following sentences.
a) There isn’t ______ milk here.
b) She has _____ books and pens.
Understand
1. Read the following passage
There is no dearth of fake patriotism in the world to disguise one’s weakness of failure in
administration and planning. It rather becomes an instrument in the hands of dictators and selfish rulers to keep
their position safe. One can hear the slogans of patriotism on both the sides of the line of demarcation in the
Indian sub-continent. When there is dissatisfaction among the masses these slogans would be raised—‘danger is
lurking on the borders’, ‘the enemy is making preparation to attack our country’. This is not patriotism but
perverse thinking for selfish motives. Patriotism does not require a whip to rouse the sentiments of the people—
if it is true patriotism. The unity achieved during war may be a result of apprehension of slavery, not necessarily
true emotion generated by patriotism. It is in the blood of the people to mould their life according to the needs of
the motherland. It is not in the expediency to create circumstances befitting one’s own interests. It is rather
regrettable that patriotism is the greatest casualty in almost all the fields in our country. Political expediency and
self-motives have become supreme, to the extent that even to talk of patriotism is labeled as puerile of
reactionary. Let us take inspiration from the young girl who wept and cried bitterly for she could not offer
flowers on the war memorial in London, for none of her forefathers had laid his life for the cause of the nation.
Let us inculcate this noble spirit among people if we have to bring back the glory that was India.
Answer the following question.
a) Show the effect of fake patriotism?
b) When are the slogans of patriotism raised?
c) Is this type of patriotism real patriotism? Whom does it benefit?
d) Is the unity during war real patriotism? Does true patriotism require any instigation?
e) What does the author regret?
f) Explain the result of political expediency and selfish motives?
g) Why did the little girl cry bitterly? Do we learn anything from her?
h) Locate the synonym of the word ‘conceal’ from the passage.
i) Find the antonym of the word ‘cheerful’ from the passage.
j) Suggest a suitable title to the passage.
2. Read the following passage and answer the questions on it:
Many matters, however, are less easily brought to the test of experience. If, like most of mankind, you have
passionate convictions on many such matters, there are ways in which you can make yourself aware of your own
bias. If an opinion contrary to your own makes you angry, that is a sign that you are subconsciously aware of
having no good reason for thinking as you do. If someone maintains that two and two are five, you feel pity
rather than anger, unless you know so little of arithmetic that his opinion shakes your own conviction. The most
savage controversies are those about matters as to which there is no good evidence either way. Persecution is
used in theology, not in arithmetic because in arithmetic there is knowledge, but in theology there is only
9
23
opinion. So, whenever you find yourself getting angry about your difference of opinion, be on your guard; you
will probably find, on examination, that your belief is going beyond what the evidence warrants.
Answer the following questions

a) Do you consider the content of the passage, legal or logical? Ans: logical
b) Is the author of the passage finally telling you about changing your opinion? Ans: No giving info.
c) According to the passage when do we feel pity? Ans: When someone knowledge so poorer then
minimum standards.
d) What is the meaning of the word ‘savage’ as used in the passage? Ans: uncivilized / unfair
e) What is the general reaction to an opinion contrary to your own? Ans: we get angry at first.
f) ‘In arithmetic there is no scope for opinion’-explain.
Apply
1. Develop an essay on the theme of “Digital India and its consequences” in about 200 words.
2. Write a letter to your friend who is exclusively occupied with his studies. Advise him to take part in
games
Analyze
1. Discuss the chief components of knowledge society with reference to India according to Dr. A. P. J.
Abdul Kalam.
2. Analyze L. A. Hill’s principles of good writing in achieving ‘vivid expression, simple and
conversational tone’ to make the writing interesting to the readers.
3. Explain how L.A. Hill’s principles of good writing are helpful to become a successful writer. (in about
250 words)
Create
1. Imagine yourself to be the instructor of a course in which 75 students have registered. Draft an email to
all your students asking them to prepare a presentation on the topic of their choice.
2. Build a model essay on impact of social media on youth.
24
16MAX02 Engineering Mathematics II

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply matrix knowledge to Engineering problems

2. Solve problems related to engineering applications using integral transform techniques
3. Make use of Laplace transforms in solving the differential equations with the initial and boundary
conditions
4. Apply the concept of Fourier series of periodic functions and expand a function in sine and cosine
series
5. Solve problems related to basic linear and non-linear partial differential equations
6. Formulate and solve some of the physical problems of engineering using partial differential equations
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2
1 3 3
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Matrices
Linear systems of equations: Rank-Echelon form, Normal form–Solution of Linear Systems–Rank Method and
Gauss Seidal Method
Eigen values–Eigen vectors–Properties–Cayley-Hamilton Theorem (without proof)–Inverse and powers of a
matrix by using Cayley-Hamilton theorem, Quadratic forms-Reduction of quadratic form to canonical form–
Rank–Positive, negative, semi definite–index–signature
LU Decomposition Method
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Laplace Transforms
Laplace transforms of standard functions–Shifting Theorems, Transforms of derivatives and integrals–Unit step
function–Dirac delta function
Inverse Laplace transforms by Partial fractions–Convolution theorem (without proof)-Application of Laplace
transforms to ordinary differential equations with constant coefficients
Laplace Transform of Periodic Functions
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Fourier series and Transformations
Fourier series–even and odd functions–Half-range sine and cosine series, Fourier integral theorem (without
proof)–Fourier transforms–sine and cosine transforms–properties–inverse transforms–Finite Fourier transforms
Fourier Transform of Convolution Products
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Partial Differential Equations and Applications
Formation of partial differential equations-by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions–
solutions of first order linear (Lagrange) equations and nonlinear equations (standard types)–Method of
Separation of Variables-Applications to wave equation, heat conduction equation in one dimension and
homogeneous Laplace equation in Cartesian coordinates in two dimensions
Charpits Method
11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
25
Textbook (s)
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42nd Ed., Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012
2. S. R. K. Iyengar, R. K. Jain, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 4 th Ed., Narosa Publishing House,
New Delhi, 2014
3. B. V. Ramana, Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009
Reference (s)
1. T. K. V. Iyengar, B. Krishna Ghandhi, S. Ranganathan and M. V. S. S. N. Prasad, Engineering
Mathematics, 12th Ed.,Volume–I, S. Chand Publishers, 2014
2. U. M. Swamy, P. Vijaya Laxmi, K. L. Sai Prasad and M. Phani Krishna Kishore, A Text Book of
Engineering Mathematics–II, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2010
3. D. S. Chandrashekharaiah, Engineering Mathematics, Vol–1, Prism Publishers, 2010
4. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9 th Ed., Wiley, 2012
Sample question (s)

Remember 30 30 ---
Apply 30 30 60
Analyze --- --- ---
Evaluate --- --- 30
Create --- --- 10
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define rank of the matrix
2. Define unit step function
3. Write the Fourier sine transform of ( )
Understand
1. If in the interval , then for what values of the Fourier series of
contains only sine terms
2. Form the partial differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants from
z  ( x  a)( y  b)
2 2
3. Evaluate L 2t 
Apply
1.
Use Laplace transform technique to solve the differential equation y ''  2 y '  3 y  sin t if
y(0)  0, y '(0)  0.
2. Using Convolution theorem, find
3. A tightly stretched string with fixed end points x  0 and x  l is initially in a position given by
 x . If it is released from rest from this position, find the displacement
y  y0 Sin3 y( x, t )
l
Create
1. Compare the direct and iterative methods in solving system of equations.

2. Identifying the method to solve sparse systems.
3. What is the advantage of Fourier series over the Taylor’s series in some real time problems?
10
26
16CYX01 Engineering Chemistry

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Outline the fundamental chemistry with an applied perspective as future engineers with a focus on
engineering and industry
2. Analyze the quality of water and its treatment methods for domestic and industrial applications
3. Utilize the polymers, plastics, elastomers and advanced materials (Nano materials) as engineering
materials and apply them in domestic and industrial life
4. Infer the concepts of renewable & non-renewable energy sources, quality of fuels and apply a suitable
fuel as an energy source
5. Outline the corrosion factors and implement the prevention measures
6. Interpret the Nernst equation for electrode potentials and construction and working of various types of
energy storage devices
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3
4 3 2
5 3
6 3 2
Unit I
Water Technology & Advanced Materials
Water technology: sources of water–hardness of water–disadvantages of hard water–boiler troubles–internal
treatment methods, softening methods–lime soda, zeolite, ion exchange and reverse osmosis -specifications for
drinking water–BIS & WHO standards–municipal water treatment–analysis of water for hardness, chloride &
fluoride, numerical problems
Advanced materials–Nanomaterials–Introduction–Preparation by chemical methods–Characterization–SEM–
Applications in industry–solar, water purification and battery technology
Preparation of some important membranes for reverse osmosis process
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Polymers & Composites
Polymers: Introduction–Advantages of polymers over Metals and Alloys; Types of polymers–Types of
polymerization–Physical properties: viscosity, polydispersity, molecular weight distribution etc., and
mechanical properties–Plastics: Thermosetting & thermoplastics–Compounding of plastics–Moulding methods
(Compression, Injection, Transfer, Extrusion)–Preparation, Properties and Engineering applications of important
industrial polymers–Poly Ethylene, Poly Styrene, PVC, PTFE, Bakelite–Molecular Imprinting Polymers (MIP)
–Conducting Polymers–Biodegradable polymers-Fiber reinforced plastics-Glass fiber reinforced plastic–Bullet
Proof Plastics–Rubbers: processing of natural rubber–Vulcanization and compounding of rubber–Engineering
applications of rubber
Inorganic rubbers-silicone rubbers
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Fuels & Energy Resources
Fuels–Introduction-Calorific value–determination of calorific value–Bomb calorimeter and Junker’s
calorimeters-Classification of fuels–characteristics of a good fuel–classification and analysis of coal-Extraction
of Crude Oils–refining of crude oil–Cracking-Thermal and Catalytic cracking–Synthetic petrol–Polymerization,
Fischer Tropsch and Bergius processes–Knocking–Anti Knocking–Octane &Cetanenumber–ASTM standards of
fuels–Energy Resources: Energy scenario in India–working of thermal power plants–advantages and
disadvantages–non Renewable energy–solar energy–harnessing of solar energy–solar heaters–photo voltaic
cells–bio energy–biodiesel
Rocket fuels
11+4 Hours
27
Unit IV
Corrosion & Energy Systems
Introduction–process of corrosion–Dry corrosion–Wet corrosion–galvanic corrosion–concentration cell
corrosion–water line corrosion–pitting corrosion–stress corrosion–Factors influencing corrosion–Control of
corrosion–Proper designing–passivity–using alloys–modifying the environment–using corrosion inhibitors:
Inorganic and Organic inhibitors-Cathodic protection–Metallic coatings–galvanization and tinning-Industrial
examples of high corrosion
Electrochemical energy systems:Introduction–Electrode potential–Nernst equation–EMF of cell–Storage
devices–Batteries: primary cell–dry cell; secondary cells–Lead acid battery, Lithium ion battery, flow batteries–
H2–O2 fuel cell and Photo galvanic cell
Organic coatings
11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. P. C. Jain and Monica Jain, Engineering Chemistry, 16th Ed., Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company, New
Delhi, 2015
2. S. S. Dara, A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, S. Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi, 1994
3. C. N. R. Rao, A. Muller and A. K. Cheetham, Nanomaterials Chemistry: Recent Developments and
New Directions, 2010
Reference (s)
1. S. Chawla, A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, 3 rd Ed., Dhanpat Rai& Co (Pvt) Ltd, New Delhi,
2012
2. P. Murthy, C. V. Agarwal, A. Naidu, Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, B. S. Publications,
Hyderabad, 2006
3. T. Pradeep, Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, McGraw Hill Education,India,
Pvt.Limited, 2013
Sample question (s)

Remember 30 30 ---
Apply 30 30 80
Analyze --- --- 20
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define hardness. Which salts are responsible for different types of hard nesses?
2. Differentiate between polymer and plastic? List out the differences between thermoplastics and
thermosetting plastics?
3. Define calorific value, HCV and LCV
Understand
1. What is meant by desalination? Explain the procedure for softening of water by Reverse osmosis
process?
2. What is compounding of plastics? Explain the role of Fillers and Stabilizers with examples
in compounding of plastics?
3. How a photo-voltaic cell constructed and what is is the working mechanism of it?
Apply
1. Water contains the constituents like CO2 , HCO3- , Mg(HCO3)2 , H+, CaSO4 , NaCl and Na2SO4 and
this water is subjected to Lime and Soda softening, which type of chemical reactions are involved
between these constituents with Lime and Soda?
2. Which moulding technique is involved in making a plastic ball in toys industry? Explain the process in
detail with neat sketch?
11
28
3. By which methods, the underground pipelines are protected from corrosion? Explain the involved
mechanisms?
Analyze
1. The Boiler fed water contains the following compositions: CaSO4, CaCl2, MgCl2, SiO2 &
Na2CO3.Suggest the suitable methods and involved principle to prevent the formation of scale and
sludge by these constituents?
2. When a metal X (of reduction potential = 0.337V at 250C) is connected to another metal Y (of
reduction potential = -0.140V at 250C) and this structure is exposed continuously to sea water, which
type of corrosion would take place? Explain with suitable mechanism.
3. Which type of corrosion is involved in the following jointed pipeline and why? Explain the involved
mechanism in detail
Iron pipe Copper pipe

Sea water inlet Sea water outlet
29
16EEX01 Basic Electrical Engineering

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the basic principles of electrical components

2. Outline electric circuits using network laws and reduction techniques
3. Illustrate the behavior of basic circuit elements for an AC excitation
4. Relate the laws of electro-magnetism and select a machine for practical applications
5. Outline the working principle and construction of the measuring instruments
6. Choose appropriate safety measures and wiring schemes
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2
1 3 1
2 3 1
3 2 1
4 3 1
5 3 1
6 2 3
Unit I
Basic Electrical Components
Definition of charge, electric potential, electric field, voltage, current, power and energy, Ohm’s law, Faraday’s
Law of Electromagnetic Induction, Classification of network elements, Basic circuit elements–R, L and C,
Types of energy sources-Dependent and independent sources, irchhoff’s laws, esistive, inductive and
capacitive networks–series, parallel circuits, Self Inductance, mutual inductance, Types of induced emfs, Dot
Convention, Coefficient of coupling
Types of resistors–inductors and capacitors
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Fundamentals of Electrical Circuits
DC Circuits: Voltage and current division rule, Source transformation, mesh and nodal analysis, Star-delta
transformation. AC Circuits: Generation of alternating current, periodic waveforms and basic definitions, RMS
and average values of periodic and non-periodic waveforms, form factor and peak factor, AC through pure R
and L, Phasor representation, J-operator, Power in ac circuits
AC through pure capacitor
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Electrical Machines & Measuring Instruments
Electrical Machines: Principle of operation, Construction and Applications-DC Machines, 1-phase
Transformers, 1-Phase Induction Motors, Stepper motors. Measuring Instruments: Classification of Measuring
Instruments, Construction and basic working principle of Voltmeter, Ammeter, Wattmeter
Working principle of Energy meter
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Electrical Safety, Wiring and Introduction to Power System
Indian electricity safety rules, Electric shock- effects, protective measures and first aid, Earthling-Basic
principles and types. Electrical wiring-wiring accessories, staircase, tube light. Single line diagram of power
system
Design of corridor wiring 10+3Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, Theory and Problems of Basic Electrical Engineering, 4 th Ed., PHI
Learning Private limited, 2013
2. S. Ghosh, Fundamentals of Electrical & Electronics Engineering, 2nd Ed., PHI, 2010
3. V. K. Mehta and Rohit Mehta, Basic Electrical Engineering, S Chand and company Ltd, New Delhi,
India, Revised Edition, 2012
30
Reference (s)
1. K. Alice Mary, P.Ramana and Preethi Thekkath , Basics of Electrical Engineering, 1st Ed., S. Chand &
Company Ltd, 2016
2. J. B. Gupta, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, 3rd Ed., S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2009
3. B. L. Theraja, Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and Electronics, 5 th Ed., S. Chand & Company
Ltd, 2013
Sample question (s)

Remember 40 40 ---
Apply --- --- 50
Analyze --- --- 50
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. State Faradays laws of Electro-magnetic Induction.
2. Define
i. Charge ii. Power
iii. Energy iv. Potential
3. State any five Indian electricity safety rules
4. Define coefficient of coupling
Understand
1. Explain the principle of operation of transformer.
2. Describe the working of DC generator.
3. Explain the construction and working of Wattmeter.
4. Illustrate the emf equation of a transformer
12
31
16CHX01 Environmental Studies

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Translate the learner’s attitude to think globally and act locally

2. Motivate environmental organizations to create a concern about our present state of Environment.
3. Find solutions for conservation of natural resources
4. Identify the benefits of ecosystem conservation, biodiversity protection, implement pollution
prevention and control measures
5. Illustrate social issues of environmental protection and adopt sustainable developmental practices
6. Perceives the basic structure of environmental policy and law pertaining to specific environmental
issues (water quality, air quality, biodiversity protection, Forest, etc.)
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO3 PO6 PO7
1 - - 3 3
2 - - - 3
3 3 3 - 3
4 - - 3 3
5 - - 3 3
6 - - - 3
Unit I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies & Natural Resources
Definition, Scope and Importance, Multidisciplinary nature of Environmental Studies, Value of Nature-
Productive, Aesthetic/Recreation, Option, Need for Public Awareness, Institutions (BNHS, BVIEER, ZSI, BSI)
and People in Environment (MedhaPatkar, Sundarlal Bahuguna, Indira Gandhi, Rachael Carson)
Natural Resources: Renewable and Non–renewable resources–Importance, uses, overexploitation/threats, and
conservation of (i) forest (ii) water (iii) mineral (iv) food and (v) energy resources, role of an individual in
conservation of natural resources
Biotic and abiotic components–Case studies of forest-water-mineral-food-energy resources
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Ecosystem & Biodiversity
Ecosystems: Concept of an ecosystem, Structure and function of an ecosystem, Biogeological cycles (Energy
flow, Carbon and Nitrogen Cycles), Ecological succession, Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids,
Introduction, types, characteristic features, structures and functions of the following ecosystems: a. Forest
Ecosystem b. Aquatic Ecosystem Biodiversity and its Conservation: Definition and levels of biodiversity, Bio–
geographical classification of India, hot spots of biodiversity–India as a mega diversity nation, Threats to
biodiversity, Endangered and endemic species of India, Conservation of biodiversity: In–situ and Ex–situ
conservation
Phosphorus cycle–Desert ecosystems–Grassland ecosystem–Case studies on conservation of biodiversity
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Environmental Pollution & Social Issues
Environmental Pollution: Definition, Cause, effects, control measures and case studies of: Air pollution b. Water
pollution c. Soil pollution Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and
industrial wastes. Disaster management (floods and cyclones) Social Issues and the Environment: Sustainability,
Urban problems related to energy, Water conservation and watershed management, Resettlement and
rehabilitation of people; Environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions, global warming, ozone layer
depletion, Consumerism and waste products
Noise pollution–Case studies on pollution–Wasteland reclamation 11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Human Population and the Environmental Acts
Human Population and the Environment: Population growth, Affluence, Technology and Environmental Impact
(Master Equation), Population explosion and Family Welfare Programme, Value Education, HIV/AIDS,
32
Women and Child Welfare, Role of information Technology in Environment and human health, Environment
Protection Acts: Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act,
Wildlife Protection Act and Forest Conservation Act. Issues involved in enforcement of environmental
legislation
Human Rights–The environment (Protection) Act, 1986

10+3 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. E. Bharucha, Textbook of Environmental Studies, 1 st Ed., University Press (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2005
Reference (s)
1. W. P. Cunningham, M. A. Cunningham, Principles of Environmental Science, 6 th Ed., Tata McGraw
Hill, 2008
2. A. Kaushik, C. P. Kaushik, Perspectives in Environmental Studies, 4 th Ed., New Age International
Publishers, 2008
3. H. S. Peavy, D. R. Rowe, G. Tchobanoglous, Environmental Engineering, 1st Ed., McGraw Hill, 1984
4. T. E. Graedel, B. R. Allenby, Industrial Ecology and Sustainable Engineering, 1 st Ed., Pearson
Publications, 2009
Sample question (s)

Remember 40 35 15
Understand 45 50 50
Apply 15 15 35
Analyze --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List important natural resources & important institutions related to the environment.
2. Recall a simple food chain.
3. List important acts in environment.
Understand
1. Money deposited in a bank- identify under which environment value.
2. Summarize the methods for creating public awareness regarding environment.
3. Explain the consequences of over utilization of water resources.
Apply
1. Select the economic method of conservation of biodiversity and describe it.
2. Predict the effects and control methods of water pollution.
3. Find the urban problems related to energy and suggest suitable alternatives.
4. Assess why women and children need special care and what are all the supports that our Government is
extending to them?
13
33
16HSX02 English Communication Skills Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Develop the pronunciation ability by using their gained knowledge of the English sound system
2. Improve the articulation of sounds and pronunciation of words for intelligible English
3. Recognize the use of language in conversational style with focus on communication in English
4. Organize ideas effectively in spoken form
6. Develop the pronunciation ability by using their gained knowledge of the English sound system
COs – POs Mapping
COs P010
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
Module 1–Sounds of English-Consonants

Module 2–Interaction-1: Greeting and taking leave, introducing oneself to others.
Module 3–Sounds of English-Vowels
Module 4–Interaction-2: Making request and response to them ask for and give/refuse permission, Ask for and
give directions, thank and respond
Module 5–Some rules of Pronunciation
Module 6–Interaction-3: Invite, accept, and declining invitations, Make complaints and respond to them,
Express sympathy
Module 7–Word Stress and Sentence stress
Module 8–Interaction-4: Apologize and respond, advise and suggest, Telephone Skills
Module 9–Presentation Skills: Oral and PPT Presentations
Module 10 Group Discussion
Extra Module
Module 11–Debate
1. Common Errors in English

2. Listening Skills
3. Speaking Skills
4. Writing Skills
5. Presentation Skills–observations
6. Reading Skills
7. Public Speaking
8. Interview Skills
9. Office Communication
10. Telephone Skills
11. Report Writing
12. Vocabulary
13. Body Language
14. Resume Writing
15. Functional English
14
34
1. K. Nirupa Rani, Jayashree Mohanraj and B. Indira, Strengthen Your Steps-Maruthi publications, 2012
2. K. Nirupa Rani, Jayashree Mohan Raj, B. Indira, (Ed) Speak Well (C.D) Orient Black Swan Pvt Ltd,
Hyderabad, 2012
3. D. Jones, English Pronouncing Dictionary (Software)CUP, Ver.1.0, 2003
4. J. Sethi, S. Kamlesh, D. V. Jindal. A Practical Course in English Pronunciation, Prentice-hall of India,
New Delhi, 2007
5. T. Balasubramanian, A Textbook of English Phonetics for Indian students, McMillan, 1981
6. K. Mohan and M. Raman, Effective English Communication, 1 st Ed., Tata McGraHills, 2000
7. R. K. Bansal and J. B. Harrison, Spoken English, 3 rd Ed., Orient Black Swan, Hyderabad, 1983
35
16CYX02 Engineering Chemistry Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize different Analytical tools and develop the necessary skills in executing experiments involving
estimation of metals in alloys, raw materials, finished products and environmental samples etc.
2. Utilize modern instruments like flame photometer, ion analyzer, UV Vis spectrophotometer, Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometer for characterization of materials used in industry & environmental
monitoring
3. Determine the amount of hardness, chloride, fluoride, nitrite, DO of water for its quality and know its
utility in domestic and industry
4. Summarize the characteristics of lubricants and able to choose/modify lubricants according to purpose
5. Compose some cross-linked polymers like Bakelite, Nylon etc.
6. Identify the adulteration of food items such as milk, honey, tea, coffee & fertility of soil to increase
crop production
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
CO6 3
List of Experiments
Introduction to Quantitative Analysis

1. Assessment of Quality of water
i) Hardness ii) Chloride iii) Fluoride iv) Dissolved Oxygen v) Nitrite
2. Testing quality of lubricants
i) Viscosity Index ii) Flash & Fire point iii) Acid Number
3. Quality Analysis of engineering materials
i) Cement ii) Al/Cu wire iii) Steel
4. Preparation of Engineering and Nano materials
i) Bakelite ii) Nylon iii) Silver nano particles
5. Estimation of Purity of Iron in Ingot
6. Analysis of fertility of soil
i) Sodium & Potassium ii) Micro Nutrients
7. Determination of acid strength (for a citrus fruit) by Conductometr
8. Detection of adulteration of Food in Honey/ Milk/ Tea
9. Estimation of heavy metals in fast food items by AAS.
10. Testing of corrosion of metal
Note: Student should perform minimum of 12 experiments at least one form each head.
1. Assessment of ground water quality of your village/Mandal

2. Preparation of desired Viscosity Index lubricating oil
3. Studies on the effect of various factors on corrosion
15
36
1. K. Gouru Naidu, Engineering Chemistry Lab Manual, 1 st Ed., 2014

2. G. Svehla, Vogel’s Qualitative Inorganic Analysis, 7th Ed., Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
3. Standard methods for the examination of water and waste waters, American Public Health Association,
21st Ed., EPA, Washington, 2005
4. Metcalf and Eddy, Waste Water Engineering Treatment and Reuse, 4 th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2003
5. D. Srinivasulu, Engineering Chemistry laboratory manual & Record, Parshva publications, 2010
37
16MEX03 Engineering Workshop

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize basic carpentry tools for the preparation of wooden joints
2. Make use of basic hand tools for the preparation of mild steel joints
3. Build simple house hold items with GI sheet using tin smithy tools
4. Make use of house wiring accessories to build simple electrical circuits
5. Build simple components with hand tools for making experimental setups
6. Build simple components with hand tools as per the drawing specifications
COs - POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO10 PO12
1 3 2 2 2
2 3 2 1 2
3 3 2 2 1
4 3 2 3 2
5 3 3 1 3
6 3 2 1 3
List of experiments
Trades
Carpentry : 1. Cross Lap joint
2. T-Lap joint
3. Dovetail Joint
4. Mortise and Tennon Joint
Fitting : 1. Square Fit
2. V- Fit
3. Half Round Fit
4. Dovetail Fit
Tin Smithy : 1. Square Box without lid
2. Taper Tray
3. Open Scoop
4. Funnel
House Wiring : 1. Parallel/Series Connection of three bulbs
2. Florescent Lamp Wiring
3. Stair Case Wiring
4. Godown Wiring
Total: 45 Hours
16
List of Augmented Experiments
1. Prepare Tee–bridle joint
2. Prepare Corner dovetail joint
3. Make Corner bridge joint
4. Make Dovetail lap joint
5. Prepare 900 round elbow pipe
6. Prepare Ellipse using GI sheet
7. Make cylindrical pipe
8. Make Round T-pipe
9. Prepare hexagonal fitting
10. Prepare diagonal dovetail fitting
11. Prepare universal fitting
12. Make square fitting
13. Set the general house wring
14. Set the dim & bright lighting
15. Set the test lamping

1. Engineering workshop Lab manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, GMRIT Rajam
16
38
16MA303 Engineering Mathematics III

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize numerical techniques to find approximate solutions of non-linear Algebraic equations

2. Outline the concepts of interpolation, extrapolation to estimate the unknown functional values
3. Make use of method of least squares to fit a best curve for the given data
4. Find approximate values of derivatives and finite integrals using numerical techniques
5. Comprehend basic probability axioms and apply Baye’s theorem related to engineering problems
6. Identify the suitable distribution among Binomial, Poisson, normal to compute probabilities
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO 2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 3 2
6 3 3
Unit I
Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations
Introduction , Bisection Method , Method of False Position, Newton-Raphson Method.
Curve fitting: Fitting a straight line , Second degree curve, exponential curve, power curve by method of least
squares.
Geometrical interpretation of Bisection Method, Method of False Position, Newton-Raphson Method.
Practical components
1. The Bisection method
2. Newton-Raphson Method
3. Linear Regression (Fitting of a straight line)
11 + 10 Hours
Unit II
Interpolation, Numerical Integration and Numerical solution of Ordinary differential equations
Introduction- Finite differences- Newton’s- forward Differences- Backward differences, Symbolic relations.
Numerical Integration: Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 ule.
Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential equations: Solution by Taylor’s series. Euler’s, Modified Euler’s
Method, Runge-Kutta Method
Predictor-Corrector Method-Milne’s Method.
1. Trapezoidal rule
2. Simpson’s 1/3 ule
3. Solution of Initial Value Problem using Taylor’s series method
4. Solution of Initial Value Problem using Runge-Kutta Method of order four
12 + 10 Hours
Unit III
Probability and Random variable
Probability, The axioms of probability, Conditional probability, Baye’s theorem.
Random variables, Discrete and continuous Distributions and properties, Mathematical expectation, MGFs.
Addition, Multiplication theorems of probability.
1. Baye’s ule
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Probability Distributions, Correlation and Regression
Binomial, Poisson and Normal distribution – related properties.
39
Correlation, Pearson’s correlation coefficient and Spearman’s ank correlation coefficient, linear egression
(construction of Regression lines)
Correlation of grouped data, curvilinear regression.
1. Normal Distribution
2. Correlation related problems
11 + 6 Hours
Total: 45+30=75 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. B. S. Grewal, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, hanna Publishers, 43rd Edition, 2014.
2. B.V. amana, “Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2009.
3. Engineering Mathematics-III lab manual-Mathematics Department(BS&H)-GMRIT, Rajam
4. Steven C Chapra, “Applied Numerical Methods with MATLAB”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2012.
Reference (s)
1. T.K.V Iyengar, S. anganatham and B. rishna Gandhi, “Mathematical Methods”, S. Chand & Co. Ltd.,
2nd Edition, 2006
2. T. .V Iyengar, .B. Gandhi, S. anganatham and M.V.S.S.N.Prasad, “Probability and Statistics”, S.
Chand & Co. Ltd., 4th Edition, 2012.
3. Ervin reyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., 9th Edition, 2012.
4. S.S.Sastry, “Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 5 th Edition,
2012.
5. Won Y. Yang, Wenwu Cao, Tae-Sang Chung and John Morris, “Applied Numerical Methods using
MATLAB”, Wiley Publications, 2nd Edition, 2005
Sample Question (s)

Assessment Pattern
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Laboratory Test (%)
Remember 25 25 ---
Apply 30 30 100
Analyze --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List out the different methods to solve Algebraic and Transcendental Equations
2. List out the different methods for interpolation
3. Define axioms of probability
4. Write the importance of Normal distribution
5. Define Moment Generating function
Understand
1. Explain the procedure involved in Newton’s forward and backward interpolation formulas to
interpolate the data.
2. Describe mathematical principle involved in Trapezoidal rule and Simpson’s 1/3 ule.
3. Illustrate the difference between discrete and continuous distributions.
4. Compare Binomial, Poisson, Normal distributions
Apply
1. Apply Newton’s iterative method find the real root of the equation 3x = cosx + 1
2. A solid of revolution is formed by rotating about the x-axis, the area between the x-axis, the lines x = 0
and x = 1 and a curve through the points with the following co-ordinates
x 0.00 0.25 0.5 0.75 1

y 1.0 0.9896 0.9589 0.9589 0.8415
Estimate the volume of the solid formed using Simson’s rule
40
3. If three cars are drawn from a lot of 6 cars containing 2 defective cars, find (i) the probability
distribution of the number of defective cars, (ii) the expected number of defective cars
4. Two machines A,B produces 60% and 40% of items from the total output. 6% and 8% are the defective
items produced by machines A and B respectively. An item is chosen from the total output and found
to be defective. Find the probability that the defective item is produced by machine A.
5. Write a MATLAB program for method of false position.
6. Write a MATLAB program for fitting a second degree curve.
41
16EE302 Circuit Theory

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Outline the time / frequency domain response of RLC circuit

2. Solve the three phase balanced and unbalanced circuits
3. Apply various network theorems for simplifying both AC and DC circuits
4. Illustrate transient response of a series RL/RC/RLC circuits for DC and AC excitations
5. Find various network parameters for a given two port network
6. Recall the properties of driving point and transfer functions
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO 2
1 2 3
2 3 2
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 2 3
6 2 3
Unit I
Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis
Concept of Phasor and J notation, Impedance and Admittance – Time domain and frequency domain Response
of R, L, C series, parallel and series-parallel circuits to sinusoidal excitation, computation of
active, reactive, complex, power and power factor, Series and parallel resonance of RLC circuits- selectivity,
bandwidth and quality factor- implicational with voltage and current excitation.
RLC Series and RLC parallel circuits to sinusoidal excitation
11+3hours
Unit II
3-Phase Circuits and Network Theorems
Three Phase Circuits: Advantages of 3-phase systems, phase sequence, star and delta connections, Analysis of
balanced and unbalanced 3-Phase circuits, Measurement of active and reactive power.
Network Theorems: Source transformation, Superposition, Thevinin’s, Norton’s, Maximum power transfer,
Reciprocity and Compensation theorems for DC and AC excitations.
Tellegen’s, Millman’s theorems
12+4 hours
Unit III
Transient Analysis
DC Transients: Transient response of R-L, R-C, R-L-C circuits for DC excitation – initial conditions – solution
using differential equations and Laplace transform approaches.
AC Transients: Transient response of R-L, R-L-C circuits for sinusoidal excitation – initial conditions –
Solution using Laplace transform approach only
Transient response of R-C circuit for sinusoidal excitation
11+4hours
Unit IV
Network Parameters and Network Functions
Two port network, Impedance parameters, Admittance parameters, Transmission parameters, hybrid parameters
– Inter relationship between parameters – Concept of transformed network – two port network parameters using
transformed variables – Interconnection of two port networks, Impedance function, admittance function,
Positive real functions, Poles and zeros, Poles and zeros- time domain behavior
Inverse Transmission and inverse hybrid parameters
11+4 hours
Total:45+15=60 hours
Textbook (s)
1. W.H.Hayt, J.E. immerly, and S.M.Durbin, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 8th
Edition, 2012.
2. Charles Alexander and Mathew N.O Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 5th Edition, 2013.
3. Abhi it Chakrabarti, “Circuit Theory Analysis and Synthesis”, Dhanpat Rai & Co., 6th Edition, 2014.
42
Reference (s)
1. M.E Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”, Prentice Hall of India, 3rd Edition, 2005.
2. Mahmood Nahvi and Joselph Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’s Outline series, Tata McGraw
Hill, 5th edition, 2010.
3. Isaak Mayergoyz W. Lawson, “Basic Electric Circuit Theory”, Academic Press, 1st Edition, 2012.
Sample Question (s)

Cognitive level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test17 (%)
Remember 20 10 ---
Apply 40 45 60
Analyze --- --- 40
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define the terms active, reactive, complex powers and power factor.
2. State Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorems.
3. List any two advantages of three phase system.
4. Write Z parameters in terms of ABCD parameters
5. Why the Z-parameters are known as open circuit parameters?
6. Why Y-parameters are known as short circuit parameters?
Understand
1. Explain the concept of phasor and j notation.
2. Represent transient response of RL circuit for DC excitation
3. Explain the Interrelation of Z-parameters in terms of Y, ABCD, h parameters.
4. Explain the measurement of active power by using 2-Wattmeter method.
Apply
1. Calculate the quality factor of series RL circuit.
2. Assess why transients occur in a circuit?
3. Assess why three phase circuits are preferred when a single phase circuits are available?
4. Compute the interrelation of Z-parameters in terms of Y, ABCD, h parameters.
17
43
16EE303 DC Machines
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the constructional details and principle of operation of DC Machine
2. Summarize armature reaction and commutation in DC machines
3. Demonstrate the performance characteristics of various DC generators
4. Demonstrate the performance characteristics of various DC motors
5. Outline various speed control methods of DC motors
6. Summarize testing methods of DC machines
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO 2
1 1 3
2 1 3
3 1 2
4 1 2
5 1 2
6 1 2
Unit I
Introduction to D.C. Machines
D.C. Machine- constructional features, armature windings - lap and wave windings - simplex winding, D.C
Generator-Principle of operation, E.M.F Equation, Constant & Variable losses, Power flow diagram, Methods of
Excitation, Armature reaction - effects of armature reaction, Cross magnetizing and de-magnetizing AT/pole -
Methods of limiting the effects of armature reaction, function of the commutator for generating and motoring
action, methods of improving commutation.
Purpose of equalizer rings and dummy coils
13+5 Hours
Unit II
Characteristics and application of D.C Generators
Build-up of E.M.F, Causes for failure to self-excite and remedial measures, Load characteristics of shunt, series
and compound generators - parallel operation of D.C. shunt, series and compound generators - use of equalizer
bar and cross connection of field windings - load sharing.
Applications of DC generators
9+3 Hours
Unit III
D.C. Motors & Speed control of D.C. Motors
D.C Motors - Principle of operation - Back E.M.F., Methods of Excitation, power flow diagram, Torque
equation, characteristics and application of shunt, series and compound motors - Armature reaction and
commutation. Speed control of D.C. Motors- Armature voltage and field flux control methods, Principle of 3
point, 4 point and 2 point starters - protective devices.
Self-governing properties of DC motors
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Testing of D.C. Machines
Losses - Constant & Variable losses - calculation of efficiency - condition for maximum efficiency - Methods of
Testing - direct, indirect and regenerative testing - brake test – Swinburne’s test – Hopkinson’s test – Field’s test
- Retardation test - separation of stray losses in a D.C. motor test.
Temperature raise test 12+4 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. P. S. Bimbra, “Electrical Machinery”, Khanna Publishers, 7th Edition, Color Reprint 2014.
2. I.J. Nagrath & D.P. othari, “Electric Machines”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2010.
3. A.E. Fitzgerald, Charles Kingsley, JR., Stephen D. Umans, “Electric Machinery”, Tata McGraw Hill,
5th Edition, 2002.
Reference Book(s)
1. Samar it Ghosh, “Electric Machines”, Pearson Publications, 2nd Edition, 2012.
44
2. J. B. Gupta, “Theory and Performance of Electrical Machines”, S. . ataria & Sons Publishers, New
Delhi, 14th Edition, Reprint 2013.
3. Dr. S K Bhattacharya, “Electrical Engineering Drawing”, New Age International Publishers, 2nd
Edition, Reprint 2013.
Sample Question (s)

Cognitive level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test18 (%)
Remember 30 30 ---
Apply 30 20 100
Analyze --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. State Faraday's laws of electromagnetic induction
2. Label different parts of a DC machine
3. List any 4 applications of DC machines
4. Define armature reaction
5. List different types of dc generators and motors
6. Write e.m.f. equation of a dc generator
Understand
1. Classify different types of dc motors
2. Compare dc generator and dc motor
3. Explain the principle of operation of DC motor
4. Justify the condition for maximum efficiency for a DC machine
5. Explain the armature reaction in a D.C generator on no load and load.
Apply
1. A separately excited D.C. Generator, when running at 1200 r.p.m. supplies 200 A at 125 V to a
circuit of constant resistance. What will be the current when the speed is dropped to 1000 r.p.m. and
the field current is reduced to 80% ? Armature resistance is 0.04 Ω and total drop at brushes, 2 V.
Ignore saturation and armature reaction.
2. A 4 pole dc generator supplies a current of 148A. It has 492 armature conductors lap connected.
The brushes are given lead of 100 when the machines delivers full load. Calculate the
demagnetizing ATs per pole. If the shunt field winding takes 6 A. Solve the number of extra shunt
field turns necessary to neutralize this demagnetization.
3. An 8 pole DC generator has per pole flux of 40mWb and winding is connected in lap with 960
conductors. Calculate the generated EMF on open circuit When it runs at 400 rpm. If the
armature is wave wound at what speed must the machine be driven to generate the same
voltage.?
18
45
16EE304 Electromagnetic Field Theory

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Recall the concepts of vector calculus and coordinate systems

2. Summarize the laws of static electric fields
3. Solve the field quantities in static electric field
4. Illustrate the laws of steady magnetic field
5. Solve the field quantities in steady magnetic field
6. Summarize the Maxwell's equations in static and time varying fields
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO 2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 2 3
4 3 2
5 2 3
6 1 3
Unit I
Introduction to fields
Cartesian coordinates, Cylindrical coordinates, Spherical coordinates and their relationship.
Electrostatic fields, Coulomb's law and field intensity, Differential length, area and volume, line, surface and
volume integrals, Electric field due to charge distribution, Electric flux density, gradient of a scalar, del
operator, Laplacian of a scalar, Electric Potential, energy density in electrostatic fields.
Electric field due to discrete charge distribution
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Electrostatics
Divergence of a vector and divergence theorem, Gauss’ Law –, Electric dipole and flux lines.
Behavior of conductors, convection and conduction currents, polarization in dielectrics, dielectric constants,
continuity equation and relaxation time, Ohm's law in point form.
Electrostatic boundary value problems: Poisson’s and Laplace’s equations, general procedures for solving
Poisson’s or Laplace’s equations, and capacitance, energy stored in capacitors. Maxwell’s equation in static
electric field
Properties of materials in electric field
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Magneto statics
Magneto-static fields, Biot-Savart’s Law, Curl of a vector and Stoke’s theorem, Ampere’s circuit law,
application of Ampere’s law, magnetic flux density, scalar and vector magnetic potentials.
Forces due to magnetic field, Lorentz's force equation, magnetic dipole, magnetic torque and moment,
magnetization in materials, magnetic boundary conditions, inductors and inductances, magnetic energy.
Maxwell’s equation in steady magnetic field
Properties of materials in magnetic field
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Time-Varying Electromagnetic Fields
Faraday’s Law, transformer and motional electromotive forces, displacement current, Maxwell’s equation in
point and integral forms for time varying fields.
Modified Maxwell's equation.
10+4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Matthew N. O. Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press, 6th Edition, 2014.
2. W. H. Hayt and J. A. Buck, “Electromagnetic Field Theory”, Tata McGraw Hill, 8th Edition, 2011.
3. A Gangadhar, “Electromagnetic Field Theory”, Khanna Publishers, 8th Edition, 2015.
46
Reference (s)
1. J.D. rauss and Daniel Fleisch, “Electromagnetics with applications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Edition,
2017.
2. Joseph A. Edminister, “Theory and Problems of Electromagnetics”, Schaum’s outline series, 3rd
Edition, 2010.
3. oald . Wangsness, “Electromagnetic Fields”, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2007.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 20 25 ---
Apply 20 40 100
Analyze --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Reproduce the equivalent of a point in cylindrical form
2. Reproduce the equivalent of a point in spherical form
3. Label a vector in spherical form
4. Label a vector in cylindrical form
5. Define Divergence, Gradient and Curl
Understand
1. Explain Coulomb's Law
2. Interpret Gauss' Law
3. Formulate electric field intensity due to infinite line charge
4. Explain Biot-Savart's Law
5. Formulate magnetic field intensity due to long solenoid
Apply
1. Develop the expression for electric field intensity due to circular ring
2. Compute the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor
3. Demonstrate conservation of energy from continuity equation
4. Assess magnetic flux density due to circular ring
5. Compute the inductance of a solenoid
6. Assess the nature of material in magnetic fields
19
47
16EC302 Digital Electronics

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the conversion of a number from one number system to another

2. Identify Boolean algebra and K-map as a tool to simplify and design logic circuits
3. Implement combinational circuits using gates
4. Design PLDs and Flip-flops
5. Implement various types of counters and shift registers
6. Attribute innovative designs by modifying the traditional design techniques
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3

1 3 2 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 2 1
4 3 3 2
5 3 2 2
6 3 3 2
3–Strongly linked | 2–Moderately linked| 1–Weakly linked
Unit I
Number systems and Boolean algebra
Review of number systems, conversion of numbers from one radix to another radix, Complements. Signed
Binary Numbers, Weighted and Non weighted codes, Basic Gates NOT, AND, OR, Boolean Theorems,
Complement And Dual of Logical Expressions, Universal Gates, Ex-Or and Ex-Nor Gates, SOP,POS,
Minimizations of Logic Functions Using Boolean Theorems, Two level Realization of Logic Functions Using
Universal Gates error detection and error correction codes, parity checking even parity, odd parity, Hamming
code
Integrated circuits: IC specifications and pin diagram of gates, Floating point number representation
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Boolean function minimization and combinational logic circuits
Karnaugh Map Method(K-Map): Minimization of Boolean Functions maximum up to Four Variables , POS and
SOP, Simplifications With Don’t Care Conditions Using -Map, Tabular minimization, Problem solving using
K-map such as code converters binary Multiplier. Half adder, Full adder, Full subtractor, Ripple carry adder,
Carry look ahead adder, Multiplexer, De-Multiplexer, Encoder, Priority encoder, Decoder, MUX Realization of
switching functions.
Applications of Full adder ,Realization of switching functions by using Decoder, Encoder, MUX, Tri-State
Devices
11+4 Hours
Unit III
PLDs and sequential circuits–I
PLA, PAL, PROM. Realization of Switching Functions Using PROM, PAL and PLA. Comparison of PLA,
PAL and PROM. Classification of Sequential Circuits, Basic Sequential Logic Circuits: Latch and Flip-Flop,
RS- Latch Using NAND and NOR Gates, Truth Tables. RS, JK,T and D Flip Flops , Truth and Excitation
Tables, Conversion of Flip Flops. Flip Flops with Asynchronous Inputs (Preset and Clear).
Random-Access Memory, Memory Decoding, Sequential Memory
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Sequential circuits–II
Design of registers, Buffer register, Control buffer register, Shift register, Bi-directional shift register, Universal
shift register, Design of Asynchronous &Synchronous counters - Up, Down, Up down, Johnson counters, Ring
counters, Mealy and Moore state machines, Mealy to Moore conversion and vice-versa, Reduction of state
tables and state assignment
Sequence generator and sequence detector
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Morris Mano,Digital Design,3 rd Edition, PHI,2001
2. Charles H. Roth, Fundamentals of Logic Design,3 rdEdition,Thomson Publications,2014
48
3. John F. Wakerly ,Digital Design Principles & Practices, 3 rdEdition,PHI/ Pearson Education Asia,2001
Reference (s)
1. ZviKohavi, Switching & Finite Automata theory, 2nd Edition, TMH,2008
2. R P Jain,Modern Digital Electronics, 3rd Edition, TMH,2003
Sample Question (s)

Remember 25 -- --
Understand 45 20 --
Apply 20 50 50
Analyse 10 30 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Retrive the decimal value of the fractional binary number 0.1011
2. List any two postulates of Boolean algebra
3. List the four uses of decoders.
4. Define Flip flop
5. Define asynchronous sequential circuit
Understand
1. Explain how digital circuits are more frequently constructed with NAND or NOR gates than with AND
& OR gates
2. epresent the following Boolean expression to minterms and maxterms A+BC’+ABD’+ABCD
3. Represent the Boolean function T=F (w, x, y, z)= ∑ m (0,1,2,4,5,7,8,9,12,13) by using 8 to 1mux.
4. Illustrate a half adder using NAND – NAND
5. Represent a JK flip flop using SR flip flop.
Apply
1. Find a circuit that has no static hazards and implements the Boolean function F(A,B,C,D) = Σ
(0,2,6,7,8,,10,12) ..
2. Construct a four input NAND gate using gates with 2 inputs. Write down the truth table. Do the same
for a 4 input NOR gate.
3. Implement D Flip-flop by using JK flip flop.
4. Construct a combinational circuit to convert BCD to EX-3 code.
5. Implement a combinational logic circuit, which can compare two bits binary numbers.
Analyze
1. Analyze the following in two ways to get sums of product and product of sums equations. Then show
how you can get one from the other using DeMorgan's Theorem
A E1
B
C
D
F
E2
C
A
2. Why the input variables to a PAL are buffered

3. Why the fixed format in not used and floating format is used
4. Design a Sequence detector to detect 10111001
20
49
16EC303 Electronic Devices & Circuits

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Recall the properties of semiconductor materials in the formation of PN diode and Zener diode
2. Classify the V-I characteristics of CB & CE configurations
3. Design various biasing circuits to achieve the required stability in transistor amplifiers
4. Illustrate the operation of FETs and special diodes for different applications
5. Design half wave, full wave rectifiers with and without filters for different applications
6. Design regulated power supply using Zener diode and transistors
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 2 1
2 2 1
3 3 1 2
4 2 2 1
5 3 2 2
6 3 2 2
Unit I
Semiconductors–Diodes
Review of semiconductor Physics- mobility, conductivity–n and p–type semiconductors, Mass Action Law,
Fermi level in intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, Effect of temperature on Fermi level.
Formation of PN junction, open-circuited p-n junction, Energy band diagram of PN diode, PN diode: Forward
bias and Reverse bias, Volt-ampere characteristics of p-n diode, Temperature dependence on VI characteristics,
Transition and Diffusion capacitances, Breakdown Mechanisms in Semiconductors Diodes: Avalanche
breakdown and Zener breakdown, Zener diode characteristics.
Poisson and continuity equations, Hall Effect
12+4 Hours
Unit II
BJT–Biasing
Junction transistor, Transistor current components, Transistor as an amplifier, Relation between Alpha and Beta,
Input and Output characteristics of Common Base and Common Emitter configurations.
BJT biasing: criteria for fixing operating point, Fixed bias, Collector to base bias, Self-bias techniques for
stabilization, Stabilization factors: S, S', S'’, Compensation techniques: Compensation against variation in V BE
and Ico, Thermal run away, Thermal stability.
Transistor switching characteristics
11+3 Hours
Unit III
FET-special semiconductor devices
Qualitative and Quantitative discussion on JFET characteristics, FET biasing, MOSFET characteristics:
Enhancement mode and depletion mode, FET as VVR.
Characteristics of Tunnel Diode with the help of energy band diagrams, Varactor Diode, LED, photo diode, UJT
characteristics, SCR characteristics.
Solar cell, Liquid Crystal display
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Regulated power supplies
Half wave rectifier, full wave rectifier, Harmonic components in a rectifier circuit, Inductor filter, Capacitor
filter, L-section filter,  -section filter, Multiple L section and Multiple  section filter, and comparison of
various filter circuits in terms of ripple factors.
Basic Regulator Circuit, Series voltage regulator, Shunt regulator, Short circuit protection, Current Limiting,
Specifications of Voltage Regulator Circuits. Design of regulator using Zener diode and Transistors.
Other Full-wave circuits, IC Voltage regulators
11+ 4 Hours
50
Total: 45+15 Hours

Textbook (s)
J.Millman, C.C.Halkias, Electronic Devices and Circuits, 2 ndEdition., Tata McGraw Hill, 1991.
1.
R.L. Boylestad Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuits, 9 th Edition, Pearson/Prentice Hall,
2.
2006.
3. K.Venkata Rao, K. Rama Sudha, Electronic Devices and Circuits, McGraw Hill, 1 st Edition, 2015
4. T.F. Bogart Jr., J.S. Beasley and G.Rico,Electronic Devices and Circuits, Pearson Education, 6 th
Ed.,2004
Reference (s)
1. Visvesvara Rao, K. Bhaskara Rama Murty, K. Raja Rajeswari, P.ChalamRajuPantulu,Electronic

Devices and Circuits, Pearson Education, 2ndEdition, 2007.
2. S.G.Burns and P.R.Bond, Principles of Electronic Circuits, Galgotia Publications, 2nd Edition., 1998.
3. Millman and Grabel ,Microelectronics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2 ndEdition,1979
4. P. John Paul ,Electronic Devices and Circuits, New Age International publishers, 2007.
5. A.Salivahanan, N.Suresh Kumar, A.Vallavaraj, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGraw-
HillPublishing Company Limited, Second Edition,2008
Sample Question (S)

Remember 30 30 --
Understand 40 30 --
Apply 30 40 100
Analyze 20 10 --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List any two advantages of JFET over BJT.
2. State Mass Action Law.
3. Define Rectifiers. List any two types of Rectifiers.
4. List any four specifications of voltage Regulators.
5. Define stability factor, S.
Understand
1. Explain the consequences due to applied reverse voltage at Collector junction in CB configuration.
2. Represent the structure of JFET and explain the operation of n channel JFET.
3. Illustrate the current components of BJT.
4. Interpret FET as a Voltage Controlled Device.
5. Compare compensation techniques for the variations in I CO due to temperature.
6. Explain the working principle of Tunnel diode with its V-I characteristics.
Apply
1. Find the value of IC and IE of a transistor at room temperature for I co=5μA, IB=100μA and β= 100, If the
temperature is raised by 100oC.
2. A Specimen of pure germanium at 3000K has a density of charge carriers 2.5x10^19/m3. It is doped with
donor impurities atoms at a rate of one impurity atom every 10 ^6 atoms of germanium. Assume
complete ionization of impurities. The density of germanium atom is 4.2 x 10 ^28 atoms/m3. Compute
the resistivity of the doped germanium if the electron mobility is 0.38 m ^2/V-s.
3. An a.c supply of 230V is applied to a half-wave rectifier circuit through transformer of turns ration 5:1.
Assume the diode is an ideal one. The load resistance is 300Ω. Find
(a) dc output voltage (b) PIV (c) maximum power delivered to the load and
(d) average power delivered to the load
4. Show that if Rh is the Hall co-efficient and σ is the conductivity of a metal then the drift mobility of the
conduction electron is given by d   RH
21
51
16EC307 Digital Electronics lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Implement the Universal gates using logic gates
2. Implement the logic circuits using Universal gates
3. Design and analyze combinational logic circuit
4. Design flip-flop using gates and ICs
5. Design and analyze synchronous and asynchronous counter
6. Implement shift registers using flip-flops and design an application using registers and counters
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of experiments
Perform any twelve experiments from the following
1. Verification of logic gates and implementation of universal gates by using logic gates.
2. Realization of a Boolean function by using NAND-NAND and NOR-NOR logic.
3. Design a full adder circuit using half adder and full subtractor circuit by using half sub tractor
4. Implementation of BCD adder using 4bit binary adders
5. BCD to excess- 3 code converter.
6. Design a 4X1 multiplexer and 1X4 Demultiplexer using logic gates
7. Design a 8X3 encoder using gates
8. Design a 3X8 Decoder using gates
9. Design a BCD to 7-segment decoder/driver
10. Implementation of 8 bit binary comparator using 4 bit binary comparators
11. Implementation of any two flip-flops using NAND & study of 7476
12. Design of synchronous counter
13. Design of asynchronous counter
14. Study and verify the operation of shift registers
1. List of Augmented Experiments22

2. Implementation of a 3-bit SIPO and SISO shift registers using flip-flops.
3. Implementation of a 3-bit PIPO and PISO shift registers using flip-flops.
4. Design of ALU
5. Design a Digital Clock
1. Morris Mano, Digital Design, PHI, 3rd Edition, 2001.

2. Charles H. Roth, Fundamentals of Logic Design, Thomson Publications, 3 rd Edition2014
22
Students shall opt any one of the Mini–Projects in addition to the regular experiments
52
16EC308 Electronic Devices and Circuits Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate various electronic components and test equipment like multimeter, function generator,
and CRO in order to measure passive components and observe the waveforms
2. Predict the V-I characteristics of PN junction and Zener diodes
3. Compare the operation of BJT and FET through their V-I characteristics
4. Compare half wave and full wave rectifiers with and without filters
5. Implement D.C. Regulated power supplies circuits using Zener and BJT
6. Design and verify the self-biasing CE configuration circuit
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
(For Laboratory examination–Minimum of 10 experiments)
Identification and Testing of Components
Demonstration of Measuring Instruments
1. PN Junction diode characteristics A. Forward bias B. Reverse bias.
2. Zener diode characteristics
3. Transistor CB characteristics (Input and Output)
4. Transistor CE characteristics (Input and Output)
5. Half wave rectifier with and without capacitor filter.
6. Full wave center tapped rectifier with and without capacitor filter.
7. FET characteristics
8. Design of self bias for CE configuration
9. Design of Zener regulator.
10. Design of series voltage regulator.
11. Design of shunt voltage regulator.
12. UJT characteristics

1. Design of Regulated DC Power Supply using transistors
2. Design of IR transmitter
3. Design of IR Receiver
4. Water level indicator using transistors
5. Burglar Alarm

1. N.N.Bhargava, D.C.kulshreshtha S.C.Gupta, Basic electronics and linear circuits Tata MC Graw Hill
company Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2003.
2. R.L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Pearson/Prentice Hall,
9thEdition, 2006.
23
53
16EE309 Electrical Engineering Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the fundamentals of various electrical gadgets, their working and troubleshooting
2. Construct residential wiring and various types of wiring schemes
3. Classify different types of fuses and MCBs
4. Find various electrical quantities
5. Demonstrate various types of earthing
6. Apply various network reduction methods for simplifying both AC and DC circuits
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
(For Laboratory examination–Minimum of 12 experiments)
1. Study of Earthing and Measurement of Earth resistance.

2. Study of fire extinguisher.
3. Residential wiring (using Energy meter, fuses, switches, indicator, lamps etc.).
4. Study of Fuses and MCBs.
5. Study of trouble shooting of electrical equipment (fan, iron box, mixer grinder etc.)
6. Fan winding.
7. Operation and maintenance of electrical machines
8. Study of working of home inverter
9. Study of LED lamps
10. Verification of Network Theorems
11. Series and Parallel Resonant circuits
12. Determination of Two-port network Parameters
13. Determination of Self, Mutual Inductances and Coefficient of coupling.
14. Measurement of power using 3-voltmeter/3-ammeter method.
15. Mesh and Nodal Analysis
List of Augmented Experiments 24

1. General house protection scheme.
2. Types of wiring (fluorescent lamp wiring, staircase wiring, godown wiring, etc)
3. Measurement of energy (using single phase and three phase energy meter)
4. Design practice of a transformer.

1. Subhransu Sekhar Dash & .Vi ayakumar, “Electrical Engineering Practice Lab Manual”, Vi ay
Nicole Imprints Pvt. Ltd., 1st Edition, 2013.
2. Jeyapoovan.T, Saravanapandian.M and Pranitha.S, “Engineering Practices Lab Manual”, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt., Ltd., 5th Edition, 2009.
24
54
16EEI01 Automotive Electrical and Electronics

(Design and delivered by Dr. Anbalagan T, Robert Bosch engineering & business solution Ltd., Coimbatore)
1001
Course Outcomes
1. Classify types of batteries

2. Demonstrate various battery charging techniques
3. Develop battery charging techniques to various types of batteries
4. Illustrate voltage and current regulation schemes
5. Outline various types of cut-out relays
6. Outline various types of regulators
Types of Batteries 8 Hours

Batteries – types, construction and working principle of Lead Acid Battery, Nickel – Cadmium
Battery, Nickel Metal Hydride Battery, Sodium Sulphur Battery and Aluminum air Battery,
lithium ion batteries, Characteristics of batteries, battery rating, capacity and efficiency, Various
Tests on battery, battery – charging techniques, maintenance of batteries.
Starting and Charging System 7 Hours

Requirements of Starter Motor, Starter Motor types, construction and characteristics, Starter drive mechanisms,
Starter Switches and Solenoids, Charging system components, Generators and Alternators ,types, construction
and Characteristics, Voltage and Current Regulation, Cut –out relays and regulators, charging circuits
55
16ESX1A Employability Skills I

0200
Soft Skills
Communication Skills & Confidence: How Communication Skills affect Confidence? How to communicate
effectively.(with Examples) ; Listening: Listening? , Listening Vs Hearing, Possible reasons for why people do
not Listen at times, Active Listening Vs Passive Listening, How Listening can affect our relationships? How
Listening helps in Campus Placements also? (with Examples);Goal Setting: Vision Vs Mission Vs Goals, Why
Goal Setting? SMART Technique to Goal Setting, Putting First things First, SWOT Analysis and Time
Management; Attitude & Confidence: Attitude Vs Skills Vs Knowledge, Attitude Vs Behaviour, How to
develop Positive Attitude? Confidence? Fear? Steps to Overcoming the Fear of Public Speaking? Public
Speaking: JAM, J2M, Presentations by Students on General Topics.
Quantitative Aptitude
Problems on numbers - H.C.F and L.C.M - Problems on ages – Averages - Time and Work - Time & Distance
– Percentages - Profit & loss - Ratio & Proportions – Partnership - Simple interest & Compound interest –
Clocks – Calendars - Pipes and Cisterns - Mensuration
Verbal reasoning
Number series - Direction test - Blood relations – Syllogisms - Seating arrangement - Permutations,
combinations and Probability – Dice - Cube and Cuboid - Data sufficiency - Logical deductions – Analogies -
Course of action - Cause and effect - Data interpretation
56
16EC503 Linear IC Applications

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Describe various stages of operational amplifier

2. Explain the characteristics of op-amps and its compensation techniques
3. Implement linear and non-linear applications of op-amp using IC741
4. Design Active filters, PLL and timers
5. Construct different types of voltage regulators and multipliers
6. Analyze different ADCs and DACs
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3

1 2 1
2 2 1
3 3 2 2
4 3 2 2
5 3 2 2
6 3 2 1
Unit-I
OP-AMPs
DC and AC analysis of dual input balanced output differential amplifier, Properties of other differential
amplifier configurations, DC coupling and cascade differential amplifier stages, current mirror, Level
Translator.
Integrated Circuits: types, classification, package types, temperature ranges, power supplies. Characteristics of
Op-Amps, Op-Amp Block diagram, ideal and practical Op-Amp specifications, DC and AC characteristics, 741
Op-Amp and its features, Op-Amp parameters and their measurement, input and output offset voltages and
currents, slew rate, CMRR, PSRR, Frequency compensation technique.
Constant current Bias circuit, FET input OP-Amps
11+4 hours
Unit-II
Applications of OP-AMPS
Inverting and non-inverting amplifier, adder, subtractor, integrator and differentiator, difference amplifier,
instrumentation amplifier, AC amplifier, V-I, I-V converters , Non-linear function generation, comparators,
Multivibrators, square wave and Triangular wave generators, Schmitt Trigger, Log and antilog amplifiers.
Buffers, precision rectifiers
12+3 hours
Unit-III
Analog Filters, Timers and Phase Locked Loops
Introduction, Butterworth filters-first order, second order LPF, HPF filters. Band pass, Band reject and all pass
filters, Introduction to 555 Timer, functional diagram, Monostable and Astable operations and applications,
Schmitt Trigger, VCO, PLL: Introduction, Block schematic, principles and description of individual blocks,565
PLL .applications of PLL: Frequency multiplication, frequency translation.
AM, FM and FSK demodulators using PLL.
11+4 hours
UNIT–IV
D/A & A/D Converters, Analog Multipliers and IC Regulators
Introduction, Basic DAC techniques, weighted resistor DAC, R-2R Ladder DAC, Inverted R-2R DAC and IC
1408 DAC, different types of ADCs-parallel comparator type ADC, counter type ADC, successive
approximation ADC and Dual slope ADC, 78XX, 79XX, LM723,LM317, LM337, Four Quadrant multiplier,
balanced modulator, IC1496, Applications of analog switches and Multiplexers, Sample & Hold amplifiers.
DAC and ADC specifications
12+3 hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. amakanth A. Gayakwad, “Op-Amps & Linear ICs”, Pearson Education, 4th Edition, 2015.
57
2. .F. Coughlin and Fredrick Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers & Linear Integrated Circuits”, Pearson
Education, 6th Edition, 2000.
3. David A. Bell, “Operational Amplifiers & Linear ICs”, Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, 2011.
Reference(s)
1. D. oy Chowdhury, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age International (p) Ltd., 4th Edition, 2011.
2. Sergio Franco, “Design with Operational Amplifiers & Analog Integrated Circuits”, McGraw-Hill Higher
Education, 2003.
3. George Clayton and Steve Winder, “Operational Amplifiers”, Butterworth & Company Publ. Ltd., 5 th
Edition, 2003.
Sample Question (s)

Cognitive level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test 25(%)
Remember 30 20 --
Understand 30 30 --
Apply 30 30 60
Analyze 10 20 40
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define the non-ideal dc characteristics that add error components to the dc output voltage of Op-amp
2. The basic step of 9 bit DAC is 10.3mV. If 000000000 represents 0V, what output is produced if the
input is 101101111
3. List the ideal characteristics of operational amplifier
4. List the limitations of an ordinary Op-amp differentiator
5. List the components to assess the performance of R-2R ladder DAC
Understand
1. Classify differential amplifiers
2. Explain the operation of R-2R ladder DAC
3. Explain about the Op-Amp parameters that should be considered for AC and DC applications
4. Explain the working of a trans conductance amplifier with floating load using Op-amp
5. Compare different types of ADCs
Apply
1. Design a Practical differentiator that will eliminate the limitations of ordinary differentiator using op-
amp
2. Design a Practical integrator that will eliminate the limitations of ordinary integrator using op-amp
3. Design astable multivibrator using IC 555 and also determine its frequency
4. Design a filter to allow the signal frequency upto 2KHz
Analyze
1. Compare and Contrast between counter type ADC and dual slope ADC
2. Outline the applications of operational amplifiers
3. Compare the performance of SAR type A/D Converter and counter type ADC
4. Structure the nonlinear applications of op-amp using IC 741
5. Compare and Contrast between R-2R and Inverted R-2R type DAC
25
58
16EE402 Control Systems

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Develop mathematical models of control systems in continuous time

2. Outline the system using block diagram and signal flow graph techniques
3. Analyze the transient and steady state performances of a control system
4. Contrast the stability of a system using time domain and frequency domain techniques
5. Develop different compensators and controllers in time/frequency domain
6. Illustrate state space modelling and compute the controllability and observability for the given system
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PO5 PO13 PO14

1 2 2 3 3 3
2 3 2 2 3 3
3 3 2 3 3 3
4 2 2 3 3 3
5 2 3 3 3 3
6 2 2 2 3 3
Unit I
Mathematical Models of Physical Systems
Concepts of Control Systems-Open Loop and closed loop control systems, Classification of control systems,
Transfer function, Modeling of Electric systems, Translational and rotational mechanical systems, Block
diagram reduction Technique, Signal flow graphs
Effects of feedback
Practical Component
1. Open loop and closed loop analysis of a double integrator.
2. Simulation and analysis of R-L-C circuit
12+6 Hours
Unit II
Time Domain Analysis
Standard test signals, Time response of first and second order systems, time domain specifications, characteristic
Equation, Static error constants, Effects of P, PI, PD and PID controllers, Concept of stability, Routh-Hurwitz
stability criterion, Difficulties and limitations in RH stability criterion, Root locus concept, construction of root
loci
Effects of addition of poles and zeros on root locus plot
Practical Component
1. Analysis of an open-loop DC motor using root locus
2. PID controller design for a DC motor
3. Controller design in time domain and root-locus analysis
12+9 Hours
Unit III
Frequency Domain Analysis
Frequency response characteristics, Frequency domain specifications, Time and frequency domain parameters
correlations, Bode plot, transfer function from the Bode plot, Stability Analysis using Bode Plot, Polar Plot and
Nyquist’s stability criterion.
M & N circles
Practical Component
1. PID controller design in frequency domain and analysis
2. Stability analysis using Nyquist plots
11+6 Hours
Unit IV
State Space Analysis
59
Concepts of state, state space modeling of physical systems, Representation of state space model in different
canonical forms, Transfer function and state space model correlations, Solution of state equations, State
Transition Matrix and it’s Properties, Basic concept of Controllability and Observability.
Diagonalization
Practical Component
1. Construction of Simulink diagram from differential equations and state space equations
2. Controllability and observability analysis of complex systems
3. Controller design in the state space domain
10+9 Hours
Total: 45+30=75Hours
Textbook (s)
1. I.J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, “Control Systems Engineering” New Age International (P) Limited, 6th
Edition, 2015.
2. atsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 4th Edition, 2006.
3. Mario E. Salgado, Graham C. Goodwin, Stefan F. Graebe, “Control Systems Design”, Pearson
Education India; 1st Edition, 2015.
Reference (s)
1. . Alice Mary and P. amana, “Control Systems”, Universities Press (India) Pvt. Ltd., 1 st Edition,
2016.
2. Smara it Ghosh, “Control Systems”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2012.
3. Ben amin C. uo, “Automatic Control Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2011.
Sample Question (s)

Cognitive level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Laboratory Test (%)
Remember 20 10 ---
Apply 30 30 40
Analyze 30 30 60
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define a closed loop control system
2. List any 4 applications of closed loop control system
3. Define transfer function
4. List 2 advantages of Signal flow graph over Block-diagram reduction technique
5. List any 3 properties of state transition matrix
6. Label different types of frequency domain analysis methods
Understand
1. Differentiate SISO and MIMO systems
2. Explain the traffic control system concepts using open loop as well as closed loop system
3. Derive f-v and f-i analysis
4. Explain different cases in R-H criteria
5. Derive state transition matrix
6. Explain Mason’s gain formula
Apply
1. Apply Open Loop and closed loop control systems for the person walking on a road
2. Construct root locus for the open loop T.F function G(s) = (s+2)/(s+1)(s+3)
3. Evaluate transfer function for the state space equation give bellow
.
x  AX  BU y  CX  DU
4. Construct the Bode plot for given open loop transfer function
G(s) = (s+2)/(s+1)(s+3)
5. Develop the Nyquist plot for the given open loop transfer function. G(s) = (s+2)/(s+1)(s+3)
60
Analyze
1. Compare the properties of time domain and frequency domain analysis
2. Analyze the effect of disturbance on the system performance due to feedback
3. Feedback will increase instability of the system. Justify
4. Distinguish the advantage and disadvantages of the root locus and Bode plot
5. Illustrate the variation of root locus with respect to variations in K
6. Formulate the state space model in different canonical forms
61
16EE403 Network Analysis & Synthesis

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret state variable models for various electrical circuits
2. Develop the solution of state equation for the given state model
3. Illustrate the response of various electrical networks using Laplace transform
4. Assess the response for different electrical networks using Fourier transform
5. Outline Hurwitz polynomial and Positive real functions to realize the network
6. Develop the networks by using synthesis methods for the given transfer function
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO13

1 3 2 3
2 3 2 3
3 3 2 3
4 3 2 3
5 3 2 3
6 3 2 3
Unit I
State Variable Analysis
Choice of state variables in Electrical networks - Formulation of state equations for Electrical networks -
Equivalent source method. Network topological method - Solution of state equations - Analysis of simple
networks with state variable approach.
State transition matrix and its properties.
11 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Laplace Transform
Continuous-Time Signal Functions, Discrete-Time Signal Functions, Laplace transforms and its properties,
Convolution integral, response to step, pulse, ramp, impulse inputs- RL, RC, RLC networks, Inverse Laplace
transform.
Solutions of differential equations with initial conditions.
12 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Fourier Series and Fourier Transform Representation
Introduction, Trigonometric form of Fourier series, Exponential form of Fourier series, Wave symmetry, Fourier
integrals and transforms, Fourier transform of a periodic function, Properties of Fourier Transform, Parseval’s
theorem , Fourier transform of some common signals, Application in Circuit Analysis.
Fourier transform relationship with Laplace Transform 12 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Network Synthesis
Hurwitz criterion, Positive real function, Elementary synthesis procedure, LC immittance, RC impedance and
RL impedance functions - Foster and Cauer Forms.
Realization of RLC networks.
10 + 4 Hours
Total: 45 + 15=60 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. W.H. Hayt, J.E.Kimmerly, and S.M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, McGraw Hill Education Pvt.
Ltd., 7th Edition, 2013.
2. M.E Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”, Prentice Hall of India, 3rd Edition, 2015.
3. A Sudhakar, and Shyammohan S. Palli, “Circuits and Networks: Analysis and Synthesis”, McGraw Higher
Reference (s)
1. Mahmood Nahvi and Joselph Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, McGraw Higher Education, 5 t h Edition,
2010.
2. Charles K Alexander, Mathew N and O Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd
62
Edition, 2013.
3. G.Gopal Bhise, R.Prem Chadha, and C.Durgesh Kulshreshtha, “Engineering Network Analysis & Filter
Design”, Umesh Publication, 3rd Edition, 2011.
Sample Question (s)
Remember 20 20 ---
Apply 30 40 60
Analyze --- --- 40
Evaluate --- ---- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define state and state variable
2. List any two advantages of state space analysis
3. List any 4 properties of Laplace transform
4. List any 4 properties of Fourier transform
5. Define causality of a network
Understand
1. Illustrate the response of RL series circuit for unit step input
2. Formulate the state space model for Series RLC circuit using equivalent source method
3. Summarize convolution integral in graphical form
4. Represent the properties of Hurwitz polynomial
Apply
1. Compute the Foster and Cauer form realizations in impedance form
2. Construct RL ladder network for the given admittance function
3. Design elementary synthesis procedures for the given impedance function
4. Asses given function is positive real or not?
26
63
16EE404 Transformers & Induction Machines

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the operation of transformer and analyze its performance

2. Outline parallel operation of transformer to improve the load sharing capabilities and reliability
3. Interpret the usage of three phase transformer in electrical applications
4. Illustrate the operation of three phase induction motor and analyze its performance
5. Apply different speed control methods of three phase induction motors essential for industrial drives
6. List the application of single phase machines for different industrial needs
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO 3 PO 14
1 3 3 1
2 2 3 1
3 2 3 1
4 3 3 1
5 2 3 1
6 1 3 1
Unit I
Construction, Operation & Performance of single Phase Transformers
Single phase transformers- types-constructional details-Ideal Transformer-e.m.f equation - operation on no-load
and load, Practical Transformer, phasor diagrams, Equivalent circuit, Losses - effect of supply voltage &
frequency on iron losses-efficiency-regulation-All day efficiency, Predetermination of efficiency and regulation
- OC and SC tests, separation of losses, applications.
Parallel operation of transformers with equal and unequal voltage ratios.
Sumpner’s test
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Auto-Transformers and Poly phase Transformers
Auto-Transformers: Auto transformers-equivalent circuit-comparison with two winding transformers.
Poly phase Transformers: Poly-phase connections - Y/Y, Y/Δ, Δ /Y, Δ/Δ and open Δ, Three winding
transformers, vector groups, Scott connection.
Tap changing transformer 11+3 Hours
Unit III
Three-Phase Induction Machines
Three-phase induction motors-constructional details of cage and wound rotor machines-production of rotating
magnetic field - principle of operation - rotor e.m.f and rotor frequency - rotor reactance, rotor current and p.f at
standstill and during operation, torque equation- expressions for maximum torque and starting torque, torque-slip
characteristics, equivalent circuit, Power stages, Circle diagram, Crawling and cogging..
Double cage Induction motor 11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Speed Control and starting Methods
Speed control-change of frequency, rotor resistance control and cascade connection. Voltage injection into rotor
circuit, Starting methods.
Single phase Induction motors: Single phase induction motors-Double revolving field theory, Equivalent
circuit, Starting methods and applications.
Pole changing methods. 11+4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. P.S. Bimbra, “Electrical Machines”, hanna Publishers, 4th Edition, 2010
2. I.J. Nagrath and D.P. othari, “Electric Machines”, Tata Mc Graw – Hill Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2012.
3. . Murugesh umar, “DC Machines and Transformers”, Vikas Publisher, 2nd Edition, 2004.
64
Reference (s)
1. A.E. Fitzgerald, C. ingsley and S. Umans, “Electric Machinery”, Tata McGraw Hill, 6th Edition,
2010.
2. Stephen J. Chapman, “Electric Machinery Fundamentals”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2009.
3. . . a put, “Electrical Machines”, 5th Edition, Lakshmi Publishers, 2008.
Sample Question (s)
Remember 30 25 ---
Apply 30 35 80
Analyze --- --- 20
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction
2. List any 4 applications of transformer
3. Relate slip ring and squirrel cage induction motor
4. Define cogging and crawling
5. Define voltage regulation
Understand
1. Represent e.m.f. equation of a transformer
2. Explain why transformer rating will be given in kVA but not in kW
3. Explain various types of material used in construction of core of a transformer
4. Explain why the rotor of induction motor can never attain synchronous speed
5. Explain the power flow diagram of an induction motor
6. Prove the condition P2:Pm: Pc=1:(1-s):s for an induction motor
Apply
1. Show how a 2-winding transformer can be converted into an auto-transformer
2. Describe on-load tap-changer with proper sequence of operation
3. Compute equivalent circuit parameter of transformer by conducting OC and SC tests
4. Demonstrate the speed control of an induction motor using voltage injection method
5. Develop an equivalent circuit of single phase transformer from fundamentals
27
65
16EE305 Power Plant Engineering & Economics

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the concepts of power generation from thermal energy

2. Outline the concepts of power generation from diesel and gas plant
3. Illustrate the concepts of power generation from nuclear energy
4. Make use of renewable energy sources for electrical power generation
5. Summarize economic aspects of power generation
6. Classify tariff methods
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO6 PO7

1 3 1 1
2 3 1 1
3 3 1 1
4 3 1 1
5 3 1 1
6 3 1 1
Unit I
Generation of Electrical Energy & Coal Based Thermal Power Plants
Basic structure of power system; demand of electrical system – base load, peak load; controlling power balance
between generator and load, advantages of interconnected system.
Rankine cycle, Line diagram of Thermal Power Station (TPS) showing paths of coal, steam, water, air, ash and
flue gasses, Brief description of TPS components, Boilers-fire tube and water tube, Super heaters, Economizers,
Turbines-impulse, reaction, combination of impulse & reaction-methods of reducing rotor speed, Condensers,
Cooling towers, and Chimney.
Binary Cycles and Cogeneration systems.
13+5 Hours
Unit II
Diesel, Gas Turbine, Combined Cycle and Nuclear Power Plants
Otto, Diesel, Dual & Brayton Cycle. Working of Diesel, Gas Turbine, Combined Cycle and Integrated Gasifier
based Combined Cycle systems.
Basics of Nuclear Engineering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear Power Plants, Working of Nuclear Reactors:
BWR, PWR, CANada Deuterium - Uranium reactor (CANDU), Breeder reactor, Safety measures for Nuclear
Power plants & Waste Disposal.
Gas Cooled and Liquid Metal Cooled Reactors.
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Power from Renewable Energy
Hydro Electric Power Plants – Classification, Typical Layout, description of components. Turbines-
classification of turbines and their working. Principle of operation, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal,
Solar Photo Voltaic (SPV), Solar Thermal and Fuel Cell power systems.
Principle, Construction and working of Geothermal and Biogas Power Plants.
10+3 Hours
Unit IV
Economic Aspects of Power Generation & Tariff
Load curve, load duration and integrated load duration curves, discussion on economic aspects- connected
load, maximum demand, demand factor, load factor, diversity factor, capacity factor, utilization factor,
capacity, utilization and plant use factors- Numerical Problems.
Costs of Generation - Fixed, Semi-fixed and Running Costs, Desirable Characteristics of a tariff, Tariff
Methods- Simple rate, Flat Rate, Block-Rate, two-part, three-part, and power factor tariff methods.
Selection of generation units
10+3 Hours
66
Textbook(s)
1. C.L. Wadhawa, “Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electric Energy”, New Age International
(P) Limited, 3rd Edition, 2006.
2. P. . Nag, “Power Plant Engineering”, McGraw Hill Education, 4th Edition, 2014.
3. Mano umar Gupta, “Power Plant Engineering”, Prentice Hall India, 1st Edition, 2012.
Reference(s)
1. S.N. Singh, “Electrical Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution”, Prentice Hall India, 4th
Edition, 2003.
2. M.V. Deshpande, “Elements of Power Station-Design and Practice”, Wheeler Publishing, 6th Edition,
2010.
3. Olle I. Elgerd, and Patrick D. van der Pui e, “Electrical Power Engineering”, Springer Publishers, 2nd
Edition, 2011.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 50 40 ---
Apply --- 20 100
Analyze --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Illustrate the single line diagram of a power system
2. Differentiate between base load and peak load
3. State the function of moderator and control rods in a nuclear reactor
4. Explain the principle of operation of SPV system
5. Differentiate between connected load and maximum demand
Understand
1. Classify hydroelectric power plants
2. Discuss in detail about fire tube and water tube boilers
3. Explain the working of a gas turbine power plant with a neat sketch
4. Explain the working of PWR reactor
5. Explain the operation of a pumped storage hydroelectric power plant with neat sketch
6. Explain the working of a tidal power plant
Apply
1. Discuss the various methods of reducing the rotor speed in steam turbines
2. Explain the process by which hot air from the boiler gets cooled in a cooling tower
3. Explain how nuclear fission process occurs in a controlled manner in a nuclear reactor
4. Explain how secondary nuclear fuel can be produce using breeder reactor
5. Discuss the application of fuel cells in power systems
6. Explain the rationale of constructing pumped storage hydroelectric power plants even though the
overall operating efficiency of such a plant is low as compared to a normal hydroelectric plant
28
67
16EE406 Electrical Measurements & Instrumentation

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Outline the basic working principles of MC&MI instruments

2. Identify a suitable instrument transformer for the measurement of high voltage and current
3. Illustrate the usage of wattmeter and energy meter in electrical field of application
4. Find unknown electrical parameters using appropriate methods
5. Demonstrate the suitable method of measuring non-electrical parameters in various applications
6. Select the proper digital instruments to measure electrical quantities
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PO14

1 3 1 2
2 3 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 3 1 2
5 3 1 2
6 3 2 1
Unit I
Measuring Instruments
Classification of measuring instruments, Different torques in an instrument, Ammeters and Voltmeters –
PMMC, moving iron type instruments – expression for the deflecting torque and control torque – Errors and
Compensations, extension of instrument range using shunts and multipliers. CT and PT – Ratio and phase angle
errors.
Electrostatic voltmeter, CT&PT design considerations.
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Measurement of Power and Energy
Single phase dynamometer wattmeter, LPF and UPF wattmeter, Expression for deflecting and control torques.
Measurement of 3- phase power, Single phase induction type energy meter – driving and braking torques –
errors and compensations. Testing by phantom loading. Three phase energy meter.
Extension of range of wattmeter using Instrument transformers.
11+4 Hours
Unit III
D.C and A.C Bridges
Principle and operation of D.C. Crompton’s potentiometer – standardization – Measurement of unknown
resistance, current, voltage - applications. Methods of measuring low, medium and high resistance –Wheat
stone’s bridge, Carey Foster’s bridge, elvin’s double bridge, loss of charge method, Megger –Measurement of
inductance - Maxwell’s bridge, Hay’s bridge, Anderson’s bridge, Owen’s bridge. Measurement of capacitance –
Desauty bridge – Schering Bridge. Wagener’s earthing device.
Sensitivity of Wheat stone’s bridge, Modified Desauty’s bridge, HV Schering Bridge
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Transducers & Digital Voltmeters
Classification of transducers – Resistive, capacitive & inductive transducers, active and passive
transducers, Piezoelectric transducers – strain gauges – LVDT – thermocouple. Digital voltmeters-
Successive approximation, ramp, dual slope integration continuous balance type, digital frequency meter,
Construction of CRO, measurement of different quantities using CRO, Lissajous figures.
RVDT, Calibration of CRO
12+3 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. E.W. Golding, and F.C. Widdis, “Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments”, eem
Publications Pvt. Ltd.,3rd Edition, 2011.
2. A. . Sawhney, “Electrical & Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation”, Dhanpat ai& Co. Pvt.
3. D.V.S. Murthy, “Transducers and Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd edition, 2008.
68
Reference (s)
1. A. D. Helfrick and W. D. Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”,
Prentice Hall of India, 5th Edition, 2002.
2. H. S. alsi, “Electronic Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2009.
3. D.Patranabis, “Sensors and Transducers”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2nd Edition, 2009.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 30 30 ---
Apply 20 20 100
Analyze --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List the different torques in measuring instruments.
2. Write the balancing equation for AC bridge
3. What are the types of AC and DC bridges?
4. Define the controlling torque of a measuring instrument
5. State the use of Lissajous figures
6. List the application of DC Crompton’s potentiometer.
Understand
1. Explain the construction and operation of PMMC and moving iron instruments.
2. Justify how CT is used for current measurement.
3. Explain the concept of Schering bridge to measure unknown capacitance with neat sketch.
4. Infer the conversion of linear displacement into electrical signal in LVDT.
5. Illustrate on measurement of voltage, current and frequency using Lissajous figures.
Apply
1. Demonstrate voltage sensitive self balancing bridge, and derive the bridge sensitivity of
voltage sensitive bridge with fundamentals.
2. Compute the ciruit of Kelvin double bridge used for measurement of low resistance and derive
the conditions for balance.
3. Demonstrate the applications of various types of strain gauges.
4. Show that how PMMC voltmeter altered into ammeter
5. Develop the torque equation for a PMMC instrument and show its scale is linear.
29
69
16EC607 Linear IC Applications lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Design op-Amp circuits for various applications

2. Demonstrate the practical usage of various linear ICs
3. Design and implement the pulse generator using 555 timer
4. Design and construct the various filters like LPF, HPF, BPF, BRF
5. Design a function generator
6. Design a converter which converts analog signal to Digital signal and vice versa
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
Minimum Twelve Experiments to be conducted:
1. Voltage gain of non-inverting and inverting amplifier with feedback.
2. OP AMP Applications–voltage follower, Adder, Subtractor.
3. OP AMP Applications–IC 741- Astable Operation Circuit
4. OP AMP Applications–differentiator, integrator circuit
5. Active Filters–LPF, HPF (first order only )
6. Active Filter–BPF
7. Active Filters–BEF and Notch filter
8. Schmitt Trigger Circuit–Using IC 741
9. Triangular wave Generator using 741OP AMP
10. IC 555 Timer– Monostable Operation Circuit
11. IC 555 Timer- Astable Operation Circuit
12. Phase locked loop
13. Voltage Regulator using IC 78XX,79XX, 723
14. Analog to Digital Converter using OP AMP
15. Digital to Analog Converter using OP AMP
Equipment required for Laboratories:
1. RPS
2. CRO, Function Generator
3. Multi Meters
4. Components: - IC741, IC555, IC566, IC1496, IC723, 7805, 7809, 7912 and other essential components
1. Design a function generator to generate sine wave, square wave and triangular wave range from 1KHz
to 1MHz
2. Design a filter which attenuates the frequencies 20 KHz to 40 KHz
3. Design a converter which converts analog signal to Digital signal and vice versa
4. Design a circuit which converts voltage to frequency and vice versa
30
70
1. Ramakanth A. Gayakwad, “Op-Amps & Linear ICs”, Pearson Education, 4th Edition, 2015.
2. .F.Coughlin and Fredrick Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers & Linear Integrated Circuits”, Pearson
3. David A. Bell, “Operational Amplifiers & Linear ICs”, Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, 2011.
71
16EE408 Electrical Measurements & Instrumentation Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Apply suitable method for measuring R, L and C parameters in an electric network

2. Make use of calibration system for various metering equipment
3. Test for dielectric strength of various fluids
4. Measure various non-electrical parameters using transducers
5. Interpret the characteristics of various sensors
6. Measure various non-electrical parameters using sensors
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
Any 10 experiments out of which at least 5 experiments from Group-A and 5 experiments from Group-B.
Group-A: Measurements
1. Calibration of single phase energy meter
2. Measurement of inductance by Maxwell’s Bridge
3. Measurement of resistance by elvin’s Double Bridge
4. Measurement of capacitance by Schering Bridge
5. Measurement of dielectric strength of transformer oil
6. Measurement of choke coil parameters by using 3-ammeter and 3-Voltmeter method
7. Calibration of dynamo type wattmeter by using Phantom loading
Group B: Sensors & Transducers

1. Measure the Linear displacement into Electrical signal using LVDT.
2. Strain measurement and Calibration by using Resistance strain gauge
3. Response of Thermocouple
4. Measurement of Pressure by using Transducers
5. Capacitive Level sensor for liquid level measurement
6. Characteristics of photo transistor and solar cell
7. Measurement of moisture using Hygrometer

1. Development of level measurement system using proximity sensor
2. Development of automatic door opening system using sensors
3. Development of illumination system using sensors
4. Development of soil resistance measurement system

1. E.W. Golding, and F.C. Widdis, “Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments”, eem
Publications Pvt. Ltd.,3rd Edition, 2011.
2. A. . Sawhney, “Electrical & Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation”, Dhanpat ai& Co. Pvt.
3. D.V.S. Murthy, “Transducers and Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd edition, 2008.
31
72
16EE409 DC Machines Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Identify the practical methods to evaluate the performance of DC shunt machines.

2. Apply various methods to find the efficiency of DC series machines.
3. Find the efficiency of DC compound machine at different loads.
4. Analyze various losses of DC machine by performing indirect tests.
5. Find stray losses of a dc shunt machines using two similar machines
6. Apply speed control techniques of DC motors to industrial applications.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
Perform any 10 experiments from the following list
1. Magnetization characteristics of DC Shunt Generator

2. Load test on DC Shunt Generator
3. Load test on DC Series Generator
4. Load test on DC Compound Generator
5. Hopkinson’s test on DC Shunt Machines
6. Field test on DC Series Machines
7. Swinburne’s test
8. Speed control of DC Shunt Motor
9. Brake test on DC Shunt Motor
10. Retardation test on DC Shunt Motor
11. Separation of losses in DC Shunt Motor
12. Brake test on DC Compound Motor
13. Brake test on DC Series Motor
1. Simulation of Brake Test on a DC Shunt Motor

2. Simulation of Swinburne’s Test
3. Simulation of Separation Of Losses In A D.C. Shunt Motor
4. Simulation of Open Circuit Characteristics of a D.C. Shunt Generator
5. Simulation of Speed Control of a D.C Shunt Motor

1. P.S. Bimbra, “Electrical Machines”, hanna Publishers, 4th Edition, 2010
2. I.J. Nagrath and D.P. othari, “Electric Machines”, Tata Mc Graw – Hill Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2012.
3. . Murugesh umar, “DC Machines and Transformers”, Vikas Publisher, 2nd Edition, 2004.
32
73
16EEI02 Solid State Lighting

(Design and delivered by Efftronics Systems Pvt. Ltd., Vijayawada)
1001
Course Outcomes
1. Classify basics of Light Source

2. Demonstrate various concepts of LED Luminaire & their characteristics
3. Apply appropriate design for LED luminaire
4. Illustrate & select appropriate driver for LED
5. Interpret thermal characteristics of LED luminaire
6. Outline mechanical design aspects of LED luminaire
Unit-I
Basics of Light source and Luminaries
Basics of LED technology, Classification of LED’s, Optical Characteristics of LED’s Electrical Characteristics
of LED’s, Thermal Characteristics of LED’s, Understanding the LED Data Sheet, LED Luminaire
Characteristics, Different parts of an LED Luminaire and their functions, Different types of LED Luminaires.
Unit-II
Design of an LED Luminaire
Modelling a light source based on the Luminaire Characteristics, Selecting the LED, Selection of the secondary
optics, Selection of the diffusers.
Driver types – CC/CV, Estimation of the power requirement, protections required, performance requirements,
reliability parameters.
Heat propagation modes in Luminaire, Thermal interfaces in Luminaire, Estimation of LED Junction
temperature, Estimation of thermal performance.
Functional requirements, material selections, ingress protections, environmental requirements, protective
coatings and their functions.
15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Vinod umar hanna, “Fundamentals of Solid State Lighting”, C C Press, 1st Edition, 2014.
2. Van Driel, W.D., Fan, Xue un, “Solid State Lighting Reliability-Components to System”, Springer
Series, 2013.
Reference (s)
1. IES Lighting Hand Book.
2. Lumileds, Osram Opto, Nichia LED’s, Cree LED’s Application notes and Technical Literature
3. BEE Code – Lighting.
4. US Department of Energy Solid State Lighting Technical Notes.
5. NPTEL, IIT Kharagpur Illumination Engineering Course - http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105060.
6. Philips Lighting Technical Literature.
7. Sylvania Lighting Technical Literature.
74
16ESX1B Employability Skills II

0201
Soft Skills
Communication Skills (An Overview): Communication? Elements of Communication, Communication Skills
and Role of Feedback, Cross-Checking, Detail Orientation and Follow-up in our Interactions (with Examples);
Building Vocabulary: Reading Articles, Exploring New Words, Meanings and the usage with examples; Self
Esteem: Definition? Types of Self Esteem, Causes of Low Self Esteem, Merits of Positive Self Esteem and
Steps to build a positive Self Esteem; Group Discussions (Practice): GD? GD Vs Debate, Overview of a GD ,
Skills assessed in a GD, Dos & Don’ts, & Conducting practice sessions (Simple Topics); Brain Storming
Sessions (on Current affairs) ; Case Study (on Problem Solving) ; Motivational Talk: Team Work: Team Vs
Group? Stages in Team Building, Mistakes to avoid and Lessons to Learn (Through Stories); (Can be a Case
Specific also)
Problems on numbers - H.C.F and L.C.M - Problems on ages – Averages - Time and Work - Time & Distance –
Percentages - Profit & loss - Ratio & Proportions – Partnership - Simple interest & Compound interest – Clocks
– Calendars - Pipes and Cisterns - Mensuration
Verbal reasoning
75
16CS307 Object Oriented Programming

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Implement object oriented concepts to real world problems

2. Plan applications using different types of inheritances
3. Produce and use user defined packages
4. Attribute and recover runtime exceptions arise in the applications
5. Execute parallel processing applications using threads
6. Generate internet based interactive applications using peripheral functions
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO11 PO12

1 3 2 3 2 1 2
2 3 3 3 2 1 2
3 2 3 3 2 1 2
4 2 3 3 2 1 2
5 3 3 3 2 1 2
6 3 3 3 2 1 3
Unit I
Introduction to Java
Overview of Object Oriented Programming principles, Importance of Java to the Internet, Byte code, Data
types, arrays, control statements, Classes and Objects– constructors, methods, access control, this keyword,
overloading methods and constructors, garbage collection
Features of object oriented programming–Java History–Computer Programming Hierarchy–Role of Java
Programmer in Industry
Practical Components
1. Write a Java program that prints all real solutions to the quadratic equation ax2 + bx +c = 0.
2. Write a Java program that uses both recursive and non-recursive functions to print the nth value in the
Fibonacci sequence.
3. Write a Java program to demonstrate String handling methods and tokenizing given string/text using
String Tokenizer class
4. Write a Java program to implement matrix operations using multidimensional arrays.
10+9 Hours
Unit II
Inheritance, Packages & Interface
Inheritance: Hierarchical abstractions, Base class and subclass, Benefits of inheritance, super keyword, final
keyword with inheritance, polymorphism, abstract classes
Packages: Defining, Creating and Accessing a Package, Understanding CLASSPATH, importing packages,
Member access rules
Interface: Defining an interface, differences between classes and interfaces, implementing interface, variables in
interface and extending interfaces
Nested–Inner Class & Anonymous Classes–Generic Class Types
1. Write a Java program for creating one base class for student personal details and inherit those details
into the sub class of student Educational details to display complete student information.
2. Write a Java program that illustrates runtime polymorphism.
3. Write a Java program to create a package which has classes and methods to read Student admission
details.
12+6 Hours
Unit III
Exception Handling & Multithreading
Exception handling: Concepts and benefits of exception handling, exception hierarchy, usage of try, catch,
throw, throws and finally, built-in and User Defined Exceptions
Multithreading: Definition thread, thread life cycle, creating threads, synchronizing threads
Control Flow in Exceptions– JVM reaction to Exceptions– Inter Communication of Threads– Critical Factor in
Thread–Deadloc
76
1. Write a Java program to define and handle User Defined Exceptions (make use of throw - throws).
2. Introduction to Eclipse Environment
11+6 Hours
Unit IV
Applets & Event Handling
Applets: Concepts of Applets, differences between applets and applications, life cycle of an applet, types of
applets, creating applets
Event Handling: Events, Delegation event model, handling mouse and keyboard events, Compare basic AWT
components with swing components, user interface components(Swings)-JLabel, JButton, JText components
More user interface components-JCanvas, JScrollBar, JCheckBox, JChoice, JListsPanel–JScrollPane, JDialog,
JMenuBar, Layout managers.
Adapter classes, inner classes, Anonymous Inner classes
1. Write a Java program for handling mouse events
2. Write a Java Program to design a Job Application/ Student Admission Form and store the values in a
file
12+9 Hours
Total:45+30=75 Hours
Textbook (s)
1.H. Schildt, Java: The complete reference, 7th Ed., TMH, 2016
2.T. A. Budd, An Introduction to Object–Oriented Programming, 3rd Ed., Addison Wesley Longman,
2012
Reference(s)
1. Dietal & Dietal, Java: How to Program, 8th Ed., PHI, 2010
2. E. Balaguruswamy, Programming with Java A Primer, 4 th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill Companies, 2009
3. C. S. Horstmann and G. Cornell, Core Java, Vol 1. Fundamentals, 7 th Ed., Pearson Education, 2014
4. C. Horstmann, BIG JAVA Compatible with Java 5 & 6, 3 rd Ed., Wiley Publishers, 2008
Sample Question(s)
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Lab Examination (%)
Remember 25 35 --
Understand 45 35 --
Apply 30 30 40
Analyze --- --- 20
Evaluate --- --- 40
Create --- --- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List out 6 different java buzz words
2. List the three OOP principles
3. Define Inheritance
4. List the 5 keywords used in exception handling
Understand
1. Summarize the OOP principles
2. Illustrate the procedure for creating a user defined package
3. Interpret the Thread Life cycle
4. Interpret the Applet Life cycle
5. Define Encapsulation
Apply
1. Implement a java program that read an integer between 0 and 1000 and adds all the digits in the
integer
2. Implement an abstract base class shape with two members base and height, a member function for
initialization and a function to compute area ( ). Derive two specific classes Triangle and
Rectangle which override the function area ( ). Use these classes in a main function and display the
area of a triangle and a rectangle.
77
3. Demonstrate an applet that receives two numerical values as input from the user and then displays
the sum of these numbers on the screen
4. Given are two one dimensional arrays A and B which are sorted in ascending order. Develop a
program to merge them into a single sorted array C that contains every item from arrays A and B,
in ascending order
5. Implement a Java program for creating one base class for student personal details and inherit those
details into the sub class of student Educational details to display complete student information
Analyze
1. Compare and Contrast between procedure oriented and object oriented programming
2. Analyze the concurrent programming using threads
3. Differentiate method overloading and method overriding
4. Differentiate sleep and suspend
5. Analyze platform independency of java with the help of JVM
Evaluate
1. Judge whether AWT or Swings is better for internet programming
2. Asses the performance of threads
3. Determine the importance of run time polymorphism
4. Defend why pointer were removed in JAVA
5. Judge why do you java to develop a web based application
78
16EE502 Power Electronics

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the operation of various power semiconductor devices.
2. Outline the control and protection methods for power semiconductor devices.
3. Analyze the performance of phase controlled rectifiers for various loads.
4. Demonstrate the operation of AC-AC converters.
5. Analyze the performance of DC-DC converters.
6. Outline the performance of inverters.
COs – POs Mapping

1 3 2 1 1
2 3 2 1 1
3 3 3 2 2
4 3 3 2 2
5 3 3 2 2
6 3 3 2 2
Unit I
Power Semiconductor Devices, Turn On & Off Methods
Thyristors – Silicon Controlled ectifiers (SC ’s) – BJT – Power MOSFET – Power IGBT and their
characteristics and other thyristors – Basic theory of operation of SCR – Static characteristics – Turn on and turn
off methods- Dynamic characteristics of SCR - Turn on and Turn off times. Two transistor analogy, SCR firing
circuits -Series and parallel connections of SC ’s – Snubber circuit details, Line Commutation and Forced
Commutation circuits.
Energy, Global Warming and Impact of Power Electronics in the Present Century
12 + 5 Hours
Unit II
Single Phase Half & Full Controlled Converters
Single phase Line commutated converters– Half wave controlled converters with Resistive, RL loads and RLE
load– Derivation of average load voltage and current, Full wave controlled converters- Midpoint and Bridge
connection (fully and half controlled) with Resistive, RL and RLE loads– Derivation of average load voltage
and current – Line commutated inverters.
Challenges of the Current Energy Scenario: The Power Electronics Contribution
10 + 3 Hours
Unit III
Three Phase Line Commutated Converters and AC –AC Converters
Three phase converters – Three pulse and six pulse converters – Midpoint and bridge connections average load
voltage With R and RL loads – Effect of Source inductance–Dual converters.
AC voltage controllers – Single phase two SC ’s in anti-parallel and with TRIAC-derivation of RMS load
voltage, Cyclo converters – Single phase midpoint and Bridge configuration.
Three phase AC voltage controller
12 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Choppers & Inverters
Choppers – Basic chopper operation - Derivation of average load voltage -Time ratio control and Current limit
control strategies– Step up Chopper –average load voltage expression.
Inverters – Single phase bridge inverter- Pulse width modulation techniques-Three phase inverter operation with
180 and 120 degree mode of operation.
Harmonic Analysis in single phase PWM inverters and Power Converters for Wind Turbines
11 + 3 Hours
Total: 45 + 15=60 Hours
Text Book (s)

1. M. H. Rashid, Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2009.
2. P.S. Bhimbra, Power electronics, Khanna Publishers, 4th Edition, 2012.
79
Reference(s)
1. Vedam Subramanyam, Power Electronics, New Age International Pvt. Limited, 1st Edition, 2015.
2. M.D. Singh & K.B. Kanchandhani, Power Electronics, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2008.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 20 10 ---
Apply 20 20 60
Analyze 20 20 40
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define latching current
2. Define holding current
3. List the advantages of dc-ac converter
4. List the advantages of inverter
5. Define duty ratio
Understand
1. Explain static VI characteristics of an SCR
2. Explain the differences between series and parallel operation of SCRs
3. Outline the advantages of snubber circuit
4. Compare the performance of the converter when it is connected with R, RL loads
5. Classify the different power converters based on input and output supply
6. Explain the operation of the single phase ac voltage controller
Apply
1. Develop a single phase full converter for PMDC motor load
2. Identify a suitable converter for a single phase induction motor for variable speed application
3. Compute the RMS value of the out voltage for a single phase full converter
4. Assess the need of protection arrangement for an SCR
5. Compute the snubber circuit values for protection of an SCR
6. Assess the importance of PWM technique for an inverter
Analyze
1. Compare the performance of single phase full converter and half –wave converters
2. Organize the commutation techniques based on its circuit arrangement
3. Compare the output voltage of three phase full converter and three phase semi converter for firing
angle variation
33
Assignment Test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course
80
16EE503 Power Transmission and Distribution

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the working of cables and insulators.
2. Analyze the parameters of overhead line conductors for various configurations.
3. Outline the performance of short, medium and long transmission lines.
4. Develop mechanical design parameters for transmission lines.
5. Analyze power system transients.
6. Summarize the operation of various distribution systems.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PO13

1 3 2 1
2 3 2 3
3 3 2 1
4 2 3 3
5 2 3 3
6 2 3 1
Unit I
Transmission line parameters, cables and insulators
Transmission line components, Types of conductors, GMR & GMD, Numerical problems on resistance
inductance and capacitance calculations, Cables: Types of Cables, Construction, Types of insulating materials,
Numerical problems on insulation resistance, stress insulation, capacitance of single and three core belted
cables, Grading of Cables-Capacitance grading, Inter-sheath Grading.
Insulators: Types of Insulators, String efficiency and methods for improvement, voltage distribution, calculation
of string efficiency, Capacitance grading and Static Shielding.
Testing of cables and insulators.
12+5 Hours
Unit II
Performance of transmission lines
Classification of Transmission Lines and their model representations - Nominal-T, Nominal-π methods, and A,
B, C, D Constants for symmetrical & Asymmetrical Networks, Regulation and efficiency of transmission lines.
Long Transmission Lines, evaluation of A,B,C,D Constants, Interpretation of the Long Line Equations, Surge
Impedance and SIL of Long Lines Various Factors Governing the Performance of Transmission line. Skin,
Proximity and Ferranti effects - Charging Current, Corona - Description of the phenomenon, critical voltages
and power loss.
Factors affecting corona
10+3 Hours
Unit III
Mechanical Design, Transients & voltage control
Sag and Tension calculations with equal and unequal heights of towers, effect of Wind and Ice on weight of
conductor.
Types of System Transients, Travelling or Propagation of Surges - Wave Length and Velocity of Propagation of
Waves, Attenuation, Distortion, Reflection and Refraction Coefficients.
Dependency of Voltage on Reactive Power flow.-
Equipment for voltage control, effect of series capacitor and shunt in voltage control, effect of AVB/AVR, line
drop compensation.
Reflected and Refracted Waves
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Distribution systems and Power factor correction
Distribution systems-components, connection schemes, classification and comparison. Voltage drop calculations
for DC and AC distributors (all combinations)
Classification of substations, Bus bar arrangements, optimal location of substation, service area within primary
feeders, Voltage drop and power-loss calculations of hexagonally shaped and square shaped area of distribution
substation, Gas insulated substations (GIS) – Comparison of Air and Gas insulated substations
81
Calculation of Power factor correction, effect of shunt capacitors and series capacitor, capacitor allocation -
Economic justification - Procedure to determine the best capacitor location, most economical Power Factor.
Substation Layout
12+4 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. William D Stevenson, Elements of Power system Analysis, Mc GrawHill Companies, 3rd edition,2016
2. C.L. Wadhwa, Electrical Power Systems, New Age International (P) Limited, 2008.
3. Turan Gonen, Electric Power Distribution system, Engineering, Mc Graw-hill Book Company, 4th
edition,2016.
Reference(s)
1. John J Grainger, William D Stevenson, Power system Analysis, TMC Companies, 4th edition, 2016
2. Hadi Saadat, Power System Analysis, TMH Edition, 3rd edition,2010.
3. S.Sivanagaraju, V.Sankar, Electrical Power Distribution and Automation, Dhanpat Rai & Co, 2008.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 20 20 ---
Apply 20 20 60
Analyze 20 20 40
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List different types of conductors
2. Write sag expression in a power conductor when Strung between two supports at equal heights
3. Define Ferranti effect
4. Label the sag expression in a power conductor when strung between two supports at unequal heights
5. Write the formula of string efficiency
6. Write any two types of insulating materials used in the line insulators
7. Define distributor
8. Define power factor
Understand
1. Proximity effect is dominant in Cables or overhead transmission lines? Justify your answer.
2. Illustrate the internal flux linkages of a Single Phase 2-wire transmission line
3. Identify the parameters are being neglected in short transmission line and justify your answer
4. Summarize A, B, C, D constants of a short transmission Line
5. Contrast transmission lines based on its length
6. Compare AIS and GIS.
Apply
1. Compute the inductance of double circuit three phase overhead line as shown in figure and conductor
radius is 1.5 cm and line is transposed find the inductance per phase per kilometer
2. Demonstrate the effects of travelling wave when a long transmission line is terminated with a
resistance.
3. Solve the equation for capacitance of a single phase 2-wire transmission line
4. Model the sending end voltage and current of a long transmission line using rigorous method.
5. Solve the capacitance per phase for following three system and each conductor having same radius 0.8
cm
34
82
1.6
6m
m
1.
1.6m
6. Derive an expression for most economical p.f. for constant KW load and constant KVA type loads.
Analyze
1. Organize the equation for capacitance of a three phase Overhead line for symmetrical spacing of
conductors
2. Identify the capacitance calculation (for phase) of a three core cable using appropriate measurements
3. Examine the A, B, C, D constants for T-network of a medium transmission line
4. A three phase 50 Hz overhead transmission line has the following data per phase, R esistance = 9.6
ohms , Inductance =0.097 mH, Capacitance=0.765 μF, If the line supplied the balanced load of 24000
kVA at 0.8 pf lagging, 66 kV. Analyze the performance of above transmission network.
5. A 100 km, 3-phase, 50Hz transmission line delivering 20 MW at a p.f of 0.8 lagging and 66 V to a
balanced load. The conductors are made up of copper and having resistance of 0.2 m/km, inductance
of 35.1 ohm and Capacitance of 0.9954 μF per phase. Now model the transmission line using
(i) Nominal –T (ii) Nominal-π Networks.
6. A 2-wire d.c. distributor cable AB is 2 km long and supplies loads of 100A, 150A,200A and 50A
situated 500 m, 1000 m, 1600 m and 2000 m from the feeding point A. Each conductor has a
resistance of 0·01 Ω per 1000 m. Calculate the p.d. at each load point if a p.d. of 300 V is maintained
at point A.
83
16EE504 Signals and Systems Theory

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Classify the signals and perform the basic operations

2. Analyze linear time invariant systems
3. Make use of various transform techniques for analyzing signals and systems
4. Find correlation, auto-correlation and power spectral density for signals
5. Identify the characteristics of noise signals
6. Summarize the concepts of Weiner and Kalman filters
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PO13

1 3 2 3
2 2 3 3
3 3 2 3
4 2 1 3
5 3 2 3
6 3 2 3
Unit I
Introduction: Signal analysis
Mathematical Description and Analysis of Signals
Continuous-Time Signal Functions, Discrete-Time Signal Functions, Signal Energy and Power, System
characteristics, Convolution sum, Convolution integral and their evaluation, analysis of LTI Systems based on
convolution and differential equations.
Laplace Transform
The Laplace transforms and its properties, Inverse Laplace transform, Solutions of differential equations with
initial conditions.
Introduction to Multidimensional real time signals
9+3 Hours
Unit II
Fourier series and Fourier transforms
Introduction, Trigonometric form of Fourier series, Exponential form of Fourier series, Wave symmetry, Fourier
integrals and transforms, Fourier transform of a periodic function , Properties of Fourier Transform, Parseval’s
theorem , Fourier transform of some common signals, Fourier transform relationship with Laplace Transform,
Application in Circuit Analysis.
Introduction to Short-time Fourier Transforms and Hilbert Transform.
14+4 Hours
Unit III
Random Signals and processes in Linear System
Introduction to random signals, random process and their statistics, and Gaussian random process. Correlations
and power spectral densities – autocorrelation, cross-correlation, power spectral density or power spectrum,
cross-power spectral densities. White noise, band-limited white noise, colour noise. Response of a linear system
to random inputs
10+4 Hours
Unit IV
Linear filters
Minimum mean square error, weighted least squares estimation, recursive least square estimation. Introduction
to Weiner filters, Kalman filters – derivation of continuous Kalman fitler, condition number, square-root
Kalman filter.
12+4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. V. Oppenheim, A. S. Willsky and S. H. Nawab, Signals and Systems, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2014
2. Simon, D, Optimal state estimation: Kalman, H-infinity and nonlinear approaches, John Wiley &
Sons, 1st Edition, 2006.
84
3. Hsu, H.P, Signals and Systems, Schaum’s Outline Series, 1995.
Reference (s)
1. Hsu, H.P, Signals and Systems, Schaum’s Outline Series, 1995.
2. Michel J. Robert, Fundamentals of Signals and Systems, MGH International Edition, 2008.
3. L. Philips, J.M.Parr and Eve A.Riskin, Signals, Systems and Transforms, 3rd Edition, Pearson
education, 2004.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 20 35 ---
Apply 30 30 60
Analyze 20 --- 40
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define impulse function.
2. List out any two properties of Fourier transform.
3. What do you mean by wave symmetry?
4. Define autocorrelation.
5. Define a random signal.
6. List out any types of state estimation methods.
Understand
1. Compare Fourier series and Fourier transform.
2. Illustrate the relationship between exponential Fourier series and trigonometric Fourier series.
3. Compare Autocorrelation and cross correlation function.
4. Show that the power spectral density of a bandlimited white noise is constant over a range of
frequency.
5. Explain the properties of Fourier Transform.
6. Explain the process of state estimation using Kalman filter.
Apply
1. Implement trigonometric Fourier series for the following periodic signal and obtain Fourier series
components
2. Find the Fourier transform to the rectangular pulse shown below and draw the magnitude and phase
spectrum
3. Find out the autocorrelation function of e-atu(t)

4. Find out the Fourier transform of normalized Gaussian pulse.
Analyze
35
85
1. Classify various type of transforms.

2. Outline the properties of Laplace transform.
3. Examine the following signals for causality and time invariance
(i) y(t) = tx(t) (ii) y(t) = x(-t)
4. Justify whether the following signal is energy signal or power signal?.
5. Functions with half-wave symmetry have only odd harmonics? Justify the statement
Evaluate
1. Determine the output y(t) for a continuous time LTI system whose impulse response h(t) and the input
x(t) are given by
h(t) = e-at u(t)
x(t) = e-at u(-t) for a>0
2. Determine the Fourier transform of exponentially damped sinusoidal signal.
3. Distinguish the Weiner and Kalman filters.
4. Determine bilateral inverse Laplace transform of a function for ROCs of
(i) Re(s)> 3 (ii)Re(s) < -1 (iii)-1 < Re(s) < 3
5. Determine the autocorrelation of Gaussian pulse.
Create
1. Estimate a random constant using the Kalman filter.
2. Generate the system function for the input x(t)= u(t) to get the desired output e -t u(t).
3. The impulse response of a systems is (e-2t+e-t) u(t). Derive the expression for the excitation to produce
an output of t. e-2tu(t).
86
16EE505 Synchronous & Special Machines

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the construction & working of synchronous machine
2. Apply various regulation methods to analyze the performance of synchronous machine
3. Illustrate synchronization of a synchronous machine connected to an infinite bus
4. Make use of starting methods of synchronous motors
5. Analyze the performance of synchronous motor for various operating modes
6. Outline the operating principles of various special electrical machine
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO 2 PO 3 PO14
1 3 1 1
2 2 3 2
3 2 3 2
4 3 2 1
5 1 3 2
6 3 2 1
Unit I
Synchronous Generators
Constructional features of wound rotor and salient pole machines – Armature windings – Integral slot and
fractional slot windings, Distributed and concentrated windings, Distribution, pitch and winding factors E.M.F
equation, Harmonics in generated e.m.f. – suppression of harmonics, armature reaction, synchronous
impedance, Phasor diagram – load characteristics.
Excitation system, methods of ventilation, equivalent circuit of alternator, phasor diagrams of loaded alternator
for different power factor loads.
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Regulation & Parallel Operation of Synchronous Generators
Regulation by synchronous impedance method, M.M.F. method, Z.P.F. method, salient pole alternators – two
reaction analysis-Determination of Xd and Xq (Slip test), Phasor diagram– Regulation of salient pole alternator.
Synchronization of alternators with infinite bus, Parallel operation and load sharing - Effect of change of
excitation.
Phasor diagram analysis of salient pole synchronous machines, synchronizing power and torque, Effect of
change in mechanical power input.
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Synchronous Motors
Principle of operation, Phasor diagram, methods of starting, Variation of current and power factor with
excitation, Power and torque characteristics, losses and efficiency calculations, synchronous condenser, Power
factor improvement, hunting and its suppression.
Production of rotating magnetic field, constant excitation circle and power circle, comparison of synchronous
and induction motors.
13+4 Hours
Unit IV
Special Machines
Principle, Construction & Application of Universal motor, Reluctance motor, Permanent Magnet Synchronous
motor, BLDC Motor, Stepper motor, Switched reluctance motor, induction generator and its types
Principle & performance of A.C. Series motor, Hysteresis motor.
9+3 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. P.S. Bimbra, Electrical Machines, Khanna Publishers, 7th edition, 2003.
2. I.J. Nagrath & D.P. Kothari, Electric Machines, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers, 3rd edition, 2014.
87
Reference (s)
1. A.E. Fitzgerald, C.Kingsley and S.Umans, Electric machinery, Mc Graw Hill companies, 6th edition,
2012
2. Stephen J.Chapman, Electric Machinery Fundamentals, Tata Mc Graw-Hill Publishers, 4th edition,
2012.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 40 20 ---
Apply 20 30 60
Analyze --- 20 40
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Find difference between ac and dc generator?
2. Define potier reactance
3. Define regulation of an alternator
4. List the starting methods of synchronous motor
5. Demonstrate the characteristics of hysteresis motor
Understand
1. Relate the DC generator with AC Generator
2. Show the generalized expression for an induced emf per phase in three phase alternator when coils are
not full pitch and concentrated in one slot
3. Illustrate the expression of a output equation of Alternator
4. Outline the potier-triangle method of determining the voltage regulation of an alternator
5. Explain the effect of change in mechanical input on the parallel operation of alternators
6. Explain the significance of back emf in synchronous motor
Apply
1. Identify type of Synchronous generators are used in Hydro-electric plants
2. Develop the formula for distribution factor
3. Develop the equivalent circuit of synchronous generator
4. Three-phase star-connected, 50 Hz, alternator has direct-axis synchronous reac tance of 0.7 pu and
quadrature-axis synchronous reactance of 0.5 p.u. If the generator delivers kVA at rated voltage at full-
load and 0.8 power factor lagging, find the percentage regulation. Armature resistance 0.017 p.u.
Analyze
1. Analyze the the direction of armature reaction flux when a three-phase alternator is subjected to the
following loads (i) purely resistive load, (ii) reactive load, (iii) purely inductive load and (iv) purely
capacitive load?ntegrate Faraday's law in Maxwell's equation
2. Examine the factors does the power factor of an alternator depend
3. Classify different types of single phase Induction Motors.
4. Compare two different theories with which principle of 1-phase induction motors are explained.
36
88
16EE001 Electrical Machine Design

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Classify the electrical materials as per IS standards
2. Outline the basic design concepts of DC machines and transformers based on magnetic, thermal and
electric loadings
3. Illustrate the various cooling methods for transformers
4. Examine the design concepts of stator of induction machines
5. Examine the design concepts of rotor of induction machines
6. Analyse the design concepts of stator and rotor of synchronous machines
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3

1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Introduction & DC Machines
Major considerations in Electrical Machine Design, Electrical Engineering Materials according to IS standards,
Review of basic principles. DC Machines - Constructional details, output equation, choice of specific electric
and magnetic loadings-separation of D and L for rotating machines, estimation of number of conductors/turns-
coils-armature slots-conductor dimension-slot dimension. Choice of number of poles, length of air gap.
Various cooling techniques
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Transformers
Output equation, kVA output for single and three phase transformers, Window space factor, Overall dimensions,
Transformer windings-coil design, determination of number of turns and length of mean turn of winding,
leakage reactance of windings, design of Tank and cooling tubes, methods of cooling of transformers.
Choice of specific electric and magnetic loadings according to IS 1180-1989 & IS 2026-2011.
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Induction Motors
Output equation of Induction motor, Main dimensions, design of stator winding and slots, Length of air gap,
rules for selecting rotor slots of squirrel cage machines, design of rotor bars & slots, design of end rings, design
of wound rotor.
Choice of specific electric and magnetic loadings according to IS 325-1996.
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Synchronous Machines
Output equations, Main dimensions, Short circuit ratio, Length of air gap, shape of pole face, Armature design,
length of mean turn, design of rotor, Design of damper winding, Design of field winding, Design of turbo
alternators – Rotor design.
Choice of specific electric and magnetic loadings
12+4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Sawhney. A.K., A. Chakrabarti, A Course in Electrical Machine Design, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New
Delhi, 6th edition, 2014.
2. Sen. S.K., Principles of Electrical Machine Designs with Computer Programmes, Oxford and IBH
Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., 2nd edition, 2011.
89
3. A. Nagoor Kani, A Simplified Text in Electrical Machine Design, RBA Publications, 2nd edition, 2013.
Reference (s)
1. M.G. Say, Alternating Current Machines, Pitman Publishing Ltd., 4th edition, 2012.
2. Mittle V.N., Mittle A, Design of Electrical Machines, Standard Publications and Distributors, New
Delhi, 2012.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 20 20 ---
Apply 40 20 50
Analyze 20 40 50
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define rating of Electrical machine
2. Define specific magnetic loading
3. List the parts of electromagnetic rotating machines
4. Define critical speed
5. List the types of synchronous machines.
Understand
1. Explain different types of magnetic materials
2. Illustrate total magnetic loading
3. Formulate the expression for output equation of a DC machines
4. Indicate different cooling methods used for dry type transformer
5. Represent the advantages of using open slots
Apply
1. Execute the applications of insulating materials
2. Demonstrate unbalanced magnetic pull
3. Develop the relationship between the number of commutator segments and number of armature coils in
DC generator
4. Demonstrate the use of end rings
5. Use of damper winding in synchronous machine
Analyze
1. Classify the electrical engineering materials
2. Conclude why circular coils are preferred in transformers
3. Differentiate real and apparent flux density
4. Contrast shell type and core type transformer
37
90
16EE002 Automotive Electrical Engineering

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify automotive wiring harness and circuits
2. Outline the working of automotive lighting systems and accessories
3. Compare and contrast between charging, starting & ignition system of auto motives
4. Interpret the working of various sensors and actuators used in auto motives
5. Outline the principles of vehicle electronic control
6. Summarize vehicle security systems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3

1 3 1
2 3 2
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 3 3
6 2 3
Unit I
Automotive electrical systems
Automotive electricity, wiring harness, circuit diagrams and symbols, 12/24/42 volt system, positive earth and
negative earth, earth return and insulated return systems, Multiplexed wiring systems, Electromagnetic
compatibility & interference.
Vehicle lighting System: Head, Indicator, Fog lamps, Brake lights, Gas discharge, LED lighting, Dash board
Indicators: Fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge, Temperature gauges, Speedometer, Warning Lights, Electric horn,
Horn relay, Wind shield wipers and Power window.
Generation, storage & distribution systems
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Charging, Starting & Ignition System
Magnetos Constant current & voltage systems, Semiconductor type regulator, Alternator with regulator, starting
system with layout, selection of motor, matching battery, Drive mechanisms, Ignition coil, Distributor, Cam
angle & Contact angle gap, Advance mechanisms, Ballast Resistance, Limitations of coil ignition,
Transistorized Ignition systems, electronic ignition system, Spark plugs, types, construction
Current & voltage regulator
10+5 Hours
Unit III
Automotive Sensors & Actuators
Working principle of sensors, Types of sensors, Airflow rate sensor, angular position sensor, Throttle angle
sensor, MAP sensors, sensors feedback control, Principle of actuator, Types of actuators, engine control
actuators, Solenoid actuators, motorized actuators.
Temperature sensor
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Vehicle Management System
ABS system with layout and working, Electronic control of suspension – Damping control, Electric power
steering, Supplementary Restraint System of air bag system , crash sensor, seat belts, Cruise control, Vehicle
security systems alarms, Collision avoidance, Radar warning system, Introduction to Global Positioning
Systems.
Vehicle tracking system
12+3 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. P. L. Kohli, Automotive Electrical Equipment’s, Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, 1983.
91
2. Tom Denton, Automobile Electrical & Electronic Systems, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann

Publishers, 3rd edition, 2013.
Reference (s)
1. Young, A.P. and Griffith, S.L, Automobile Electrical Equipment’s, ELBS & New Press, 2011.
2. Judge A.W “Modern Electrical Equipment of Automobiles”, Chapman & Hall, London, 2012.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 50 40 ---
Apply 10 20 100
Analyze --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Show a wiring and layout diagram of 4 wheeler vehicle
2. State ballast resistance
3. List various types of horns
4. Label the requirement of charging system in automobiles
5. Define Cam angle
Understand
1. Explain with neat sketch Battery Ignition System with its advantages
2. Explain Day light regulating system and Central Locking system
3. Explain with the help of neat sketch the construction details of a Spark Plug
4. Explain the working of cut out relay, voltage regulator and current regulator
5. Explain the working of odometer and tachometer
Apply
1. Differentiate between coil and electronic ignition systems.
2. Develop a feedback control strategy for sensors.
3. Discuss the application of GPS in vehicle security.
38
92
16EE003 Advanced Control Systems

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply z-transforms and block-diagram reduction techniques to discrete time systems

2. Asses the pulse transfer function of a discrete time system.
3. Assess controllability, observability and stability of a given system.
4. Analyze different types of non-linearities
5. Analyze non-linear systems using describing function and phase plane analysis.
6. Design full order and reduced order observers
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3

1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 3
5 2 3
6 2 3
Unit – I
Fundamentals of Digital control systems and Z-transforms
Fundamentals of Digital Control System: Block diagram of digital control system, Advantages, disadvantages
and applications of digital control system, Sampling operations, sampling theorem, Aliasing effect, Zero order
hold.
Z–Transforms: Introduction, Properties and theorems of Z-transforms, Inverse Z-transforms, Z-Transform
method for solving difference equations, Pulse transfer function, block diagram analysis of sampled-
data systems, Pulse transfer function of ZOH.
Examples of digital control systems
12 + 4 Hours
Unit – II
Stability Analysis
Mapping between s-plane and the z-plane, Stability Analysis of closed loop systems in the z-plane- Bilinear
Transformation, Jury stability test, Lyapunov Stability
Concepts of Controllability and Observability, Tests for controllability and Observability, Duality between
controllability and observability, Effect of Pole-zero Cancellation in Transfer Function.
Steady state error analysis of digital control system
10 + 3 Hours
Unit – III
Non-linear Systems
Features of linear and non-linear systems-Common physical non-linearities–Methods of linearizing non-linear
systems-Concept of phase portraits–Singular points–Limit cycles–Construction of phase portraits–Phase plane
analysis of linear and non-linear systems–Isocline method. Derivation of describing functions for common
nonlinearities.
Describing function analysis of non-linear systems
11 + 4 Hours
Unit – IV
State feedback Controllers and Observers
Design of state feedback controller through pole placement- Ackerman’s formula, State Observers – Full order
and Reduced order observers.
Effect of dead-beat response
12 + 4 Hours
Text book (s)
1. K. Ogata, Discrete-Time Control Systems , PHI Learning, 2nd edition, 2008.
93
2. Katsuhiko Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 5th ed., 2011.
Reference (s)
1. B.C. Kuo, Digital Control Systems, Oxford University Press, 2nd edition, 2007.
2. M. Gopal, Modern control system theory, New Age International Publishers, 4th ed., 1993.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 20 20 ---
Apply 30 40 60
Analyze --- --- 40
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define discrete time control system
2. List different types of discrete time systems
3. State Sampling theorem
4. List the properties of state transition matrix
5. Define stability in the sense of Lyapunov
Understand
1. Explain the properties of Z-transform.
2. Formulate the pulse transfer function for ZOH
3. Represent the necessary and sufficient conditions for pole placement
4. Represent the conditions for controllability and observability
Apply
1. Implement pole placement design of continuous time system with a suitable example
2. Demonstrate Jury’s stability test for a given discrete time system
3. Compute the impulse response of sampled data system to step and ramp inputs.
Analyze
1. Examine whether the discrete data system
x(k  1)  Ax(k )  Bu(k ), y(k )  Cx(k )
0  1 1 0  1 0
Where A  , B  ,C    Is (i) State controllable (iii) Observable
1  1 0  1 0 1 
Y ( z) z  0 .2
2. Consider the following pulse transfer function,  . Inspect this system is
U ( z ) ( z  0.8)( z  0.2)
completely state controllable or not?
3. Contrast briefly about simple degeneracy and full degeneracy
4. A discrete system is described by the difference equation
y (k  2)  3 y (k  1)  2 y (k )  r (k ), y (0)  y (1)  0, T  1Sec.
Identify a state variable model for the system?
39
94
16EE507 AC Machines Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Examine performance of alternators using various methods
2. Examine the efficiencies of single phase transformer
3. Inspect the parameters of single phase transformer
4. Examine the efficiencies of induction motors
5. Analyze the performance of synchronous motors
6. Assess direct and quadrature axes’ reactance for a given synchronous machine
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
1. Regulation of a three -phase alternator by synchronous impedance method & m.m.f. method
2. No-load & Blocked rotor tests on three phase Induction motor
3. Brake test on three phase Induction Motor
4. O.C. & S.C. Tests on Single phase Transformer
5. Separation of core losses of a single phase transformer
6. Sumpner’s test on a pair of single phase transformers
7. Equivalent Circuit of a single phase induction motor
8. Regulation of three-phase alternator by Z.P.F. method
9. Synchronization of three phase alternator to the Bus bars
10. V and Inverted V curves of a three-phase synchronous motor
11. Determination of Xd and Xq of a salient pole synchronous machine
12. Parallel operation of Single phase Transformers
List of Mini-Projects40
1. Estimation of heat developed by primary and secondary windings of a transformer
2. Determination of regulation of synchronous machine by using ASA method
3. Determination of sequence impedances of salient pole synchronous machine
4. Fault analysis of Alternator
5. Synchronization of alternator by using dark & bright lamp method
6. Determination of All day efficiency of transformer
7. Design and development of equivalent circuit of an auto transformer
8. Comparison of volume of copper in two winding transformer and auto transformer
9. Design and development of equivalent circuit of an auto transformer by using MATLAB
10. Maintenance of power transformer
11. Variation in the active and reactive power of an alternator connected to an infinite bus by (a) Varying
excitation, (b) varying Mechanical-power input
12. Determine the insulation resistance of a transformer at no load and at full load condition

1. S.G.Tarnekar, P.K.Kharbanda, S.B.Bodkhe, S.D.Nayak,“laboratory courses in Electrical Engineering”
S.Chand & company limited, 2009
2. Bimbhra P.S., “Electrical Machines”, 7th edition, Khanna Publishers, 2006.
40
95
16EEI02 Air field Ground Lighting System

(Design and delivered by GMR Air-ports Ltd., Hyderabad)
1001
Course Outcomes
1. Classify basics of Light Source

2. Demonstrate various concepts of Aeronautical Ground Lighting System & their characteristics
3. Apply appropriate design for air field ground lighting system
4. Illustrate & select appropriate installation procedure of various lighting schemes
5. Outline mechanical design aspects of air field ground lighting system
6. Outline various backup systems
Aeronautical Ground Lighting System Introduction-Runway Approach Lights, Threshold Lights, Edge
Lights, Centre Line Lights, Turn Pad Lights, Guard Lights, Precision Approach Path Indicator, Taxiway Centre
Line Lights, Edge Lights, Rapid Exit Taxiway Lights, Stop-way Lights, Stop Bars, Aerodrome Beacon, PAPI,
Control aids for lighting system, landing ‘T’, wind cone
Installation Procedure of various lighting schemes
Trouble shoot chart
Backup system
15 Hours
Reference (s)
1. AGL Handbook Revision 0 -15th April 2010
2. Annex 14 Volume I [Aerodrome Design and operations]
3. Aerodrome Design Manual-part 4 [Visual Aids], part 5 [Electrical Systems]
4. Aerodrome Design and Maintenance Manual
5. http:\\www.icao.org
6. http:\\www.dgca.nic.in
96
16ESX2A Employability Skills III

0200
Soft Skills
Introduction to Campus Placements: Stages of Campus Placement, Skills assessed in Campus Placements &
How to get ready? ; Building Vocabulary: Through reading Articles, Exploring New Words, Meanings and the
usage with examples; Motivational Talks on Positive Thinking: Beliefs, Thoughts, Actions, Habits & Results
(Success) ; Resume Preparation: Resume? Templates? Mistakes to be avoided in a Resume, Steps to be followed
in preparing it.(with examples); Group Discussions (Recap): GD? Stages of a GD, Skills assessed in a GD,
Blunders to be avoided, How to excel in a GD? (through Practice Sessions); Psychometric Tests: Definition,
Types of Psychometric Tests: Numerical Computation, Data Interpretation, Verbal Comprehension, Verbal
Critical Reasoning and Personality Questionnaires ; Exercises related to Communication: JAMs, Case Studies,
Video Synthesis, Story Writing, TAT etc.
Verbal reasoning
97
16EE601 Discrete Signal Processing

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Classify Discrete time signals and systems

2. Relate discrete Fourier transform on time domain signals
3. Contrast the signals in Time and Frequency domain through its respective tools
4. Build the FIR and IIR digital filters with given specifications
5. Examine the frequency response characteristics of FIR and IIR digital filters
6. Apply adaptive filters for various circuits or systems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO 3 PO13 PO 14

1 3 2 2 2
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2
4 2 2 3 3
5 3 2 3 3
6 3 2 2 3
Unit I
Introduction to Discrete–Time signals and systems
Classification of discrete-time signals and sequences, properties of discrete time signals and systems, difference
equations and their solutions – homogeneous and non-homogeneous equations, Linear and circular convolution,
Sampling theorem and aliasing effect.
Concept of z-transforms, Region of Convergence, properties, Inverse z- transform and its application in solving
the difference equations.
Analog-to-digital conversion and digital-to-analog conversion techniques 11 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Discrete–Time signals in Transform domain
Discrete Fourier Series (DFS), Discrete Fourier transform (DFT), Properties of DF , Fast Fourier transforms
(FFT) – butterfly diagrams - Radix-2 decimation in time, Inverse FFT. Quantization effects in the computation
of the DFT.
Short-time Fourier transform (S-transform) 11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
IIR and FIR Filters
IIR Filters: Properties of linear-phase IIR filters, Butterwoth and Chebyshev filters
FIR Filters: Characteristics of FIR Digital Filters, Gibbs phenomenon, windowing techniques – rectangular,
Hamming, Hanning and Bartlett. Comparison of IIR & FIR filters.
Design of FIR and IIR filters using MATLAB 11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Introduction to Multi-rate Signal Processing
Multi-rate signal processing: Decimation, Interpolation, Sampling rate conversion by a rational factor –
Adaptive Filters: Introduction, Applications of adaptive filtering.
Design of adaptive filters using MATLAB 11 + 4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. John G. Proakis, Dimitris, G.Manolakis ,”Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms, and
Applications”, Pearson Education / PHI, 4th Edition, 2013.
2. Alan V. Oppenheim, onald W. Schafer, “Digital Signal Processing”, PHI, 4th Edition, 2007
Reference (s)
1. San it .Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing”, Tata Mc Graw Hill publishers, 4th Edition, 2013.
98
2. MH Hayes, “Digital Signal Processing, Schaum’s Outlines”, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2nd Edition,2009
3. S. Salivahanan, A. Vallavaraj, “Digital signal processing”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 21st reprint,
2007.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 25 20 ---
Apply 30 40 60
Analyze --- --- 40
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Signal and System
2. State the advantages of DSP
3. Define about Gibb’s phenomena
4. State the need of Multi rate signal processing
5. List four differences between FIR and IIR filters
Understand
1. Identify the following systems for time invariant
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
2. Identify the stability of the given systems
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
3. Illustrate whether the signal x(n)=sin15πn+ sin√2_n is periodic or not
4. Illustrate windowing techniques to design FIR filters
5. Represent y(n)=x(n)+2x(n-1)+3x(n-2)+2y(n-1)+3y(n-2) in direct form-I structure
Apply
1. Realize the system given by the difference equation y(n)= -0.1y(n-1)+0.72y(n-2)+0.7x(n)-0.252x(n-2)
in parallel form.
2. Find the DFT of a sequence x[n] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 4, 3, 2, 1}using DIT algorithm
3. Compute the IDFT of the sequence X[k] = {12, 0, 0, 0, 4, 0, 0, 0} using DIF Algorithm
4. A DSP system is characterized by linear difference equation

with digital input . Find the output response of the
system.Find the transfer function of FIR system
Analyze
1. Resolve analog filter with transfer function (s+0.1)/(s+0.1) 2+9, into a digital IIR filter using bilinear
transformation. The digital filter should have a resonant frequency of ω r = π/4
2. The specification of the desired LPF is
Design a Butterworth IIR digital filter using Impulse invariant transformation technique
0.8  H ( )  0.1 0    0.2
H ( )  0.2 0.32    
3. Compare the frequency response of Linear phase FIR filter
Case(1) impulse response is symmetrical N is odd
Case(2) impulse response is anti symmetrical N is even
41
99
Case(3) impulse response is symmetrical N is even

Case(4) impulse response is anti-symmetrical N is odd
4. Outline the structural realization of linear phase FIR filter for given N
Case(1) h(n) = {3 2 1 2 3} for N=5
Case(2) h(n) = {-3 -2 0 2 3} for N=5
Case(3) h(n) = {3 2 1 1 2 3} for N=6
Case(4) h(n) = {-3 -2 -1 1 2 3} for N=6
5. Compare different windowing techniques
Evaluate
1. Determine the frequency response of linear phase FIR filter when the impulse response is symmetric and
N is even
2. Determine the decimated signal y(n) by a factor three from the input signal x(n)
3. Determine the two folded expanded signal y(n) of the input signal x(n)
Create
1. Derive the transfer function of a low pass filter using rectangular window by taking 9 samples of w(n)
and with a cutoff frequency of 1.2 radians/sec
2. Derive the transfer function of a linear phase HPF with the cutoff of frequency 1.5 rad/sec using
hamming window with N=5
3. Derive the transfer function of a linear phase BPF with the cutoff of frequency 1 to 2 rad/sec using
Blackman window with N=6s
100
16EE602 Electrical Drives

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the speed torque characteristics of different motors and justify their applications.
2. Analyze speed control and braking methods of converter fed drives.
3. Develop speed torque characteristics of chopper dc drives under motoring & braking conditions
4. Summarize the performance of converter fed induction motor from stator side.
5. Analyze the performance of induction motor using slip power recovery scheme.
6. Demonstrate the operation of converter fed synchronous motor drives
COs – POs Mapping

CO PO2 PO3 PO14
1 2 3 2
2 3 1 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 3 2
5 2 3 2
6 3 2 2
Unit I
Control of DC motors by Single Phase & Three Phase Converters
Introduction to Thyristor controlled Drives, Single Phase semi and Fully controlled converters connected to dc
separately excited and dc series motors – continuous current operation – output voltage and current waveforms –
Speed and Torque expressions – Speed – Torque Characteristics.
Three phase semi and fully controlled converters connected to dc separately excited and dc series motors –
output voltage and current waveforms – Speed and Torque expressions – Speed – Torque characteristics.
Speed and Torque characteristics of dc motor, applications of converter fed dc motor.
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Electrical Braking and Chopper Fed Drives
Introduction to Four quadrant operation – Motoring operations, Electric Braking – Plugging, Dynamic and
Regenerative braking operations. Four quadrant operation of DC motors by dual converters –Closed loop
operation of DC motor, Single, Two and four quadrants chopper fed dc separately excited and series excited
motors – Continuous current operation – Output voltage and current wave forms – Speed torque expressions –
speed torque characteristics.
Four quadrant operation of DC motor by chopper, Closed Loop Operation of chopper dc drive.
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Control of Induction Motor from Stator Side
Variable voltage characteristics-Control of Induction Motor by AC Voltage Controllers-speed torque
characteristics. Control of Induction Motor through Stator Frequency-Variable frequency characteristics-
Variable frequency control of induction motor by Voltage source and current source inverters - PWM control –
Comparison of VSI and CSI operations –Speed torque characteristics.
Closed loop operation of induction motor drives.
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Control of Induction Motor from Rotor Side and Synchronous Motors
Static rotor resistance control – Slip power recovery – Static Scherbius drive – Static Kramer Drive –their
performance and speed torque characteristics. Separate control & self-control of synchronous motors.
Introduction to vector control
Advantages & applications of slip power recovery scheme.
12+3 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. G Dubey, “Fundamentals of Electric Drives”, Narosa Publications, 2nd edition, 2001.
2. Vedam Subramanyam,“Electrical Drives-Concepts and Applications”, McGraw Hill Education,2nd
edition, 2011.
101
3. . rishnan, “Electrical drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice Hall of India., 1st Edition,
2007.
Reference (s)
1. B. .Bose, “Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives”, Prentice Hall of India, 1st Edition, 2008.
2. S Pillai, “A First course on Electrical Drives”, New Age International (P) Ltd, 2nd Editon, 2004.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 20 10 ---
Apply 30 40 40
Analyze 30 20 60
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Drive
2. Describe the block diagram of electric drive
3. List different types of braking
4. List any four speed control methods of Induction motor
Understand
1. Explain the operation of fully controlled converter fed DC motor
2. Compare the performance of single phase full converter and half –wave converters
3. Explain the operation of chopper fed DC motor
4. Describe Static Kramer Drive
Apply
1. Develop a single phase full converter for separately excited DC motor
2. Identify a suitable converter for an induction motor for variable speed applications
3. Compute the RMS value of the output voltage for a single phase full converter
4. Develop an equivalent circuit for static rotor resistance method
Analyze
1. Compare the performance of the converter fed DC motor under motoring and braking conditions
2. Examine the regenerative braking of DC series motor
3. Compare the performance of synchronous motor by using self and separate control
42
102
16EE603 Power System Analysis

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the given power system network in per-unit representation
2. Build nodal admittance and impedance matrices for the power system network
3. Make use of load flow studies to evaluate power system networks
4. Construct positive, negative and zero sequence networks for a given system
5. Analyze power system behavior under short circuit analysis
6. Outline the basic concepts of steady state and transient stabilities and their improvement methods
COs – POs Mapping

1 3 1 1 1
2 2 3 1 2
3 2 3 2 3
4 2 3 1 3
5 2 3 1 3
6 2 3 1 2
Unit – I Per-unit Representation, Impedance and Admittance Matrices

Per-unit System representation of a given power system network. Per-unit equivalent reactance diagram,
Formation of Ybus by using singular transformation and direct method
Formation of ZBus: Partial network, Algorithm for modification of ZBus matrix for addition of element in the
following cases: new bus to reference, new bus to old bus, old bus to reference and between two old busses
Modification of ZBus
12+3 Hours
Unit –II Power Flow Studies
Power flow problem – significance, classification of buses, Derivation of Static load flow equations, Load flow
solutions using Gauss Seidel Method, Acceleration Factor, Algorithm. Newton Raphson Method in Rectangular
and Polar Co-Ordinates Form, Algorithm, Derivation of Jacobian Elements, Comparison of different load flow
methods, Decoupled load flow method.
Fast decoupled load flow method.
11+4 Hours
Unit – III Short Circuit Analysis
Per-unit System representation of a given power system network. Per-unit equivalent reactance diagram.
Symmetrical fault Analysis: Short Circuit Current and MVA Calculations, Fault levels, Application of Series
Reactors.
Symmetrical Component Theory: Symmetrical Component Transformation, Positive, Negative and Zero
sequence, Sequence Networks.
Unsymmetrical Fault Analysis: LG, LL, LLG faults without fault impedance.
Unsymmetrical Fault Analysis: LG, LL, LLG faults with fault impedance.
11+4 Hours
Unit –IV Power System Stability Analysis
Classification of power system stability, Power system stability problem-Power angle curve-stability limits,
Derivation of Swing Equation, Analysis of steady state stability, Determination of Transient Stability by Equal
Area Criterion, Application of Equal Area Criterion, Critical Clearing Angle and time.
Methods to improve Stability.
11+4 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. I.J. Nagrath & D.P. othari, “Modern Power System Analysis”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 4th Edition, 2013.
2. C.L. Wadhwa, “Electrical Power Systems”, New Age International Publishers, 7th Edition, 2017.
3. N V amana, “Power System Operation and Control”, Pearson Education India, 2010.
103
Reference(s)
1. John J. Grainger, William D. Stevenson, Gary W. Chang, “Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill,
2016.
2. Hadi Saadat, “Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill, 3rd edition, 2011.
3. M.A. Pai, “Computer Techniques in Power System Analysis”, TMH Publications, 2nd Edition, 2000.
4. O.I. Elgerd, “Electric Energy Systems Theory”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd Edition, 2005.
5. Allen J Wood, Bruce F Wollenberg, Gerald B Sheble, “Power Generation, Operation and Control”,
Wiley India, 3rd Edition, 2013.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 20 20 ---
Apply 50 30 40
Analyze --- 20 40
Evaluate --- --- 20
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define per-unit value.
2. List the advantages of per-unit system.
3. State equal –area criterion
4. List the methods available for formulating bus admittance matrix
5. Define acceleration factor
Understand
1. Explain the necessity of slack bus.
2. Represent the equation for transformation base kV on LT side to HT side of a transformer and vice-
versa.
3. Classify buses in the load flow study
4. Compare different load flow methods
5. Formulate the expression for steady state stability limit in terms of A, B, C, D parameters
Apply
1. Show that a generating plant having N section bus bars each rated at Q kVA with X% reactance,
connected on the tie-bar system through bus bar reactance of B% has a total short circuit kVA on one
Q ( N  1) 
section of   Q
X BN  X 
2. Show that p.u impedance of a transformer referred to either HV or LV side is same
3. A 50Hz, 13.2kV, 30MVA alternator has X1=X2=30% and X0=18% and the neutral is grounded through
a reactor of 0.5 ohm. Determine the initial symmetrical RMS current in the ground reactor when a
double line o ground fault occurs at the generator terminals at the time when the generator voltages was
22kV.
4. Find the expression for fault current for line to line fault with and without fault impedance using
symmetrical components method
5. Find the frequency of oscillation for a synchronizing co-efficient of 0.8, H = 6 and system frequency of
50Hz
Analyze
1. Compare the characteristics of different unsymmetrical faults
2. Transient stability limit is lower than steady state stability limit. Justify
3. Distinguish different load flow method for power system study.
43
104
Evaluate
1. The plant capacity of a generating station consists of two 16MVA generators of reactance 20%
each. These are connected to a common bus bar from which loads are taken through a 10MVA,
11/33kV step-up transformer having 8% reactance. Determine the MVA ratings of the circuit breaker
a. When a symmetrical fault occurs at the LV side of the transformer.
b. When a symmetrical fault occurs at the HV side of the transformer.
2. A three phase circuit breaker has a 15.5kV rated maximum voltage, 9kA rated short circuit current and
a 2.67 rated voltage range factor. Determine
a. The symmetrical interrupting capability at 10 kV and 5kV operating voltages.
b. Can this breaker be safely installed at a three phase bus where the symmetrical fault current is
10kA. The operating voltage is 13.8kV and the (X/R) ratio is 12?
105
16EC602 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the concept of microprocessor and Memory organization

2. Implement basic assembly level programming with 8086 microprocessor
3. Execute interfacing concepts through programming for I/O Devices
4. Differentiate the peripheral interfacing chips for 8086 microprocessor
5. Explain the concept of microcontroller and its addressing modes
6. Implement assembly level programming and interfacing with 8051 microcontroller
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO 3 PO 4 PO5 PO10

1 2 1 1 - - 2
2 3 2 1 2 2 3
3 3 2 2 2 2 3
4 3 3 2 2 2 3
5 2 1 1 - - 2
6 3 2 2 2 3 3
Unit- I
Introduction to Microprocessors
Evolution of Processors, Instruction cycle, Memory Management, Associative Memory, Virtual Memory and
Cache Memory, 8086 Register Organization, Architecture of 8086, Signal Description of 8086, Physical
Memory Organization, Addressing modes, instruction format, instruction set of 8086, Assembler Directives.
Architecture of 8085, Instruction set
1. Perform arithmetic operations on 8/16 bit numbers in assembly language programming.
2. Perform the Code conversion operations in assembly language programming.
3. Perform Logical and shift operationson 8/16 bit numbers in assembly language programming.
4. Perform String operations in assembly language programming.
14 + 8 Hours
Unit- II
8086 Operational Modes and Interfacing
Minimum and Maximum mode operations of 8086 with timing diagrams, Procedures and macros, Stack
Structure of 8086, Static RAM Interfacing, 8255 PPI Various modes of operations, Interfacing I/O ports,
Interfacing of Stepper Motor, ADC and DAC .
Dynamic RAM interfacing, interfacing of 7 segment display
1. Write an ALP for implementation of Procedures and macros.
2. Write an ALP to interface stepper motor with 8086 microprocessor.
3. Write an ALP to interface DAC with 8086 microprocessor.
10 + 6 Hours
Unit- III
Peripheral Interfacing
Traffic light controller, keyboard and message display, Interrupt vector table, Programmable Interrupt Controller
8259A, Programmable Communication Interface 8251 USART, DMA Controller 8257.
Programmable Interval Timers 8253, RS 232C
1. To study and Write an ALP to interface traffic lights.
106
2. Write an ALP to display the given message.

3. Write ALP to interface a matrix Keyboard with 8086 microprocessor.
9 + 6 Hours
Unit-IV
8051 Microcontroller
Introduction to microcontrollers, 8051 microcontrollers, 8051 pin description, connections, I/O ports and
memory organization, MCS-51 addressing modes and instructions, assembly language programming tools,
Parallel ports, Serial Communication, timer mode operations, ARM Architecture and organization
Interfacing of ADC with 8051, Thumb programming model
1. Perform Data transfer operations on 8 bit numbers in assembly language programming using 8051
microcontroller.
2. Perform Arithmetic operations on 8bit numbers in assembly language programming using 8051
microcontroller.
3. Write an ALP to access Parallel ports in 8051 microcontroller.
4. Write an ALP to generate a delay using Timers with 8051 in different modes.
5. Write an ALP to transfer a character/string using UART in 8051 microcontroller.
12 + 10 Hours
Total: 45+30 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. M.Morris Mano,“Computer system architecture”, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2008.
2. A. . ay and .M.BhurChandi, “Advanced MicroProcessors and Peripherals”, Tata McGraw-Hill,
2012.
3. Kenneth J Ayala, "The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and Applications", Thomson
Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2004.
Reference (s)
1. William Stallings, "Computer Organization and Architecture", Pearson/Prentice Hall, 7thEdition, 2009.
2. D.V.Hall, “Microprocessor and Interfacing”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd edition, 2006.
3. N.Sentil Kumar, M.Saravanan, S.Jeevananthan, "Microprocessors and Microcontrollers", Oxford
University Press, 2010.
4. Ajay V Deshmukh, "Microcontrollers", Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012.
5. M.A.Mazidi, "The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems", 2nd edition, Pearson Education,
2007.
Sample Question (s)
Assessment Pattern
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Lab Examination (%)
Remember 10 10 --
Understand 40 30 --
Apply 40 30 50
Analyze 10 30 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Microprocessor and microcontroller
2. List out different fields of ALP instruction formats
3. State an assembler directive
4. Define macro
5. State the need for DMA
Understand
1. Explain various types of 8086 instructions
107
2. Compare 8085 and 8086 microprocessors

3. Illustrate the concept of DMA
4. Explain the significance of reset circuitry in 8051 microcontrollers
5. Explain the architecture of 8086 microprocessors
Apply
1. Execute an ALP to perform sorting operation in ascending order on 16 bit numbers
2. Find the approximate time required to execute an ALP with the help of hardware timers
3. Execute an ALP to generate +4V (P-P) of square wave using 8086
4. Execute an ALP to blink the LED’S using 8051
5. Execute an ALP to find largest number
Analyze
1. Compare the register organization of 8086 and 80386 microprocessors
2. Outline the features of 80386 advanced microprocessor
3. Differentiate the features of 8086 microprocessors
4. Organize the instruction set for implementing stepper motor application
5. Differentiate the modes of operation of 8255
108
16IT504 Computer Networks

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Propose appropriate network model for data communication
2. Analyze various protocols in data link layer.
3. Analyze IEEE 802 series protocols.
4. Develop web applications for sending E-mail.
5. Propose and implement appropriate routing algorithm for data routing.
6. Extend the Internet connection to a given system and trouble shoots the same.
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2

1 3 2
2 3 3
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 1 3
6 1 3
Unit I
Network Hardware-Network Software-and Transmission Media
OSI-TCP/IP-the ARPANET-Network Topologies-Physical Layer:
Transmission media: Magnetic Media-Twisted pair-Base band Coaxial Cable-Fiber optics-Wireless
Transmission: Electromagnetic Spectrum-Radio Transmission-and Microwave Transmission. Switching
Techniques: Circuit Switching-Packet Switching-Message Switching.
Taxonomy of networking devices.
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Data link layer
Design Issues: Framing-error detection and correction-CRC-Elementary Data link Protocols: Stop and wait-
Sliding Window protocols: Go-back-n-Selective Repeat-Medium Access sub layer: Channel allocation methods-
Multiple Access protocols: ALOHA-CSMA-IEEE Standard 802.3 and Ethernet-IEEE Standard 802.4: Token
bus.
Data Link Control Protocols: HDLC-SLIP-PPP
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Network Layer
Network Layer design issues-Virtual circuit and Datagram subnets-Routing algorithms: Shortest path routing-
Flooding-Hierarchical routing-Distance vector routing-Broad cast and Multi cast routing,Congestion Control:
Congestion prevention policies.
Internet control protocols
10+3 Hours
Unit IV
Transport Layer
Transport Services-Connection management-Elements of Transport Protocols-Internet Transport Protocols:
UDP and TCP. IPv4 & IPv6, Application Layer-Domain name system-Electronic Mail-WWW
ATM Transport protocol-Proxy Servers-Multimedia: Data compression-digital representation of analog
signals-Real time transport protocol-session control protocols
12+4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Andrew S Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Pearson Education /PHI, 4th Edition, 2002
2. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, Tata McGraw Hill Higher Education,
4th Edition, 2009
Reference (s)
1. Willam Stallings, “Data and Computer Communications”, Pearson Prentice Hall, 8th Edition, 2009
109
2. W.A. Shay, Thomson, “Understanding communications and Networks”, Cengage Learning, 3rd Edition,
2005
Sample Question (s)

Remember 25 30 ---
Apply 20 20 70
Analyze 20 10 20
Evaluate --- --- 10
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List the applications of Computer Networks
2. Write two differences between OSI and TCP/IP models
3. State 5 key assumptions in Dynamic channel allocation
4. State the purpose of DNS
5. Define congestion
Understand
1. Illustrate OSI Reference model
2. Explain various design issues of data link layer
3. What are the responsibilities of Data Link layer and explain Pure Aloha and Slotted Aloha protocols?
4. Describe Distance Vector routing algorithm with example and explain count to infinity problem
5. Represent the Manchester encoding for the bit stream: 0001110101
Apply
1. What is the check summed frame transmitted if the message is 1101011011 and the generator
polynomial is x 4 + x + 1 using CRC?
2. Can you think of any circumstances under which an open-loop protocol, (e.g., a Hamming code) might
be preferable to the feedback-type protocols
3. Assuming that all routers and hosts are working properly and that all software in both is free of all
errors, is there any chance, however small, that a packet will be delivered to the wrong destination
Analyze
1. The following data fragment occurs in the middle of a data stream for which the byte-stuffing
algorithm described in the text is used: A B ESC C ESC FLAG FLAG D. What is the output after
stuffing?
2. The following character encoding is used in a data link protocol: A: 01000111; B: 11100011; FLAG:
01111110; ESC: 11100000 Show the bit sequence transmitted (in binary) for the four-character frame:
A B ESC FLAG when each of the following farming methods are used:
(a) Character count.
(b) Flag bytes with byte stuffing.
(c) Starting and ending flag bytes, with bit stuffing.
3. Analyze Data link protocols almost always put the CRC in a trailer rather than in a header.
Evaluate
1. Consider the user of differentiated services with expedited forwarding. Is there a guarantee that
expedited packets experience a shorter delay than regular packets? Justify
2. Compute a multicast spanning tree for router C in the following subnet for a group with members at
routers A, B, C, D, E, F, I, and K.
44
110
16CS304 Database Management Systems

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Identify and define the data models needed to design a database

2. Create conceptual and logical database design for Large enterprises
3. Demonstrate the relational data model
4. Apply Integrity constrains over the relations
5. Apply normalization process on existing database for eliminating redundancy
6. Apply the recovery techniques for managing the database effectively to avoid the data lose
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3

1 3 2
2 3 2
3 2 3
4 3 2
5 2 3
6 2 3
Unit I
Introduction to Database Systems
File System Vs DBMS, Advantages of DBMS, Structure of DBMS, Levels of Data Abstraction (Data
Independence), Database Users and Administrators, Different Data Models. E-R Model: Overview of Database
Design, Entities, Attributes, and Entity Sets, Relationships and Relationship Sets Additional Features of the ER
Model
Codd’s rules - Introduction to Distributed Databases - Data Ware Housing and Data Mining
11+3 Hours
Unit II
Introduction to the Relational Model
Integrity Constraints Over Relations-Introduction to Views-Relational Algebra - Selection And Projection - Set
Operations-Renaming-Joins-Division-Examples of Relational Algebra Queries-Relational Calculus: Tuple
Relational Calculus.
SQL Queries: Form Of Basic SQL Query-Union-Intersect-And Except-Nested Queries-Aggregative Operators-
Group By And Having Clauses-Null Values-Outer Joins.
Query Optimization: Query Processing and Optimization-Heuristics and Cost Estimation in Query Optimization
11+5 Hours
Unit III
Schema Refinement and Normal Forms
Introduction To Schema Refinement - Problems Caused By Redundancy - Decomposition - Problems Related
To Decomposition - Functional Dependency - Closure of a Set of Fds - Attribute Closure - First - Second -
Third Normal Forms – BCNF - Multi Valued Dependencies – Fourth Normal Form.
Transactions: Acid Properties of Transaction - Transaction States - Schedule: Serial Schedule - Concurrent
Schedules - Anomalies Associated With Concurrent Schedules (RW - WR - and WW Conflicts) -Serializability
- Conflict Serializability - and View Serializability.
Join Dependency - Fifth Normal Form - Domain Key Normal Form
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
OODBMS, Concurrency Control, Crash recovery
Introduction to Lock Management-Lock Based Concurrency Control: 2pl-Strict 2pl-Concurrency without
Locking-Timestamp–Based Concurrency Control - Optimistic Concurrency Control. Introduction to Aries - the
Log - the Write-Ahead Log Protocol-Check Pointing
Object-Oriented DBMSs-Concepts and Design: Introduction to Object-Oriented Data Models and DBMSs-
OODBMS perspectives-Persistence-Issues in OODBMSs-The object Oriented Database System Manifesto-
Advantages and Disadvantages of OODBMSs-Object oriented Database Design.
Database Security: Data Classification-Threats and Risks-Database access control-Types of Privileges.
111
File Organization-Comparison of File Organizations (Heap File - Sorted File Hash File)
11+3 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Elmasri & Navatha, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2016
2. Silberschatz orth, “Database System Concepts”, McGraw hill, 6th Edition, 2011
Reference (s)
1. Peter ob & Carlos Coronel, “Database Systems design, Implementation and Management”, 7th
Edition, 2004.
2. aghurama rishnan & Johannes Gehrke, “Database Management Systems”, TATA McGraw-Hill, 3rd
Edition, 2006
3. C.J.Date, “Introduction to Database Systems”, Pearson Education, 8th Edition, 2009
Sample Question (s)

Remember 30 25 ---
Apply 35 40 40
Analyze --- --- 40
Evaluate --- --- 20
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List any four application of DBMS
2. Define data model
3. List any four applications for triggers
4. Define functional dependency
5. List the 4 properties of Transaction
Understand
1. Explain E-R Model with suitable example
2. Explain the role of integrity constraints in database design
3. Illustrate the working principle of ‘write a head log’ protocol
4. Differentiate 3NF and 4NF
5. Explain Two Phase Locking Protocol
Apply
1. When multiple transactions are being executed by the operating system in a multiprogramming
environment, there are possibilities that instructions of one transaction are interleaved with some other
transaction. Apply the suitable concept to overcome the problem
2. Classify various normal forms according to their applicability
3. Give some real world applications of Normalization
4. Illustrate the Commit and Rollback operations of Transaction Control
5. Give some real world applications for Database indexing techniques
Analyze
1. Compare File processing system with DBMS
2. Analyze different locking protocol for concurrency control and serializability
3. Normalization will increase the complexity of the database design. Justify
4. Compare DDL and DML of SQL
5. Compare and Contrast Serializabilti and Recoverability
Evaluate
1. Is database redesign is necessary? explain
45
112
2. How can you evaluate the performance of two data models?

3. Evaluate the performance of query processor and list the corresponding metrics
4. How can you assess the throughput and delay for any DBMS?
5. How can you evaluate the impact of data models on the query processing?
113
16CSX15 Fundamentals of Software Engineering

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the need of Software Life Cycle Models

2. Demonstrate the Requirements of the Software Systems process
3. Summarize the system models of software engineering
4. Choose appropriate software architecture style for real-time software projects
5. Analyze Risk management and Software quality of the software products
6. Identify the Illustrate Find quality assurance techniques.
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PO5
1 3 2 1
2 3 2 1
3 2 3 1
4 2 3 1
5 1 3 2
6 1 2 3
Unit I
Introduction to Software Engineering and Life Cycle Models
Software engineering definitions, software development projects, the evolving role of software, Changing
Nature of Software, Software characteristics and myths. CMMI, legacy software Prescriptive, evolutionary,
specialized (agile), Unified software process model
Business Process Engineering Overview - Product Engineering Overview
14+4 Hours
Unit II
Software Requirements Engineering Process and System Models
Requirement classification, Feasibility studies, elicitation and analysis, validation and change management.
Context Models, Behavioral model1, Data models, Object models
Software Prototyping – Prototyping in the Software Process
10+3 Hours
Unit III
Design Engineering and Architecture styles
Design concepts, the design model.
Creating an architectural design - Software architecture, Architectural styles and patterns,
Performing User interface design - Golden rules, User interface analysis and design and steps
Data Acquisition System - Monitoring and Control System
10+4 Hours
Unit IV
Testing and Risk Management
Unit testing, integration testing, system testing, object oriented programs testing, black box and white box
testing, debugging,
Risk management - Risk types, strategies, estimation and Planning.
Software Quality – concepts, Quality assurance and its techniques
Software Implementation Techniques - Testing as an Engineering Activity
11+4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Roger S. Pressman, Bruce R. Maxim, “Software Engineering, A practitioner’s Approach”, McGraw-Hill
International Edition , 8thEdition, 2015
2. a ib Mal, “Fundamentals of software Engineering”, Eastern Economy Edition, 4th Edition, 2014
114
Reference(s)
1. I. Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, Pearson education, 10th Edition, 2015
2. Aggarwal and Yogesh singh, “Software engineering”, New age international publication, 3rd
Edition, 2008
Sample Question (s)

Remember 25 25 ---
Apply 40 40 40
Analyze --- --- 40
Evaluate --- --- 20
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define software engineering
2. List 3 software myths
3. Define Feasibility study
4. What is meant by debugging?
5. Define Risk
Understand
1. Explain various quality assurance techniques
2. Describe software architecture styles and patterns
3. Illustrate golden rules for user interface design
4. Explain various techniques for requirements elicitation and analysis
5. Describe the differences between white box testing and black box testing
Apply
1. Classify the techniques of requirement analysis
Analyze
1. Compare and Contrast software life cycle models
2. Analyze risk types in the risk management
Evaluate
1. How do you assess the quality of the software product?
2. How do you assess the performance of software models?
46
115
16CE007 Disaster Management (Open Elective)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the interdisciplinary nature of disaster management

2. Apply the knowledge to formulate different risk management frameworks and pre-preparedness tools
for natural and manmade disasters
3. Summarize the risk and vulnerability associated with disasters
4. Apply different technologies in the management of disasters
5. Outline the importance of education and preparedness in the management of disasters
6. Infer the role of different organizations in disaster management
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2
1 2
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 1
6 1
Unit I
Introduction to Disaster Management and Management of Natural Disasters
Introduction: Interdisciplinary nature of the subject, Disaster Risk Reduction–Global Policies and Practices,
Basic Strategies and Practices of Disaster Reduction, Linking Disaster Risk Reduction with Global Framework,
Integrated Disaster Risk Management and Post-Disaster Response-Management of Natural Disasters: Floods,
Droughts, Earthquakes, Global Warming, Cyclones, Landslides, Tsunamis and Post Tsunami hazards along the
Indian Coast
Significant Aspects of Disasters-Global Earthquake Safety Initiative-Prediction of Tsunamis-Typology of flood
risks-Framework for Preparedness and Mitigation
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Management of Manmade Disasters and Risk & Vulnerability
Management of Manmade Disasters: Temporal Transport Hazard Dynamics, Solid Waste Management: Post–
disaster, A Threat of Bio-terrorism in Mega Cities, ail and Air craft’s accidents, emerges infectious diseases,
AIDS and Climate Change Risk Reduction-Risk & Vulnerability: Building Codes and Land Use Planning,
Social Vulnerability, Environmental Vulnerability and Disaster Risk Reduction, Macroeconomic Management
and Sustainable Development, Financial Management of Disaster related Economic Losses
Temporal Analysis of Transport-Capacity Building and Institutional Strengthening-Climate Risk Management -
Decision Framework
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Role of Technology in Disaster Management
Role of Technology in Disaster Management: Implementation Technology for Disaster Reduction, Disaster
Management for Infrastructure, Geospatial Information in agriculture Drought Assessment and Monitoring,
Multimedia Technology in Disaster Risk Management Training-Education and Community: Education in
Disaster Risk Reduction , Essentials of School Disaster Education, Community Capacity and Disaster
Resilience, Community-based Disaster Recovery, Community-based Disaster Management and Social Capital,
Designing Resilience
Disaster Management Program-Building Community Capacity-Remote Sensing and GIS 11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Multi Sectional and Crosscutting Issues
Multi Sectional Issues: Impact of Disasters on Poverty and Deprivation, Climate Change Adaptation and Human
Health, Health Hazards and Environmental Risk-Crosscutting Issues: Forest Management and Disaster Risk
116
Reduction, Institutional Capacity in Disaster Management, Corporate Sector and Disaster Risk Reduction,
Essentials of Pre-disaster Recovery Planning
Poverty Vulnerability Indices-Protective Functions of Forest Resources-Corporate Organizations and Disaster
Potential-Community Focused Approach
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. R. Shaw and R. R. Krishna Murthy, Disaster Management: Global Challenges and Local Solutions, 1 st
Ed., Universities Press (India) Private Limited, Hyderabad, 2009
2. J. Singh, Disaster Management: Future Challenges and Opportunities,2 nd Ed., I.K.International
Publishing House Private Limited, New Delhi, 2007
Reference (s)
1. D. P. Coppola, Introduction to International Disaster Management, 3rd Ed., Elsevier Publications, 2011
2. U. Ranke, Natural Disaster Risk Management, Springer International Publishing, 2016
Sample Question (s)

Remember 20 10 --
Understand 30 40 --
Apply 50 50 100
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Hazard
2. Define Disaster
3. What are the different phases of disaster management cycle?
4. Define Tsunami.
5. Define landslide
Understand
1. Explain when hazard become disaster
2. “Prevention is better than cure is opted proverb in the context of disaster management” Explain
3. Explain the causes of global warming
4. Explain the difference between environmental and social vulnerabilities
5. “All the developmental pro ects will lead to disaster risk”, Justify
Apply
1. Role of Geospatial technology in disaster management
2. Role of multimedia technology in disaster management
47
117
16EE004 Renewable Energy Sources (Open Elective)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the principles of solar energy systems

2. Demonstrate the applications of solar energy system
3. Illustrate the working principles of wind and biomass energy systems
4. Interpret working principles of geothermal energy system
5. Summarize operation and classification of ocean , tidal, fuel cells, small hydro and magneto hydro
energy system
6. Extend renewable energy sources to distributed generation & micro grids
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO7

1 3 2
2 2 3
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 2 3
6 3 2
Unit I
Introduction &Solar Energy
Introduction to renewable energy, advantages of generating power through renewable energy sources – technical
& economical, Solar Energy: Physics of sun, the solar constant, extra-terrestrial and terrestrial solar radiation,
instruments for measuring solar radiation and sun shine. Flat Plate and Concentrating Collectors, classification
of concentrating collectors, thermal analysis of flat plate collectors, Photo voltaic energy conversion,PV cell
model and characteristics, Maximum power point tracking for photovoltaic power systems. Types of Maximum
power point tracking methods (Perturb and Observe (hill climbing), Incremental Conductance, Fractional short
circuit current, Fractional open circuit voltage)
Solar applications-solar heating /cooling technique
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Wind & Bio-Mass Energy
Sources and potentials, horizontal and vertical axis windmills, performance characteristics, Betz criteria,
maximum power point tracking for wind, types of Maximum power point tracking methods
Principles of Bio-Conversion, Anaerobic/aerobic digestion,Types of Bio-Gas Digesters,gas yield, Combustion
characteristics of bio-gas,
Utilization for cooking, IC.Engine operation
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Energy Conversion systems
Geothermal & Ocean Energy: Types of Resources (hydrothermal, geo-pressured, hot dry rock), types of wells,
and methods of harnessing the energy (vapour dominated, liquid dominated).Ocean thermal energy conversion,
principles, Open loop&closed loop OTEC Cycles.Tidal energy- potential, conversion techniques-single basin,
two basin system. Wave energy: conversion techniques.
Fuel cells-Principle of working of various types of fuel cells and their working, Magneto-hydrodynamics
(MHD)-Principle of working of MHD Power plant, Hydrogen generation, battery energy storage system.
Wave, tidal power conversion systems & Small hydro power generation
11+3Hours
Unit IV
Distributed generation & Micro-grid
Define grid, distributed generation(DG) & microgrid, importance of DG & microgrid, typical structure and
configuration of a microgrid, AC and DC microgrids, modes of operation and control of microgrid: grid
connected and islanded mode, anti-islanding schemes: passive, active and communication based techniques.
118
HVDC microgrid system 10+4 Hours

Textbook (s)
1. G.D. Rai , Non-Conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, 1 stEdition, 2000.
2. B H Khan, Non-conventional energy resources, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited,
2ndEdition, 2001.
3. Alexis Kwasinski , Wayne Weaver, Robert S. Balog, Micro grids and other local area power and
energy systems, Cambridge University Press, 1st Edition, 2016
Reference (s)
1. Tiwari and Ghosal, Renewable energy resources, Narosa Publishing house, 2 ndEdition, 2001
2. Ranjan Rakesh, Kothari D. P. & Singal K. C., Renewable Energy Sources And Emerging
Technologies, PHI, 2ndEdition, 2013.
3. Nikos Hatziargyriou, Micro grids: Architectures and Control, wiley, 1 st Edition.
4. Electricity Act 2003, Renewable Energy Act 2015.
5. Indian Constitution-Articles 51A, 47, 48A.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 40 40 ---
Understand 60 60 80
Apply 20
Analyze --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define renewable energy
2. List out the advantages HAWT
3. List out the disadvantages non concentration collector
4. Define solar radiation
5. Define micro-grid
Understand
1. Explain need of micro-grid
2. Interpret faraday’s laws
3. Explain closed loop OTEC Cycles system
4. Explain Principle of working of MHD Power plant
5. Compare HAWT and VAWT
Apply
1. Compute the power coefficient of wind turbine
2. Demonstrate storage of energy from battery
3. Assess magnetic flux density due to circular ring
4. Compute solar cell working
5. Assess the nature of micro-grid
48
119
16ME009 Principles of Entrepreneurship (Open Elective)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the role of entrepreneur in economic development

2. Demonstrate methods of generating ideas
3. Develop the business plan to start their own enterprise
4. Manage various production aspects such as manufacturing costs control, marketing management and
waste reduction
5. Make financial plan for enterprise
6. Find the institutional support entrepreneurship
COs – POs Mapping

1 3 - 3 2
2 3 - 1 -
3 3 - 1 3
4 3 3 2 2
5 3 3 3 3
6 3 - 1 3
3 – Strongly linked | 2 – Moderately linked | 1 – Weakly linked
Unit I
Introduction to Entrepreneurship
Definition of Entrepreneur, Entrepreneurial Traits, Entrepreneur Vs. Manager, Entrepreneur Vs Entrepreneur.
The Entrepreneurial decision process- Role of Entrepreneurship in Economic Developments, Ethics and Social
responsibility of entrepreneurs, Woman as entrepreneur.
Opportunities for entrepreneurs in India and abroad.
10+3 Hours
Unit II
Creating and starting the venture
Sources of new Ideas, Methods of generating ideas, creating problems solving- Product planning and
development process
The business plan
Writing Business plan, Evaluating Business plans, Using and implementing business plans, marketing plan,
financial plan and the organizational plan launching formalities
Nature and scope of business plan.
15+5 Hours
Unit III
Financing and managing the new venture
Source of Capital, record keeping, recruitment, motivating and leading teams, financial controls, Marketing
and sales controls. E- Commerce and Entrepreneurship
New venture expansion strategies and issues
Features evaluation of joint ventures, acquisitions, merges, franchising, Public issues, rights issues, bonus
issues
Internet advertising
9+3 Hours
Unit IV
Institutional support Entrepreneurship
Role of Dire crate of Industries, District Industries, Centers (DICS), Industrial development Corporation
(IDC), state Financial corporation (SFCs), Small Scale Industries Development Corporations (SSIDCs), Khadi
and village Industries Commission (KVIC), Technical Consultancy Organization (TCO), small Industries
Service Institute (SISI), National Small Industries Corporation (NSIC), Small Industries Development Bank of
India (SIDBI), salient provision under Indian Factories Act, Employees State Insurance Act, Workmen’s
Compensation Act and payment of Bonus Act.
Labour legislation
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15Hours
120
Textbook (s)
1. Robert Hisrich & Michael Peters, Entrepreneurship, TMH, 5th Edition, 2009.
2. Dollinger, Entrepreneurship, Pearson Education, 4 th Edition, 2004.
Reference (s)
1. Vasant Desal, The Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development and Management Himalaya publishing
House, 5th Edition, 2017.
2. William A. Sahlman, James Stancill, Arthur Rock, Harvard Business Review on Entrepreneurship,
Harvard Business School Press, 10th Edition 1999.
3. Robert J. Calvin, Entrepreneurial Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education 2004.
4. Gurmeet Naroola, The Entrepreneurial Connection: East Meets West in the Silicon Valley, Special
edition, TiE, 2001.
5. Bill Bolton & John Thompson, Entrepreneurs Talent, Temperament, Technique, Routledge, 2 nd Edition,
2004.
6. Agrawal, A.N. & Agarwal, M.K., Indian Economy: Problems of Development and Planning, New Age
International, 42nd Edition, 2017.
7. Gaurav Datt & Ashwani Maha an, Dutt & Sundaram’s Indian Economy, S. Chand, 72 nd Edition, 2016.
8. Srivastava, Industrial Relations Labour Laws, Vikas Publishing House, 6 th Edition, 2005.
9. Aruna Kaulgud, Entrepreneurship Management by Vikas publishing house, 2003.
10. Thomas W. Zimmerer & Norman M. Scalbrorough, Essential of Entrepreneurship and small business
management, PHI, 4th Edition, 2005.
11. ND Kapoor, Industrial Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, 14 th Revised Edition, 2013.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 30 40 -
Understand 70 60 -
Apply - - 35
Analyze - - 45
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List the different methods of generating ideas and explain any four methods.
2. List the difference between entrepreneur vs manager.
3. What are the objectives of market research?
4. What are the market research activities? List them.
5. List the important functions of IDBI.
Understand
1. Illustrate the difference between entrepreneur vs manager.
2. Illustrate the characteristics or traits of an entrepreneur.
3. Illustrate the sources of new ideas for entrepreneur.
4. Explain the various steps involved in writing a business plan.
5. What are the various sources of capital required for business venture?
6. Describe the role of E-commerce in entrepreneurship with its applications.
7. Write about marketing plan and financial plans required for an entrepreneur.
8. Illustrate the factories act 1948.
9. Illustrate the reasons for the need of labor legislation becomes important
49
121
16EC004 Fundamentals of Global Positioning System (Open Elective)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the history of GPS, NAVSTAR GPS

2. State the working principle of GPS, GNSSs
3. Outline GALILEO, GLONASS signal constellation details
4. Conclude about GPS segments, signal components, IRNSS specifications
5. Demonstrate GPS coordinate systems
6. Classify various datums and map projections
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO6

1 1 2 2
2 1 2 2
3 2 3 3
4 2 3 3
5 3 2 2
6 2 2 2
Unit I
Introduction to Global Navigation Satellite Systems
The History of GPS, The Evolution of GPS, Development of NAVSTAR GPS, Block I, Block II, Block IIA,
Block IIR, Block IIR-M, Block IIF and Block III satellites, GPS working principle, Trilateration, Determination
of satellite position, Determining the receiver position: 2D or X-Y Plane, 3D or X-Y-Z Plane, Ionospheric
effects of GPS signals
GIS Integration
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Types of Global Navigation Satellite Systems
GALILEO: Advantages of GALILEO, signal components, PRN codes, Modulation schemes of Galileo signals:
BOC, Alt-BOC, Galileo and GPS Signal interoperability, Improved performance from the combination of
GALILEO and GNSSs, GLONASS: GLONASS constellation details, signal structure: PRN code,P-code,C/A
code,navigation data,signal modulation
GAGAN Navigation system
12+3 Hours
Unit III
GPS Satellite constellation and Signals
GPS system segments: Space segment, Control segment, User segment, GPS Signals: Pseudorandom noise
(PRN) code, C/A code, P code, Navigation data, GPS signal generation: generation of codes, Comparison of
GNSSs in terms of constellation and services, IRNSS: Segments, 1A to 1G specifications, applications
Simulation of GPS signals
10+4 Hours
Unit IV
Coordinate Systems
Geoid, Ellipsoid, Coordinate Systems: Geodetic and Geo centric, CTRS, CIRS, ECEF, Datums: world geodetic
1984, Indian geodetic datum, Conversion between Cartesian and geodetic coordinate frame, Map projections:
Advantages, metric properties, construction, types of map projections
Extract GPS Coordinates for a Google Maps Location 11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. G.S. Rao, Global Navigation Satellite Systems, McGraw-Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2010
2. Ahmed El-Rabbany, Introduction to GPS: the Global Positioning System,Artech House, 2002
122
Reference (s)
1. Scott Gleason and DemozGebre- Egziabher, GNSS Applications and Methods, Artech House, 685
Canton Street, Norwood, MA 02062, 2009
2. James Ba-Yen Tsui, Fundamentals of GPS receivers-A software approach, John Wiley &Sons, 2001
Sample Question (s)

Remember 20 -- --
Understand 45 35 --
Apply -- 35 45
Analyze 35 30 55
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define trilateration.
2. List two applications of GPS.
3. List two important specifications of GLONASS
4. Retrive the need of PRS.
5. Define ranging codes and data.
Understand
1. Illustrate the working principle of GPS.
2. Identify the GPS and GLONASS interoperability issues.
3. Formulate the signal structure of GPS.
4. Abstract geodetic and geocentric coordinate systems.
5. Illustrate the modulation techniques of GALILEO system.
Apply
1. Compute the receiver position using 3D plane.
2. Find the pseudo range on satellite with travelling time of 70ms?
3. Find the free space loss factor on a GPS satellite L1 C/A code signal at a distance of 2x107.
4. Show that the longitude of a point in ECEF is   tan 1 X .
Y
5. Compute the Fourier transform of a pulse signal defined as
x(t )  A, t   / 2
 0, t   / 2
Analyze
1. Compare the features of C/A code and P-code.
2. Outline the unknowns to be solved in acquisition of GPS signal.
3. Contrast BOC and AltBOC modulation techniques.
4. Compare GPS and IRNSS features
5. Contrast ephemeris and almanac codes
50
123
16CS006 Computational Intelligence (Open Elective)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify and describe Soft Computing Techniques and their roles in building Intelligent Machines
2. Apply Supervised Learning Networks in Machine Learning Problems
3. Illustrate the working of Associative memory networks
4. Apply Unsupervised Learning Networks in Machine Learning Problems
5. Apply Fuzzy Logic and Reasoning to handle Uncertainty and Solve Engineering Problem
6. Apply Genetic Algorithms to solve Optimized Problems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO3 PO 5 PO 6
1 3 2 1
2 3 2 1
3 2 3 1
4 3 2 1
5 3 2 2
6 2 3 2
Unit I
Basic Elements of Soft Computing
Basic elements of Soft Computing: Difference between Hard Computing & Soft Computing - Introduction
to Neural Networks - Fuzzy Logic - Genetic Algorithms - Hybrid Systems. Artificial Neural Networks:
Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks - Evolution of Neural Networks - Basic Models of Neural
Networks - McCulloch-Pitts Neuron - Hebb Network.
Basics of Artificial Intelligence and Computational Intelligence. 11+4 Hours
Unit II
Supervised Learning Network
Supervised Learning Network: Artificial Neural Networks: Introduction - Perceptron Networks - Back
Propagation Network. Radial Basis Function Network.
Associative Memory Networks: Auto-associative Memory Network - Hetero auto-associative Memory
Network - Bidirectional Associative Memory (BAM) - Hopfield Networks.
Functional Link Neural Network. 11+4 Hours
Unit III
Unsupervised Learning Network
Introduction - Fixed Weight Competitive Nets -Kohonen Self-Organizing Feature Maps - Learning Vector
Quantization - Counter Propagation Networks - Adaptive Resonance Theory Networks (ART-1 & ART-2).
Support Vector Machines and their applications for Classification. 11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithm
Introduction to Fuzzy Sets: Difference between Classical Sets & Fuzzy Sets – Properties.
Classical Relations and Fuzzy Relations: Cartesian product of Relations - Classical Relations - Fuzzy Relations
Membership Functions: Features of Membership Functions -Fuzzification - and Defuzzification
Genetic Algorithm: Basic Concepts – Operators.
Concepts on Fuzzy Controller and its applications -a Simple Application of Genetic Algorithm for function
Optimization.
11+4 Hours
Total: 44+16 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. S. N. Sivanandam, S N Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, 2 ndEditionWiley India, 2007
2. V. Kecman, Learning and soft computing, Pearson Education, India, 2006
3. Russell Eberhart and Yuhui Shi - Computational Intelligence: Concepts to Implementations (2007)
Reference(s)
124
1. G. J. Klir and Bo Yuan, Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic, Prentice Hall, USA, 1995
2. N. J. Nelsson, Artificial Intelligence, A New Synthesis, Harcourt Asia Ltd., 1998
3. D. E. Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms: Search, Optimization and Machine Learning, Addison Wesley,
N.Y – 1989
4. S. Haykins, Neural networks: a comprehensive foundation Pearson Education, India, 2002
5. A. P. Engelbrecht, Computational Intelligence: An Introduction, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
6. X. Yu and M. Gen, Introduction to Evolutionary Algorithms, Springer Verlag, 2010.
7. Fakhreddine Karray and Clarence de Silva - Soft Computing and Intelligent Systems Design, 2004.
8. Andries Engelbrecht - Computational Intelligence: an Introduction, 2007.
9. Amit Konar - Computational Intelligence: Principles, Techniques, and Applications, 2005.
10. Vojislav Kecman - Learning and Soft Computing: Support Vector Machines, Neural Networks, and
Fuzzy Logic Models, 2001.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 25 15 --
Understand 35 15 --
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 20 30 40
Evaluate -- 20 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Chromosome
2. List two methods in which the information flows in a nervous system
3. List five unsupervised learning algorithms
4. List the difference between classical logic and fuzzy logic
5. List the computational units of ART
Understand
1. Explain the components of Soft Computing
2. Explain the role of activation function in exhibiting the output from a neuron
3. Construct the 5 node pattern {0,1,1,0,1} by Hopfield network and explain the procedure for recalling
and storing
4. Explain Adaptive Resonance Theory and its type
5. Explain CPN and illustrate the steps involved in training algorithm of full CPN
Apply
1. Construct a ANN circuit which makes the flow of data using multilayered and multilevel networks
2. Apply clusters of various datasets maintained by learning approach considering live example
3. Draw the neat architecture of hamming network and trace the inhibitatory and excitatory neurons by
considering an inconsistent vector
4. Find the Max-min and Max Product composition of the fuzzy relation matrices
R={0.6,0.3,0.2,0.9}(2x2) S={1,0.5,0.3,0.8,0.4,0.7}(2x3)
5. Find the cardinality for the matrices R={1,4,6,7}(2x2) S={5,2,3,7}(2x2)
Analyze
1. Differentiate between learning and training algorithms considering multilayer perceptron network and
trace the different types of networks obtained.
2. Differentiate between Counter Propagation Network and Adaptive Resonance Theory
Evaluate
1. Evaluate using Back Propagation algorithm for the below map considering weights , inputs and outputs
51
125
2. Evaluate the instance, that the 2 dimensional input vector X is presented to the three-neuron
ohonennetwork, x=[ 0.52 0.12]. The initial weight vectors, W j are given by
W1=[0.27 , 0.81]
W2=[0.42 , 0.70]
W3=[0.43 , 0.21]
in a form of 2 X 1 matrix. Find the winning neuron using the Euclidean distance and apply kernel self-
organization map.State the differences between register machines and stack machine?
126
16CS007 IoT for Engineering Applications (Open Elective)

(Common to CH, CE, EE, EC, ME & PE)
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Understand the basic concepts of IoT

2. Summarize the structural knowledge of IoT
3. Explain M2M in the context of Internet of Things.
4. Describe the IoT Reference Architecture
5. Design the Internet of things systems for the given problem
6. Apply IoT for various engineering applications
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO5

1 3 3
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 3 3
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Introduction and Fundamental IoT Mechanisms
What is the Internet of Things? : History of IoT, About IoT, Overview and Motivations, Examples of
Applications, Internet of Things Definitions and Frameworks : IoT Definitions, IoT Architecture, Identification
of IoT Objects and Services, Structural Aspects of the IoT, Environment Characteristics, Traffic Characteristics,
Scalability, Interoperability, Security and Privacy.
IOT paradigm-smart objects-Bits an atoms-goal orientation-RTLS+ GPS-agents+ Multi agent system
12+3 Hours
Unit II
M2M to IoT
A Market Perspective– Introduction, Some Definitions, M2M Value Chains, IoT Value Chains, An emerging
industrial structure for IoT, The international driven global value chain and global information
monopolies. M2M to IoT-An Architectural Overview– Building an architecture, Main design principles and
needed capabilities, An IoT architecture outline, standards considerations.
Introduction to Atmega 8 /16 microcontroller- Architecture of the AVR Microcontroller-Pin description of the
microcontroller-I/O of the microcontroller-IR Sensors
11+4 Hours
Unit III
IoT Reference Architecture
Introduction, Functional View, Information View, Deployment and Operational View, Other Relevant
architectural views. Real-World Design Constraints- Introduction, Technical Design constraints-hardware is
popular again, Interaction and remote control. Industrial realizing the enterprise integrated Web of Things, IMC-
AESOP: from the Web of Things to the Cloud of Things, Commercial Building Automation- Introduction, Case
study: phase one-commercial building automation today, Case study.
Specification-Domain Model Specification-Information Model Specification-Service Specifications-IoT Level
Specification-Functional View 11+4 Hours
Unit VI
IoT for Business Applications
Internet of Things Application : IoT for Smart Grid ,City Automation, Automotive Applications, Home
Automation, Smart Cards , Process Monitoring / Automation, Sensor Technology, Raspberry- pi Interface,
Smart Healthcare, Smart Transportation, M2M Communication, Smart Metering, Systems and Services
Integration, Hands-on training, Smart Waste Management System.
Sharing Sensor Data on Social Networks-Twitter-Facebook Connection App-Updation of Sensor Data on
Website / Blog
127
11+4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Jan Holler, Vlasios Tsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stefan Avesand, Stamatis Karnouskos, David
Boyle, From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things: Introduction to a New Age of
Intelligence, 1st Edition, Academic Press, 2014.
2. Daniel Minoli, Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6: The Evolving World of M2M
Communications, ISBN: 978-1-118-47347-4, Willy Publications, 2014
3. Bernd Scholz-Reiter, Florian Michahelles, Architecting the Internet of Things, ISBN 978-3- 642-
19156-5 e-ISBN 978-3-642-19157-2, Springer, 2016
Reference Book (s)

1. Parikshit N. Mahalle & Poonam N. Railkar, Identity Management for Internet of Things, River
Publishers, ISBN: 978-87-93102-90-3 (Hard Copy), 978-87-93102-91-0 (ebook), 2015
Sample Question (s)

Remember 40 40 --
Understand 50 40 20
Apply 10 10 40
Analyze -- 10 30
Evaluate -- -- 10
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Write the major significance of Internet of Things.
2. State the crucial requirement f IoT in terms of application and its supporting natures.
3. List the dominant technologies behind IoT development.
4. Identify two major differences between Internet of Everything and Industrial IoT.
5. Write about the data-center based cloud tools that use to run the machine learning algorithm internally.
6. Recognizes an alternative approach that results in better adaptivity in case of network fluctuations and
increased latency.
7. Identify the on-demand processing and storage capabilities that is used to analyze the data generated by
IoT objects in batch or stream format.
Understand
1. Identify the evolutionary terms of Internet of Things (IoT) that use to interact and live with the physical
objects.
2. Illustrate the reference architecture of IoT that unifies the smart objects and human beings to provide
the ubiquitous communication
3. Illustrate the service-oriented architecture of IoT that ensures the interoperability among the
heterogeneous devices
4. Illustrate the API-Oriented Architecture of IoT that use SOAP and Remote Method Invocation (RMI)
as a means for describing, discovering, and calling services
5. Discuss the resource capacity, selecting and provisioning the resources that greatly impact Quality of
Service (QoS) of the IoT applications
6. Classify the taxonomy of resource management activities of IoT.
7. Report the standard requirement of real time analytics to fulfill the demand of real-time stream
processing engine.
Apply
1. Interpret a study analysis on open-source prototyping platform for the industrial IoT.
52
128
2. Implement a suitable OPENIoT Architecture for IoT/Cloud Convergence that provides an abstract
presentation of the functional elements of architecture.
3. Sketch W3C SSN-XG ontology and how to semantically enable real time sensor feeds
4. Execute the two-tier data dissemination model for large-scale wireless sensor network
5. Demonstrate SPARQL query caching in order to improve the performance of semantic web
applications
6. Illustrations a technique to cluster semantically similar QA pairs for retrieving an answer for a newly
given query without asking the QA engine on the cloud side
Analyze
1. Comparative analysis on real-time analytics in Cloud-IoT and fog computing.
2. Compare the communication efficiencies for the following protocols such as AMPQ, CoAP, DDS,
MQTT, UPnP and XMPP in terms of Transport Layer Protocols.
3. Differentiate the major significances of nesC, keil C and Dynamic C.
4. Relate a set of minimal features to be fulfilled by the programming frameworks for IoT.
5. Comparative analysis on IoT programming approaches
Evaluate
1. Select an example that utilizes the device-collaboration framework for the proactive suggestion
application
2. Appraise a semantic QA cache that implement the device/cloud collaboration framework to compute
the probability of the on-device semantic QA cache to answer a given query correctly.
3. Select a suitable example that use automatically tagging recognized images to display the additional
information such as social sentiment in order to achieve similar performance improvement for speech-
recognition application with DL through device/cloud collaboration framework
4. Critique on fog-computing assisted distributed analytics system that uses a set of fall-detection
algorithms, including algorithms based on acceleration measurements and time-series analysis
methods, as well as filtering techniques to facilitate the fall-detection process.
129
16CH007 Industrial Safety and Hazard Management (Open Elective)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the safety and ethical issues that may arise from industrial processes
2. Explain industrial hygiene practices and its procedures
3. Illustrate the toxic pathways and elimination of toxicity on bio organisms
4. Understand hazards arising from runaway reactions, explosions and fires, and how to deal with them.
5. Choose a suitable method for prevention of fires and explosions
6. Evaluate the process and able to do Hazards Identification and risks Risk Assessment
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 2 1 3 3
2 1 2 1 3 3
3 3 2 3 1 1
4 3 1
5 3 3 3 2
6 3 3 3 3 2
Unit I
Introduction to Safety & Industrial Hygiene
Safety programs, Engineering ethics, Accident and Loss Statistics, Acceptable Risk, Public Perceptions, The
nature of the Accident Process, Inherent Safety, Government of India and OSHA regulations, Industrial
Hygiene, Identification, Evaluation & Control
Lethal dosage–Material Safety Data Sheets
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Toxicology, Fires and Explosions
how toxicants enter biological organisms, how toxicants are eliminated from biological organisms, effects of
toxicants on biological organisms The fire triangle, Distinction between fire and explosions, Definitions,
Flammability characteristics of liquids and vapors, MOC and inerting, ignition energy, Auto ignition, Auto
oxidation, Adiabatic compression, Explosions
Firefighting equipment–Personal protecting equipment–Building fire safety codes
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Designs to Prevent Fires and Explosions
Inerting, static electricity, controlling static electricity, explosion proof equipment and instruments, ventilation,
sprinkler systems, miscellaneous designs for preventing fires and explosions
Work permit–Earthling–Color codes for identification of process
10+4 Hours
Unit IV
Hazards Identification and Risk Assessment
Process hazards checklists, hazards surveys, hazards and operability studies, safety reviews, other methods.
Review of probability theory, event trees, fault trees, QRA and LOPA
Health and safety foundation–5S Practice–Emergency procedures
12+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Text book (s)
1. D. A. Crowl, J. F. Louvar, Chemical Process Safety: Fundamentals with Applications, 3 rd Ed., Prentice
Hall, 2011
2. Reese, Charles D. Industrial Safety and Health for People-oriented Services. CRC Press, 2008
Reference (s)
1. H.H.Fawcett and W.S.Wood, Safety and Accident Prevention in Chemical Operations, John Wiley and
sons, 2nd Ed., New York, 1982
130
2. Hammer, Willie, and Dennis Price. Occupational safety management and engineering. Pearson College
Division, 2001
Sample Question (s)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test53(%)
Remember 20 20 --
Understand 30 20 --
Apply 30 20 35
Analyze 20 30 35
Evaluate -- 20 30
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define terms hazard and accidents
2. List three-step of accidents process?
3. Define terms LD and ED
4. List any four reversible effects that caused by toxic exposure
5. Define terms risk, loss prevention
Understand
1. Identify the initiation, propagation, and termination steps for motor accident
2. Explain about how toxicants enter biological organisms
3. Explain the key responsibilities’ of professional engineers
4. Explain the inherent safety techniques that are used in the chemical industry
5. Explain how toxicants are eliminated from biological organisms
6. List the ingredients of safety program for outstanding safety program
Apply
1. An employee works in a plant with a FAR of 4. If this employee works a 4-hr shift, 200 days per year,
what are the expected deaths per person per year?
2. Air contains 5 ppm of diethylamide (TLV-TWA of 5 ppm), 20 ppm of cyclohexanol (TLV-TWA of 50
ppm), and 10 ppm of propylene oxide (TLV-TWA of 2 ppm). What is the mixture TLV-TWA and has
this level been exceeded?
3. The following accident report has been filed. Failure of a threaded 1½″ drain connection on a rich oil
line at the base of an absorber tower in a large (1.35 MCF/D) gas producing plant allowed the release
of rich oil and gas at 850 psi and –40°F. The resulting vapor cloud probably ignited from the ignition
system of engine driven re compressors. The 75′ high × 10′ diameter absorber tower eventually
collapsed across the pipe rack and on two exchanger trains. Breaking pipelines added more fuel to the
fire. Severe flame impingement on an 11,000-horsepower gas turbine–driven compressor, waste heat
recovery, and super-heater train resulted in its near total destruction. Identify the initiation,
propagation, and termination steps for this accident
4. A process has a reported FAR of 2. If an employee works a standard 8-hr shift 300 days per year,
compute the deaths per person per year
Analyze
1. Can gate valves be placed between a vessel relief and its vessel
2. Liquid levels in storage tanks are frequently determined by measuring the pressure at the bottom of the
tank. In one such tank the material stored in the tank was changed and an overflow resulted. Why?
Evaluate
1. How to convert your kitchen in to XP area
2. Does LOPA really replace 90% of the QRA?
53
131
16IT005 Fundamentals of Cloud Computing (Open Elective)
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the main concepts, key technologies, strengths, and limitations of cloud computing and the
possible applications for state-of-the-art cloud computing
2. Illustrate various problems and evaluate related cloud computing solutions.
3. Apply the architecture and infrastructure of cloud computing, including SaaS, PaaS, IaaS, public cloud,
private cloud and hybrid cloud to different problems.
4. Analyze cloud provider for a defined environment and to a specific platform in a cost effective way.
5. Analyze case studies to derive the best practice model to apply when developing and deploying cloud
based applications
6. Build a virtual machine with a machine image
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO5 PO6

1 3 2 1
2 3 2 1
3 3 2 1
4 2 2 2
5 3 2 1
6 2 2 1
Unit I
Understanding Cloud Computing
Cloud computing: Introduction, Cloud application architectures, Value of cloud computing, Cloud Infrastructure
models, Cloud Services, History of Cloud Computing, Advantages of Cloud Computing, Disadvantages of
Cloud Computing, Companies in the Cloud Today, Amazon Web Services, Windows Azure, Google services,
IBM Cloud
Before the move into the cloud- Know Your Software Licenses, The Shift to a Cloud Cost Model, Service
Levels for Cloud Applications Ready for the cloud: Web Application Design, Machine Image Design, Privacy
Design, Design, Database Management.
Tata Cloud- Salesforce.com
(13+3) Hours
Unit II
Virtual Machines and Virtualization of Clusters and Data Centers
Implementation Levels of Virtualization, Virtualization Structures/Tools and Mechanisms, Virtualization of
CPU, Memory, and I/O Devices, Virtual Clusters and Resource Management, Virtualization for Data-Center
Automation Case Studies: Cloud centers in detail, Comparing approaches, Xen, Eucalyptus, Cloud Stack, and
Open Stack
VMware- KVM.
(10+5) Hours
Unit III
Scaling of Cloud Infrastructure & Security
Capacity, Planning, Cloud Scale.Cloud Security-Data Security, Network Security, Host Security, Compromise
Response
Disaster Recovery-Disaster Recovery Planning, Disasters in cloud, Cloud Disaster Management.
Requirements for modern data centers- high availability and Service Orientated Infrastructures (SOI)- Modern
data centre use case studies.
(10+3) Hours
Unit IV
Cloud Computing Software Security Fundamentals
Cloud information Security Objectives, Cloud Security Services, Relevant Cloud Security Design Principles,
Secure Cloud Software Requirements, Approaches to Cloud Software Requirements Engineering, Cloud
132
Security Policy Implementation. Cloud Computing Risk Issues: The CIA Triad, Privacy and Compliance Risks,
Threats to Infrastructure Data and Access Control, Cloud Access Control Issues, Cloud Service Provider Risks.
Security concepts-Confidentiality-privacy-integrity-authentication-non-repudiation-availabilit- access control-
defence in depth- least privilege
(12+4) Hours
Total:(45+15) Hours
Textbook (s)
1. George Reese, Cloud Application Architectures, 1st Edition O’ eilly Media, 2009
2. Ronald L.Krutz and Russell Dean Vines, Cloud Security, 1 st Edition, Wiley Publishing, 2010
Reference (s)
1. Michael Miller, Cloud Computing-Web Based Applications that change the way you work and
collaborate online, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, Publishing, 2011
2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox and Jack J. Dongarra, Distributed & Cloud Computing from Parallel
Processing to the Internet of Things, 1st Edition, MK Publishing, 2010
3. David S Linthicum, Cloud Computing and SOA Convergence in Your Enterprise: A Step-by-Step
Guide, 1st Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2009
Sample Question (s)

Remember 40 45 --
Understand 40 45 --
Apply 20 10 80
Analyze -- -- 20
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Cloud Computing
2. List types of virtualization
3. Define proactive scaling
4. What is CIA Triad?
Understand
1. Explain different cloud Infrastructure models
2. Explain different levels of virtualization
3. Explain about cloud Network security in detail?
4. Explain about Recovery Point Objective.
Apply
1. Explain any IaaS service provided by Amazon
2. What is cloud Stack?
3. How disaster recovery planning can be done
4. How Web Application Design is used in designing cloud applications
Analyze
1. Compare cloud center and service infrastructure.
2. Analyze different cloud services provided by Amazon
3. With neat diagram explain the functioning of Xen Architecture.
4. List and explain various cloud service providers risks.
54
Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills Pertaining to this course
133
16PE007 Smart Grid Technology (Open Elective)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Compare the basic difference between existing grid and smart grid
2. Explain perfect power system network (Including distributed and fully integrated systems)
3. Explain the importance of renewable energy systems and distributed energy resources in smart grid
4. Summarize the wide area monitoring system and advanced measuring technologies
5. Recall the technologies like Zigbee, HAN and NAN in smart grids
6. Explain SCADA technology in modern power systems and to analyze the micro grid systems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO3 PO5

1 2 2
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 3
Unit I
Introduction to the Smart Grids
Introduction to smart grid- Electricity network-Local energy networks- General considerations for a smart grid,
characteristics of smart grids, elements in smart grids.
Electric transportation- Low carbon central generation-Attributes of the smart grid- Alternate views of a smart
grid.
Smart grid to evolve a perfect power system: Introduction- Overview of the perfect power system
configurations- Device level power system- Building integrated power systems- Distributed power systems-
Fully integrated power system-Nodes of innovation.
Present status of smart grids in India
14+4 Hours
Unit II
Smart Electric Grid & Measurement Technologies
Smart electric grid: generation- Distributed energy resources: Renewable energy, energy storage, solar energy,
wind energy, biomass, hydro power, geothermal and fuel cell, effect of electric vehicles(EV’s) , transmission,
distribution, and end-user; Basic concepts of power, load models, load flow analysis
Measurement Technologies: Wide area monitoring system (WAMS), advanced metering infrastructure (AMI),
phasor measurement units.
Functioning of PMU
12+3 Hours
Unit III
Communication & Networking Technology
Architectures, standards and adaptation of power line communication (PLC), zigbee, GSM, GPS, GIS, machine
to-machine communication models for the smart grid; Home area networks (HAN) and neighborhood area
networks (NAN)
Machine to human communication system
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Energy Management in Smart grids
Aspects of energy management in the smart grid; SCADA; micro grids; demonstration projects; case studies.
Policy and economic drives of the smart grid; environmental implications; sustainability issues of smart grid
systems.
Environmental issues related to smart grid systems 10+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. Clark W Gellings, “The Smart Grid, Enabling Energy Efficiency and Demand Side esponse”- CRC
Press, 2012
134
2. Janaka Ekanayake, ithsiri Liyanage,Jianzhong.Wu, Akihiko Yokoyama, Nick Jenkins, “Smart Grid:
Technology and Applications”- Wiley, 2012
Reference(s)
1. A. Keyhani, Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems, Wiley 2011
2. James Momoh, Smart Grid :Fundamentals of Design and Analysis, Wiley, IEEE Press, 2012
Sample Question (s)

Remember 10 10 ---
Understand 50 50 --
Apply 40 40 55
Analyze -- -- 45
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define smart grid system
2. Write about self healing capability
3. List out four basic characteristics of smart grid system
4. Write about resiliency to disturbances
5. Write down the basic elements of smart grid system
6. Write about smart meters
7. Write down the generation options which are possible in smart grid system
Understand
1. Illustrate the advanced power system network
2. Draw the block diagram of smart grid system
3. Explain the self healing property of smart grid system
4. Explain about self healing capability technology in smart grid systems
5. Explain the self healing property of smart grid system
6. Explain about the smart homes
7. Explain the energy storage system in smart grids
8. Explain about outage management system
Apply
1. Construction of modern power system network with the help of basic characteristics
2. Choose the best renewable energy source based on the environmental conditions
3. Execute the smart home with the smart grid elements
4. Develop a smart hybrid electric vehicle with efficient battery system
5. Compute micro grid system with dc loads
6. Find the net power injected in the bus i for a two bus system
Analyze
1. Differentiate between traditional and modern grid
2. Identify the reasons for failure of existing grid
3. Justify the need of AMI in smart grids
4. Compare the operation of micro grid and smart grid systems
5. Identify WAMS in smart grids
55
135
16MA001 Computational Mathematics (Open Elective)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply the knowledge of finding roots of nonlinear equations and different errors in series
approximations
2. Understand the consistency and inconsistency of linear system of equations
3. Evaluate the solution of Initial and Boundary value problems
4. Perform numerical differentiation and integration
5. Analyze the solution of PDEs under given conditions
6. Apply Knowledge of numerical techniques to Engineering problems
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2

1 3 2
2 3 2
3 2 3
4 2 2
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Errors in numerical calculations and Solutions of algebraic and transcendental equations
Absolute, relative and percentage errors, a general error formula, errors in a series approximation
Locating oots of Equations with one variable : Secant method, Muller’s method
Solution of nonlinear equations - Introduction, Iteration method, Newton-Raphson method
Develop MATLAB code for Bisection method, Newton-Raphson method and for the above methods
12 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Solution of Linear Systems and Interpolation
Direct methods -LU Decomposition, Iterative methods –Jacobi method, Gauss-Seidel method
Interpolating polynomials using finite differences- Bessel interpolation, Piecewise and spline interpolation -
Piecewise Linear interpolation, Quadratic spline interpolation
Develop MATLAB code for the above methods
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Numerical Integration and BVP (ODE)
Newton-Cotes methods (Weddle’s rule)
Solution of BVP - Finite difference method, shooting method, the cubic spline method
Develop MATLAB code for Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/3 & 3/8 rules and for the above methods
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Numerical solutions of PDEs
Introduction, Finite difference approximations to derivatives, Solutions of Laplace & Poisson equations using
Jacobi’s, Gauss-Seidel & SOR methods. Solution of parabolic equation using -Bender-Schmidt & Crank-
Nicolson methods. Solution of hyperbolic equation
Develop MATLAB code for the above methods
11 + 4 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. M. K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar, R.K. Jain, Numerical methods for Scientific and Engineering Computation,
4th edition, New Age International publishers, New Delhi(
2. S. S. Sastry, Introductory methods of numerical analysis, 4 th Edition, PHI
3. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42nd edition, Khanna publishers, New Delhi
Reference(s)
1. S. C. Chapra & R. P. Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill(2012)
136
2. Cleve Moler, Numerical Computing with MATLAB, SIAM.
Sample Question (s)

Assessment Pattern
Remember 30 30 -
Understand 45 40 -
Apply 20 25 40
Analyze 5 5 30
Evaluate - - -
Create - - 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List out different Errors in Numerical calculations
2. List the three numerical methods to solve Algebraic and Transcendental equations
3. Define initial and boundary value problem for Ordinary differential equations
4. List the numerical methods in solving Laplace’s, partial differential equations i.e. Parabolic and
hyperbolic
Understand
1. Summarize the Absolute, relative and percentage Errors
2. Illustrate the procedure for Newton-Raphson method for finding root of an algebraic equation
3. Explain the mechanism involved in LU decomposition method in solving linear systems
4. Explain spline interpolation formula
Apply
1. Given , construct the Taylor series approximations of orders 0 to 7 at and state their
absolute errors.
2. Apply Newton-Raphson method to find a root of the equation .
3. Given the set of data points (1,-8), (2,-1) and (3, 18) satisfying the function , find the linear
splines satisfying the given data. Determine the approximate values of y(2.5) and
4. Apply Gauss-Seidel’s method to solve Laplace equation for the region given in the figure
Analyze
1. Compare the roots obtained from Secant method, Muller’s methods and explain which method is
preferable
2. Analyze the physical significance of spline’s interpolation formula
3. Differentiate shooting and cubic splines methods for numerical integration.
4. Analyze the platform for the application of Laplace Equation
56
Comprehensive test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills
137
16CY001 Nano Science and Technology (Open Elective)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply various chemical and physical methods for the synthesis of nanomaterials
2. Understand the properties of nano-materials and their applications in relation to bulk materials
3. Describe the nano size effect on optical, electrical, magnetic and thermal properties
4. Characterize nano materials by powder XRD and microscopy techniques.
5. Understand structure, properties and applications of Fullerenes and Carbon nanotubes.
6. Review the applications of nanomaterials, specially semiconducting metal oxides for sensing and
catalysis
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO12
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Introduction to Nanomaterials
Introduction to nanomaterials and nanotechnology, Nano-sizes and their unique properties: comparison with the
bulk materials, Different shapes sizes and morphology of nanomaterials; Defects in nanocrystalline materials,
Effect of grain size on physical properties – magnetic, electrical, optical and thermal properties.
11 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Fabrication of Nanomaterials
Top Down Approaches: Grinding, Planetory milling and comparison of particles; Bottom Up Approach: Wet
Chemical Synthesis - Microemulsion Approach, Colloidal Nanoparticles Production, Sol Gel Methods,
Sonochemical Approach, Microwave and Atomization; Gas phase Production Methods - Chemical Vapour
Depositions; Carbon Nano structures: carbon molecules, carbon clusters, carbon nano tubes- synthesis,
formation.
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Characterization of Nanomaterials
Fractionation principles of particle size measurements, Particle size and its distribution, powder X-ray
Diffraction, Zeta potential, Electronic band structure Electron statistics Application: Optical transitions in solids,
photonic crystals, Microscopies: Scanning Electron Microscopy, Transmission Electron Microscopy, Atomic
Forced Microscopy, Scanning and Tunneling Microscopy.
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Applications of Nanomaterials
Self-assembly and molecular manufacturing, Surfactant based system Colloidal system applications, Functional
materials Applications: Single walled and multi walled CNTs, quantum dots, GaN wires, TiO 2 and ZnO nano
crystalline materials, Nanosensors based on optical properties.
11 + 4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. B. S. Murthy, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B.B. Rath, Ames Murday, Text book of Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology, published by Springer & Universities Press (India) Pvt. Ltd.
138
2. Sulabha K. Kulkarni, Nanotechnology: Principles & Practices, Springer

3. Nils O. Petersen, Foundations for Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, CRC Press, 2017.
Reference(s)
1. Stuart M. Lindsay, Introduction to Nanoscience, Oxford University Press, 2009.
2. Robert Kelsall, Ian Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology, John Wiley &
Sons, 2005.
3. Gabor L. Hornyak , H.F. Tibbals , Joydeep Dutta , John J. Moore Introduction to Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology CRC Press
4. Davies, J.H. ‘The Physics of Low Dimensional Semiconductors: An Introduction’, Cambridge
University Press, 1998
Sample Question (s)

Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 80
Analyze - - 20
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define a nanomaterial. List any four naturally occurring/synthetically prepared nanomaterils used in
daily life.
2. Differentiate between nano materials & bulk materials in terms of physical properties.
3. List two methods of preparing nanomaterials in bottom up approach & top down approach.
Understand
1. Explain the sol-gel method of preparing nano materials. What kind of materials can be prepared by this
method in nano form.
2. How will the electrical, magnetic & optical properties vary for nano amterials compared to bulk.
Explain with an example for each.
3. What are the various carbon nano materials available? Describe one methos of producing Carbon nano
tubes.
Apply
1. How is SEM used for characterization of nano materials? Describe the principle and working of
instrument.
2. Based on the optical properties of Nano TiO2 and ZnO, describe the design & construction of nano
sensors.
3. Describe the functions and applications of Carbon nano tubes and gaN nano wires.
Analyze
1. How is the size of nanomaterials characterized? Assess the advantage of using SEM & TEM instead of
powder XRD for size of particle, grain size characterization.
2. For a semiconductor, as the materials is sized down to nano, the electronic band structure is found to
vary from bulk material. Explain the changes in electronic band structure for a direct band gap
material.
3. Calculate the changes in surface to volume ratio (S/V ratio) for a particle of 1 micrometer cube divided
into 10 nanometer cubes by top down approaches. Comment on its impact in catalysis
57
139
16EE607 Power Electronics Lab

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Choose suitable power electronic switches based on their characteristics for given application
2. Evaluate the performance of various firing circuits of SCR.
3. Compare commutation techniques for SCR
4. Analyze various thyristor controlled rectifier
5. Make use of simulation tools for analyzing power converters
6. Analyze various thyristor controlled inverter
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4 PO 5
1 3 1
2 3 1
3 3 1
4 3 1
5 3 3
6 3 1
List of Experiments
1. Static V-I characteristics of SCR.
2. Static characteristics of MOSFET & IGBT.
3. Gate firing circuits for SCR.
4. Single Phase AC Voltage Controller with R and RL Loads
5. Single Phase fully controlled bridge converter with R and RL loads
6. Forced Commutation circuits ( Class A, Class B, Class C, Class D & Class E)
7. Single Phase Parallel inverter with R and RL loads
8. Single Phase cyclo-converter with R and RL loads
9. Single Phase Half controlled converter with R and RL load
10. Single Phase series inverter with R and RL loads.
11. Speed control of DC motor using Buck-Boost regulator.
12. Design of Buck converter.

1. Simulation of single phase AC voltage controller for different loads using PSPICE/MATLAB.
2. Simulation of a single phase fully controlled converter for RLE load using PSPICE/MATLAB.
3. Simulation of converter fed DC Motor in closed loop speed control.
4. Simulation of PWM inverter using MATLAB/Simulink.
5. Simulation of Buck converter and its analysis using open loop and closed controllers.

1. M. H. ashid, “Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Prentice Hall of India, 3rd
Edition, 2009
2. P.S. Bhimbra, “Power Electronics”, hanna Publishers, 4th Edition, 2012.
3. M.D. Singh & .B. anchandhani, “Power Electronics”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company, 2 nd
Edition, 2007.
4. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Underline, "Power Electronics: converters, applications, and design”, Wiley-
India, 3rd Edition , 2009
5. obert W. Erickson & Dragan Maksimovic, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer, 2nd
Edition, 2004.
58
140
16ESX2B Employability Skills IV

0201
Soft Skills
Introduction to Campus Placements: Stages of Campus Placement, Skills assessed in Campus Placements; The
Changing scenario and its Challenges & How to get ready? ; Building Vocabulary: Through reading Articles,
Exploring New Words, Meanings and the usage with examples; Business Terminology: Vision, Mission,
Objectives, Goals, Targets and Financial Terms such as Debt, Equity, Share, Working Capital, Turnover, Net
Worth etc ; Resume (Recap): Resume? Templates? Mistakes to be avoided in a Resume and Steps to be
followed in preparing it; Group Discussions (Recap) & Practice: GD? Stages of a GD, Skills assessed in a GD,
Blunders to be avoided, How to excel in a GD? Practice sessions and sharing Feedback. (Screening sample
Videos); Interview Skills: Interview? Types of Interview, Dos & Don’ts, Skills assessed in an Interview,
Mistakes to be avoided, How to equip oneself to excel? How to handle the Typical Interview Questions? (with
Examples); Mock Interviews: Practice sessions with Feedback; Exercises related to Communication: JAMs,
Case Studies, Video Synthesis, Email Writing, Story Writing, TAT etc.
Verbal reasoning
141
16HSX04 Engineering Economics and Project Management

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain basic principles of engineering economics

2. Apply cost-volume-profit (CVP) analysis in their business decision making
3. Evaluate investment proposals through various capital budgeting methods
4. Apply the knowledge to prepare the simple financial statements for measuring performance of business
firm
5. Analyze key issues of organization, management and administration
6. Evaluate project for accurate cost estimates and plan future activities
COs – POs Mapping

1 3 - 2 1 -
2 1 3 2 - -
3 2 3 1 - -
4 - 2 1 - 3
5 - 1 3 2 -
6 - 2 - 1 3
Unit I
Introduction to Engineering Economics - Demand Forecasting & Cost Analysis
Concept of Engineering Economics – Types of efficiency – Managerial Economics Nature and Scope – Law of
Demand – Types of Elasticity of demand.
Demand Forecasting & Cost Analysis:Demand Forecasting: Meaning, Factors Governing Demand Forecasting,
Methods of Demand Forecasting (Survey and Statistical Methods) – Cost Analysis: Basic Cost Concepts, Break
Even Analysis.
Factors affecting the elasticity of demand – Supply and law of Supply.
10 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Investment Decisions & Market Structures - Financial Statements & Ratio Analysis
Time Value of Money – Capital Budgeting: Meaning, Need and Techniques of Capital Budgeting –Types of
Markets Structures – Features – Price Out-put determination under Perfect Competition and Monopoly.
Financial Statements & Ratio Analysis:Introduction to Financial Accounting – Double entry system – Journal –
Ledger – Trail Balance – Final Accounts (with simple adjustments) – Financial Analysis through Ratios:
Interpretation of Liquidity Ratios (Current Ratio and quick ratio), Activity Ratios (Inventory turnover ratio and
Debtor Turnover ratio, Creditors Turnover Ratio, Capital Turnover Ratio), Solvency Ratios (Debt- Equity ratio,
Interest Coverage ratio), and Profitability ratios (Gross Profit Ratio, Net Profit ratio, Operating Ratio, P/E Ratio
and EPS).
Price output determination under Monopolistic markets, Accounting concepts and conventions
11 + 6 Hours
Unit III
Introduction to Management - Strategic Management
Introduction to Management: Nature – Importance – Classical Theories of Management: F.W.Taylor’s and
Henri Fayol’s Theory – Functions and Levels of Management – Decision Making Process.
Methods of Production (Job, Batch and Mass Production) - Inventory Control, Objectives, Functions – Analysis
of Inventory – EOQ.
Maslow & Douglas Mc.Gregor theories of Management, ABC Analysis
12 + 2 Hours
Unit IV
Project Management
Introduction – Project Life Cycle and its Phases – Project Selection Methods and Criteria – Technical Feasibility
– Project Control and Scheduling through Networks – Probabilistic Models of Networks – Time-Cost
Relationship (Crashing) – Human Aspects in Project Management: Form of Project Organization – Role &
Traits of Project Manager.
Sources of Long-term and Short-term Project Finance
142
12 + 4 Hours
Total:45+15Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Chan S. Park, “Fundamentals of Engineering Economics”, Pearson, 2013, 3 Edition, New Delhi, 2015
2. a eev M Gupta, “Project Management”, 2nd Ed., PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2014
Reference (s)
1. PanneerSelvam. , “Engineering economics”, 3rdEdision., Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2013
2. .B. hanna, “Project Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2011
3. . PanneerSelvam&P.Senthil umar, “Project Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi,
2010
4. A. Aryasri, “Management Science”, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill publishing company limited, New
Delhi, 2014
5. A. Aryasri, “Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis”, 4th Ed., ata McGraw Hill publishing
company limited, New Delhi, 2014
6. oontz &Weihrich, “Essentials of Management: An International, Innovation, and Leadership
perspective “, 6th Ed., TMH, 2010
7. Chuck Williams and Mukher ee, “Principle of Management” 7th Ed., south western cengage learning
publishser,2012
Sample Question (s)
Assessment Pattern
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) AssignmentTest59 (%)
Remember 25 20 --
Understand 25 15 --
Apply 20 25 30
Analyze 10 15 30
Evaluate 20 25 20
Create --- --- 20
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Managerial Economics. Explain its nature and scope.
2. Explain the concept of efficiency? State the serveral methods to enhacing the economic efficiency?
3. Define Production Function? List the various types of production functions
4. Define the meaning of productivity? Explain how productivity can be enhanced in the Indian
industries.
5. The pro ects “unique” and ‘temporary as defined by PMBO ? Discuss.
Understand
1. Summarize engineering economics with suitable expamples.
2. Definethe law of demand? Explain its exceptions.
3. Explain different elements of costs used in cost analysis
4. Illustrate the effect of price on demand and supply with the help of a diagram.
5. Compare and contrast long-run equilibrium under monopolistic competition with that under perfect
competition.
Apply
1. Determine price elasticity of demand given that the quantity demand of a product is 1000 units when
the price is Rs.100 and when the price declines to Rs.70, demand increases to 1100 units.
2. Consider the following data of company for the year 2015
Sales = Rs.2,40.000/-
Fixed cost = Rs.50,000/-
Variable caost = Rs.75,000/-
Find our the followings
a) Contribution
b) Profit
59
143
c) BEP
d) Margin of safety
3. “Every debit must have a corresponding credit” Explain.
4. Identigy the factors that are to be diagnosed both in the external and the internal environment to make
enough ground for strategy formulation. Illustrate appropriately
5. “Poor technology selection can lead to total failure for a manufacturing firm”. Do you agree? Give
reasons in support of your answer with suitable examples.
Analyze
1. “Management is regarded as an art by some, science by othes”. In the light of this statement, explain
the exact nature of management.
2. Make a comparative analysis of the features of different methods of production.
3. Analyse the Discounted Cash Flow (DCF) technique for appraising large investment decisions.
4. Is there any lind between mission, goal, objective, strategy and programmes in an industrial
environment?
5. Compare and contrast the project evaluation and review technique (PERT) with the critical path
method (CPM).
Evaluate
1. Evaluate survey based demand forecasting methods with appropriate examples.
2. The logical sequence of management functions cannot be subordinated even by one fuction. Do you
agree? Support your answer.
3. Can there be a strategy without a mission? Give a mission statement for following organization:
A) An internet servce provider
B) A large private hospital
C) State electricity board
4. From the following information calculate ARR of the project, with initial cost of Rs.2,00,000/- and
scrap value is Rs.10,000/.
Year Project
1 20000
2 50000
3 70000
4 60000
5 40000
Create
1. Discuss the flow of goods, services, resources and money payments in a simple economy with the help
of a suitable diagram.
2. Sketch and explain the demand relationship in each of the following statements.
a. I would never buy a Britney Spears CD! You couldn’t even give me one for nothing.
b. I generally buy a bit more coffee as the price falls. But once the price falls to Rs.2/-, I’ll buy
out the entire stock of the supermarket.
c. I spend more on orange juice even as the price rises. (Does this mean that I must be violating
the law of demand?)
3. “Managerial Economics is the discipline which deals with application of economic theory to business
management”, Discuss.
4. How information technology has enabled the development of project management in recent times?
144
16EE005 Flexible AC Transmission Systems

4 0 0 3
Course Outcomes
1. Outline the importance and scope of FACTS controllers

2. Classify FACTS controllers
3. Analyze the performance of shunt controllers and reactive power injection
4. Analyze the performance of series controllers and current injection.
5. Analyze combined series and shunt controllers for the given power system network
6. Analyze the performance of UPFC and Interline Power Flow Controller
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO 3
1 3 2
2 2 3
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 3 2
6 2 3
Unit I
General System Considerations (15 Hours)
Transmission Interconnections, flow of power in AC systems, Loading capability, power flow and Dynamic
Stability considerations of a transmission interconnections, Relative importance of controllable parameters.
Basic types of FACTS Controllers, Benefits from FACTS technology, HVDC versus FACTS.
UnitII
Shunt Compensation (15 Hours)
Static shunt compensators-Objectives of Shunt compensation, Methods of controllable VAR generation-TCR,
TSC, FC-TCR, TSC-TCR, STATCOM,
Unit III
Series Compensation (15 Hours)
Objectives of series compensation, Variable impedance type series compensators -GCSC, TSSC, TCSC and
SSSC, Switching converter type series compensators.
Unit IV
Combined Series and Shunt controllers (15 Hours)
Static Voltage Regulators, Objectives of voltage and Phase Angle Regulators, Thyristor Controlled Phase
Angle Regulators, Switching converter based Phase Angle Regulators
Unified Power Flow Controller (UPFC) and Interline Power Flow Controller
Text Books:
1. Narain G. Hingorani and Laszlo Gyugyi, “Understanding FACTS – Concepts and Technology of
Flexible AC Transmission Systems” Wiley-IEEPress, 2001.
2. . . Padiyar, “FACTS Controllers in Power Transmission & Distribution “, New Age International
(P) Ltd., 2nd edistion,2009.
3. . Mohan Mathur and a iv . Varma, “Thyristor Based FACTS Controller for Electrical
Transmission Systems”, JohnWiley& sons,2011.
Reference books:
1. E. Acha, V. G. Agelidis, O. Anaya-Lara, T. J. E. Miller,”Power Electronic Control in Electrical
Systems” Newnes Power Engineering Series, Oxford, 2002.
145
Sample Question (s)
Remember 10 10 ---
Apply --- --- 40
Analyze 40 50 60
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List varioustypes of FACTS controllers
2. Define controllable VAR generation
3. Name the technical benefits of FACTS technology
4. List out the requirements of shunt compensation
5. List any three applications of UPFC
Understand
1. Explain the power flow considerations of a transmission interconnected systems
2. Illustrate the improvement of voltage stability using shunt compensation
3. Explain various loading capability limits in power flow systems
4. Demonstrate the basic operating principles and concepts of UPFC
5. Summarize features of thyristor controlled reactor
Apply
1. Modelthyristor controlled reactor.
2. Identify a suitable FACTS controller that improves voltage for a radial line.
3. Identify a suitable FACTS controller that controls both active and reactive power in a transmission line.
4. Model STATCOM for reactive power control.
Analyze
1. Compare series and shunt compensation.
2. Distinguish STATCOM and SVC in the following(i) V-I characteristics (ii) transient stability.
3. Examine the operation of UPFC.
4. Compare SVC and STATCOM.
5. Analyze the performance of GCSC.
60
146
16EE006 High Voltage DC Transmission

4 0 0 3
Course Outcomes
1. Compare HVDC and HVAC Transmission systems

2. Analyze the operation of 6 and 12 pulse converters
3. Illustrate various control characteristics and strategies of HVDC link
4. Develop power flow analysis in HVDC Transmission system
5. Classify the faults and identify suitable protective schemes
6. Analyze harmonics and select suitable filters for reduction
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3

1 3 2
2 2 3
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 3 2
6 2 3
Unit I
Basic Concepts & Analysis of HVDC Converters (15 Hours)
Economics & Terminal equipment of HVDC transmission systems: Types of HVDC Links – Apparatus required
for HVDC Systems – Comparison of AC &DC Transmission, Application of DC Transmission System –
Planning & Modern trends in D.C. Transmission.
Choice of Converter configuration – analysis of Graetz circuit – characteristics of 6 Pulse converters – Cases of
two 3 phase converters in star –star mode – their performance.
Characteristics of 12 Pulse converters, characteristics of n Pulse converter,
Unit II
Converter & Reactive Power Control in HVDC (15 Hours)
Principal of DC Link Control – Converters Control Characteristics – Firing angle control – Current and
extinction angle control – Effect of source inductance on the system; Starting and stopping of DC link; Power
Control.
Reactive Power Requirements in steady state-Conventional control strategies-Alternate control strategies , AC
Filters.
Shunt capacitors-synchronous condensers, Static VARS
Unit III
Power Flow Analysis, Converter Fault & Protection (15 Hours)
Modeling of DC Links-DC Network-DC Converter-Controller Equations-Solution of DC load flow – P.U.
System for DC quantities-solution of AC-DC Power flow-Simultaneous method-Sequential method.
Converter faults – protection against over current and over voltage in converter station – surge arresters –
smoothing reactors – DC breakers.
corona effects on DC lines-Radio interference ,Audible noise-space charge field.
Unit IV
Harmonics & Filters (15 Hours)
Generation of Harmonics –Characteristic harmonics, calculation of AC Harmonics, Non- Characteristic
harmonics, adverse effects of harmonics – Calculation of voltage & Current harmonics – Effect of Pulse number
on harmonics. Types of AC filters, Design of Single tuned filters.
Design of High pass filters.
Text books:
1. . .Padiyar, “HVDC Power Transmission Systems: Technology and system Interactions”, New
Academic Science publishers, Edition 3,2017.
147
2. S. ao “EHVAC and HVDC Transmission & distribution Engineering”, Khanna publisher, edition 3
reprint, 1999
Reference books:
1. J.Arrillaga, “High Voltage Direct Current Transmission”, The Institution Of Engineering And
Technology, 1998.
2. Edward Wilson imbark, “Direct Current Transmission”, John Wiley & Sons, 1971.
3. E.Uhlmann, “Power Transmission by Direct Current” –, B.S.Publications, 2012 2nd edition.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 20 20 ---
Apply 10 40 40
Analyze 30 10 60
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define firing angle and extinction angle
2. List the advantages of HVDC transmission
3. List the various modes of operation of 6 pulse converter
Understand
1. Explain the protection of converter against over voltages
2. Contrast HVDC and HVAC transmission systems
3. Illustrate the working principle of 12 pulse converter
4. Outline the effect of corona on DC lines
5. Explain the various control strategies of converter
Apply
1. Identify the applications of HVDC transmission system
2. Model a suitable filter for reduction of 3rd and 6th harmonic components
3. Develop an algorithm for DC power flow
Analyze
1. Analyze 12 pulse converter in detail
2. Compare AC and DC power flows
3. Design the high pass filter having cutoff frequency of 200MHz
61
148
16EE007 Power System Deregulation

4 0 0 3
Course Outcomes
1. Compare the regulated and deregulated electricity market systems

2. Illustrate the structure of deregulated system
3. Interpret various issues in electricity transmission
4. Outline various electricity trading instruments
5. Identify various issues in electricity pricing.
6. Summarize ancillary services of deregulated systems.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3

1 3 2
2 2 3
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 3 2
6 2 3
Unit – I
Introduction to Deregulation (15 Hours)
The Electric Industry and Its Traditional Regulated Structure: Electric Utility Functions and Systems –
ElectricUtility Resources and Organization -Vertical Integration and Monopoly Regulation - Electric Utility
BusinessFrameworks - Government Regulatory Agencies and Commissions.
The Electric Industry under De-Regulation – An Overview: De-Regulation: Concepts and
Evolution,Competition at the Wholesale Generation Level, Independently Operated Regional Transmission
Grids, The Electric Utility Industry under De-Regulation
Indian Electricity Act-2003
Unit – II
Power System Operation under Deregulation (15 Hours)
Role of the independent system operator (ISO), Operational planning activitiesof ISO: ISO in Pool markets, ISO
in Bilateral markets, Operationalplanning activities of a GENCO: Genco in Pool and Bilateral markets,market
participation issues, competitive bidding
Power wheeling, Transmission open access, pricing of power transactions,security management in deregulated
environment
Congestion management in deregulation
Unit – III
Electricity Markets-Trading and Pricing (15 Hours)
Essence of electric energy trading, Energy trading framework, Derivative instruments of energy trading-
Forward contracts, Future Contracts, Options, Swaps.
Introduction to electricity pricing, electricity price volatility, electricity price indexes, challenges to electricity
pricing, construction of forward price curves, Short-Term price forecasting.
Hedging
Unit – IV
Ancillary Services and Reliability Analysis (15 Hours)
General description of some ancillary services, ancillary servicesmanagement in various countries, and
reactive power management insome deregulated electricity markets.
Interruption criterion, stochastic components, component models, Calculation methods, Network
model:stochastic networks, series and parallel connections, minimum cut sets, reliability cost.Reliability and
deregulation: conflict, reliability analysis, effects on the actualreliability, regulation of the market.
Generation, transmission and distribution reliability
149
Text Books:
1. K. Bhattacharya, Math.HBollen and J.C Daalder, “Operation of Restructured Power Systems”, Kluwer
Academic Publishers, USA, 2012.
2. Loi Lei Lai, “Power System restructuring and deregulation”, John Wiley and Sons, UK. 2001.
Reference Books:
1. Fred I Denny and David E. Dismukes, “Power System Operations and Electricity Markets”, CRC
Press, LLC, 2017.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 40 20 ---
Apply 20 40 20
Analyze --- --- 40
Evaluate --- --- 40
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Deregulation.
2. Label the vertical structure of electric industry.
3. State the advantages of Deregulation.
4. List outderivative instruments.
5. Define congestion management.
Understand
1. Explain the evolution of deregulated markets
2. Illustrate the power system operation under deregulation.
3. Outline the electricity price indexes.
4. Summarize the energy trading framework.
5. Demonstrate the ancillary service management in deregulated power systems.
Apply
1. Model the structure of electric industry under deregulation.
2. Identify the operational planning activities of ISO.
3. Identify the effects of deregulation on the reliability.
4. Identify the essence of energy trading
62
150
16EE008 Power System Operation and Control

4 0 03
Course Outcomes
1. Outline the concepts of economic operation of power plants

2. Interpret the concepts of Hydro-thermal scheduling
3. Illustrate the operation of speed-governing system
4. Inspect single area power system for change in frequency
5. Inspect two area power system for change in frequency and change in tie-line power
6. Apply various control strategies for reactive power control
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3

1 3 2
2 2 3
3 3 2
4 2 3
5 2 3
6 2 3
Unit – I
Economic Operation of Power Systems 12+4 Hours
Optimal operation of Generators in Thermal Power Stations, input-output characteristics, Optimum generation
allocation with and without transmission line losses – Loss Coefficients, General transmission line loss formula.
Optimal scheduling of Hydrothermal System-Short term and long term Hydrothermal scheduling problem.
Unit Commitment
Unit – II
Modeling of Turbine, Generator and Governing System 10+4 Hours
Modeling of Speed governing system, free governor operation, Turbine-Stages, Generator and load systems,
complete block diagram of an isolated power system.
Necessity of keeping voltage and frequency constant
Unit – III
Single Area and Two-Area Load Frequency Control 11+4 Hours
Control area, Single area control -Steady state analysis, Dynamic response -uncontrolled and controlled cases,
Load frequency control of two area system –uncontrolled and controlled cases, tie-line bias control, economic
dispatch control.
Performance Index and optimal load frequency control
Unit – IV
Voltage Stability and Power System Security 11+4 Hours
Introduction to voltage stability, voltage collapse and voltage security.Relation between active power
transmission and frequency, relation between reactive power transmission and voltage.
Voltage stability Analysis-P-V, Q-V curves, Sensitivity analysis and Power flow problem for Voltage stability,
Introduction to power system security, Factors affecting Power system security, Contingency Analysis.
Conventional reactive power control techniques
Text Books:
1. I.J.Nagrath&D.P.Kothari, “Modern Power System Analysis”, Tata McGraw–Hill Publishing Company
Ltd, 4th Edition, 2011
2. P.Kundur, “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw Hill Inc, 2nd Edition, 2005.
Reference Books:
1. S.S.Vadhera, “Power System analysis & Stability”, Khanna Publishers, 3rd edition, 2005
151
2. O.I.Elgerd, “Electric Energy systems Theory”Tata McGraw-hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2nd edition,
2005.
3. John J.Grainger, William D.Stevenson,Gary W. Chang, “Power System Analysis” Tata McGraw
Hill,2nd edition, 2016.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 30 ---
Understand 50 --- ---
Apply 20 40 50
Analyze --- 60 50
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define optimal operation.
2. Define Incremental fuel cost.
3. Define control area.
4. Define regulation.
5. List the factors affecting power system security.
Understand
1. Explain the coordination equation of thermal system by considering transmission line loss.
2. Illustrate hydro-thermal scheduling.
3. Explain the operation of speed governing system.
4. Outline single area load frequency control.
5. Outline necessity reactive power in power system.
Application
1. Develop an algorithm for determination of optimal operation by neglecting line losses.
2. Develop the solution for long term hydro-thermal scheduling.
3. Describe the Economic dispatch control and Load frequency control.
4. Demonstrate operation of two area load frequency control.
5. Demonstrate the FACT deices in detail.
Analyze
1. Analyze the concept of unit commitment.
2. Analyze the short term hydrothermal scheduling.
3. Contrast with and without PI control operation of LFC.
4. List the objectives of load compensation.
5. Analyze the operation of SVC in detail.
63
152
16EC023 Communication Systems

4003
Course Outcomes
1. State the basic definitions of probability and functions of communication system

2. Summarize the noise characteristics in communication system
3. Conclude continuous modulation techniques and pulse modulation schemes
4. Demonstrate the sampling process and pulse code modulation techniques
5. Classify the shift keying techniques
6. Outline the coding techniques for information theory
CO–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2

1 1 1
2 2 2
3 2 3
4 3 2
5 2 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Introduction to communication systems
Set theory, probability as relative frequency, probability axioms, joint and conditional probability, statistical
independence, Bayes theorem, total probability theorem, Elements of communication system, Frequency
spectrum, Need for modulation, Noise: Internal noise, external noise, Signal to Noise ratio, Noise figure, and
Noise temperature
Radio and television
10+4 Hours
Unit II
Analog communication systems
Analog modulation: Amplitude modulation, DSB-SC, SSB-SC, VSB, AM generation and detection, modulation
index, bandwidth, Frequency division multiplexing, Angle modulation: Frequency modulation, phase
modulation, relationship, frequency deviation, narrowband FM, wideband FM, FM generation and detection,
Comparison of AM and FM, Pulse modulation: PAM, PWM, PPM
Super heterodyne receiver
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Digital communication systems
Sampling theorem, Quantization process, Pulse code modulation, PCM modulation and demodulation,
bandwidth, Time-division multiplexing, Delta modulation, Limitations of delta modulation, Adaptive delta
modulation, comparison between PCM and delta modulation, Differential PCM,Shift Keying
techniques:Amplitude shift keying, frequency shift keying, phase shift keying, quadrature amplitude modulation
Binary symmetric channel
13+4 Hours
Unit IV
Information theory and coding
Uncertainty, Information, entropy: joint and conditional entropy, Source coding: Shannon-fano coding, Huffman
coding, Mutual information, channel capacity, bandwidth-noise tradeoff, error control coding: linear block
codes, cyclic codes, convolutional codes
Probability of error
10+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. R.P.Singh, S.D.Sapre, “Communication Systems”, TMH, 2008
2. Simon S.Haykin, “Communication Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition, 2008
153
Reference(s)
1. George Kennedy, “Electronic Communication System”, TMH, 2004
2. Taub, Shilling, “principles of communications systems”, TMH, 6th edition, 2008
Sample Question (s)
Remember 20 -- --
Understand 50 40 --
Apply -- 30 45
Analyze 30 30 55
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define probability as relative frequency
2. List any two axioms of probability
3. State noise temperature
Understand
1. Classify the types of noise
2. Explain the need for modulation
3. Compare AM and FM modulation schemes
Apply
1. Computethe channel capacity for SNR=10dB and bandwidth of the channel is 1KHz
2. Show that Pt= Pc(1+m2/2)
Analyze
1. Differentiate PCM techniques
2. Compare ASK, FSK and PSK digital modulation techniques
64
154
16EE009 Electric Locomotives, Traction & Vehicles

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Distinguish different traction systems and latest trends in traction systems.

2. Identify and understand the working of various locomotive equipment.
3. Differentiate services of traction system based on speed time curves.
4. Analyze motor characteristics for application in electric vehicles.
5. Outline the architecture of hybrid electric vehicles
6. Compare various battery technologies for application in electric/hybrid electric vehicles.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO6

1 3 2
2 3 2
3 2 1
4 2 1
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Traction Systems& Electric locomotives
System of Traction - Diesel & electric traction – Line diagram of Power supply feeding arrangement for electric
traction in India, Locomotives in India – classification based on supply and control – block diagrams of
locomotives employing DC and AC drives, locomotive equipment – pantograph, transformer, rectifier, inverter,
protective devices, classification of locomotive bogies based on wheel arrangement, locomotives employing
three phase drives – power circuit, power converter, diagnostic system, advantages of 3-phase drive with IGBT
over the other drives.
Track electrification - DC, AC & Composite systems
15 Hours
Unit II
Traction mechanics
Traction Mechanics: Mechanics of traction movement - speed-time curves for different services - trapezoidal
and quadrilateral speed-time curves - tractive effort requirement at driving wheels and for propulsion of train -
power - specific energy consumption –factors effecting specific energy consumption–Dead, accelerating and
adhesive weights.
Coefficient of adhesion
15 Hours
Unit III
Electric vehicles (EV)
Introduction to EV, Configuration of EV, Performance of Electric Vehicles - Traction Motor Characteristics -
Tractive Effort and Transmission Requirement - Vehicle Performance, Tractive Effort in Normal Driving,
Energy Consumption, Advantages of EV, Standards for fostering the EV, public safety, and environmental
protection.
Impact of EV on the electricity supply system
15 Hours
Unit IV
Hybrid Electric vehicles (HEV) & Energy storage
Hybrid Electric vehicles: Concept of Hybrid Electric vehicle, Architectures of Hybrid Electric vehicle, Working
of Series Hybrid & Parallel hybrid vehicles
Batteries: Battery technology for EV & HEV, Nickel-based Batteries, Lithium-Based Batteries; Ultracapacitors
& Ultrahigh-Speed Flywheels
Lead-Acid Batteries
15 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
155
Textbook (s)
1. N V Suryanarayana, “Utilization of Electric Power: Including Electric Drives and Electric Traction”,
New Age International publishers, 2nd edition, 2014.
2. M. Ehsani, Y. Gao, S.E. Gay and Ali Emadi, “Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell
Vehicles: Fundamentals” , Theory and Design, CRC Press, 2nd edition, 2010
Reference (s)
1. Traction Rolling Stock – “Maintenance, Institution of Railway Electrical Engineers (IREE), Ministry
of Railways, Government of India, 2010.
2. I. Hussein, “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press, 2011.
3. Chris Mi, M. AbulMasrur, David WenzhongGao, “Hybrid Electric Vehicles: Principles And
Applications With Practical Perspectives”, John Wiley & Sons, 2017
4. Stephen Brown, David Pyke, Paul Steenhof, “Electric vehicles: The role and importance of standards
in an emerging market, Energy Policy”, 38 (2010), pages 3797–3806.
Sample Question (s)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Comprehensive Test65(%)
Remember 20 50 25
Understand 50 50 50
Apply 30 --- 25
Analyze --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define traction system.
2. List the various systems of track electrification.
3. State the function of various components of a typical electric locomotive with a neat block diagram.
4. List the standards for fostering electric vehicles.
5. State the concept of hybrid electric vehicle.
Understand
1. Explain the characteristics of a generalized speed time curve.
2. Derive the expression for maximum speed assuming a simplified speed time curve.
3. Summarize the advantages of 3-phase drive with IGBT over the other drives.
4. Summarize the impact of EV on the electricity supply system.
5. Exemplify the architecture of hybrid electric vehicle.
Apply
1. Explain the operation of diagnostic system in an electric locomotive employing three phase drive.
2. Find the expression for tractive effort required for propulsion of a train.
3. Find the expression for specific energy consumption of a train for a given run.
4. Assess the characteristics of traction motor used in electric vehicles.
5. Identify the battery technologies employed for use with EV and HEV’s.
65
Comprehensive test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course
156
16EE010 PLCs & SCADA

4 0 0 3
Course Outcomes
1. Identify basic components of PLCs, their architecture & programming

2. Exemplifying different levels of File I / O& Ladder Logic diagram of PLCs
3. Apply PLCs for different real time applications
4. Contrast the interface of PLCs & SCADA for Industrial Automation.
5. Summarize various animations, alarming functions, data logging and event detection in SCADA
6. Develop real time platform for various process applications.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3

1 3 2
2 2 3
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 3 2
6 2 3
Unit – I
PLC Basics (15 Hours)
PLC Basics: PLC system, I/O modules and interfacing, CPU processor, programming equipment, programming
formats, construction of PLC ladder diagrams, devices connected to I/O modules.
PLC Programming: Input instructions, outputs, operational procedures, programming examples using contactors
and coils.
Drill press operation.
Unit – II
Ladder Logic & File Structure (15 Hours)
Ladder Logic: Introduction, Basic Components & Their Symbols, Fundamentals of Ladder Diagrams, Ladder
Logic Functions.
File Structure & Addressing Formats: Introduction, Output & Input Data Files, Status File, Bit Data File, Timer
Data File, Counter Data File Elements, Control Data File, Integer Data File & Float Data File.
Boolean Logic & Relay Logic
Unit – III
PLC Applications (15 Hours)
Introduction, Switching ON-OFF Light, Liquid Level Control, Process Control, Main Door Control, Vehicle
Parking Control, Bottling Plant and Drink Dispenser
Traffic Light Control
Unit – IV
SCADA (15 Hours)
Introduction to SCADA system components - PLC & SCADA Interface, SCADA Animation – Visibility &
Text, Alarming – Configuration, setup, start-up and display, summary & data logging, SCADA Supplements –
Event Detection, Derived Tags
OLE & Security
Text Books:
1. Rajesh Mehra, Vikrant Vij, “PLCs & SCADA: Theory & Practice”, Laxmi Publications, 2nd Edition,
2012.
2. Kelvin T Erickson, “Programmable Logic Controllers: An Emphasis on Design and Application”,
Dogwood Valley Press, 2nd Edition, 2016.
3. Stuart A. Boyer: “SCADA-Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition”, International society of
automation Publications, 4th Edition, 2010.
157
Reference Books:
1. Gary Dunning, Thomson Delmar, “Programmable Logic Controller”, Ceneage Learning, 3rd Edition,
2005.
2. W. Bolton, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Newnes – Elsevier, 2015.
3. Mini S Thomas, John D McDonald, “Power System SCADA & Smart Grids”, CRC Press, Dogwood
Valley Press, 2017.
Sample Question (s)
Remember 40 20 ---
Apply 20 40 30
Analyze --- --- 40
Evaluate --- --- 30
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define PLC
2. Define SCADA
3. State the applications of SCADA
4. List out PLC input devices
5. List the characteristics of PLC registers
Understand
1. PLC is useful for Industrial automation. Justify
2. Explain advantages and disadvantages of PLC in detail.
3. Illustrate the input module for PLC.
4. Outline SCADA architecture in detail.
5. Explain advantages and disadvantages of SCADA systems.
Application
1. Develop the rules for constructing the ladder diagram.
2. Develop SCADA system used in Petroleum Refining Process.
3. Make use of SUBTRACT function for conveyor count application with neatschematic.
4. Demonstrate operation of Industrial three axis robot control.
5. Develop PLC system for vehicle parking control.
Analyze
1. Analyze the block diagram of PID control using PLC.
2. Analyze output ON/OFF and analog devices in detail.
3. Compare first, second and third generations of SCADA architecture.
4. Discover the significance of Cascaded sequencers in PLC programming.
66
158
16EC505 VLSI Design

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the operation and characteristics of MOS transistor

2. Interpret various MOS transistor fabrication techniques
3. Implement Boolean functions in CMOS technology and realize the same in layout diagrams
4. Summarize the effects of parasitics and scaling
5. Classify various programmable ASICs
6. Interpret different levels of testing of IC
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO 3

1 2 1 1
2 2 1 1
3 3 2 1
4 2 2 1
5 2 2 1
6 2 2 1
Unit I
Introduction to IC technology and Basic Electrical properties of MOS circuits
Introduction to RTL, DTL, TTL, ECL logic families,Introduction to IC technology, Basic MOS transistors,
Enhancement and depletion modes of transistor action, Ids-Vds relationships, Aspects of MOS Transistor,
Threshold voltage, MOS Transistor conductance and output conductance, MOS transistor figure of merit, Pass
transistors, nMOS inverter , Determination of pull up to pull down ratio for an nMOS inverter driven by another
nMOS inverter and for an nMOS inverter driven through one or more pass transistors, Alternate forms of pull
up, CMOS inverter, BiCMOS Inverters.
Static power dissipation, Dynamic Power dissipation in CMOS circuits
12+4 Hours
Unit II
IC Fabrication process and Gate level Design
MOS and CMOS Fabrication processes, Bi-CMOS Technology, comparison between CMOS & Bipolar
technologies,Latch up in CMOS circuits,MOS Layers, Stick diagrams (nMOS design style), CMOS design
style, Design rules, Layout diagrams of CMOS inverter, NAND & NOR gates
Realization of gates using CMOS technology, other complex gates, Switch logic (pass transistor and
transmission gates) and design examples using transmission gates.
Layout diagram of 10T full adder and CMOS full adder
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Basic circuit concepts and Scaling of MOS Circuits
Sheet resistance , Sheet resistance concept applied to MOS transistors and inverters, Area capacitance of layers ,
standard unit of capacitance, some area capacitance calculations, The delay unit , inverter delays, Driving large
capacitance loads, Propagation delays, wiring capacitances, Fan-in and Fan-out characteristics, Choice of
layers,CMOS steady state electrical behavior, CMOS dynamic electrical behavior
Scaling of MOS Circuits, Scaling models and scaling factors, Scaling factors for device parameters, Limitations
of scaling (qualitative treatment only).
Drain Induced Barrier Lowering (DIBL) effect, Sub threshold conduction
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Programmable ASICs & IC testing
Introduction, FPGA Design flow, ASIC Design flow ,Types of ASICs-Full custom, standard cell based Asics,
Gate array based ASICs, PLDs, FPGAs, Programmable ASICs- anti-fuse, SRAM, EPROM and EEPROM
technology
Manufacturing test principles, Design for testability (DFT) - Adhoc testing, Scan design, Built in self-test
(BIST).
Xilinx3000Series, FPGAarchitecture, Boundaryscan
159
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Kamran eshragian, Douglas.A.Pucknell and Sholeh Eshragian, “Essentials of VLSI circuits and
systems”, Prentice Hall of India Private Ltd, 3rdEdition, 2009
2. Neil Weste and Eshraghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design”, Pearson Education, 3rdEdition, 2000
3. Michael john Sebastian smith, “Application specification integrated circuits, Addition Wesley,1 st
edition”,1997
4. John.P.Uyemura, “Introduction to VLSI Circuits & Systems”, John Wiley Ist Edition, 2002
Reference (s)
1. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Des”ign, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2009
2. Jan M Rabaey, A. chandrakasan, B.Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits, Pearson, 3rdEdition, 2008
3. Richa Jain, Amrita Rai , “Principles of VLSI and CMOS Integrated Circuits”, S.Chand & Co Ltd,
First Edition, 2012
4. John F. Wakerly, “Digital Design Principles & Practices” –PHI/ Pearson Education Asia, 3rd Ed.,
2007
Sample Question (s)
Remember 30 30 --
Understand 40 40 --
Apply 30 30 70
Analyse -- -- 30
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. What are the scaling models?
2. Why switch logic is better than pass transistor logic?
3. Show that pull up to pull down ratio of an nMOS inverter driven by another nMOS inverter is 4:1
4. How the delay varies with number of inputs for different fabrication processes?
5. Show that 11 is the best test vector for AND gate if there is a SA0 fault on one node
Understand
1. Explain briefly about nMOS pass transistor
2. Compare Stick diagram and Layout
3. Explain about  based design rules in detail
4. Classify possible wiring capacitances in VLSI fabrication process
5. Explain about programming technologies of SPLD and CPLDs
Apply
1. Construct CMOS inverter having pull up to pull down ratio of 1:1 if n channel sheet resistance is 10k
and p-channel sheet resistance is 25k
2. Construct layout for 2-input NAND gate
3. Classify ASICs with neat sketch
4. Demonstrate your answer , If the disturbance is created at the output then there exist low resistance
path between supply rails of CMOS inverter, is that disturbance creates problem in the CMOS inverter,
Analyze
1. Contrast CMOS and Bipolar technologies
2. Analyse CMOS inverter with the help of transfer characteristics
3. Justify why scaling factors are greater than unity?
4. Differentiate FPGA with Programmable ASICs
67
160
16EE704 Electrical Systems and Simulation Lab

3 0 0 2
Course Outcomes
1. Inspect time domain specifications and frequency response of a given electrical circuit.
2. Analyze the performance of an AC circuit during resonance conditions.
3. Assess the transient and steady state behavior of electrical machines.
4. Model power electronic systems for given specifications.
5. Examine load flow in a power system network.
6. Develop controller for AGC of a thermal power plant.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4 PO5

1 3 2
2 2 3
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 3 2
6 1 3
List of Experiments
Any 10 experiments out of which at least 5 experiments from Group-A and 5 experiments from Group-B.
PART-A: ELECTRIC CIRCUITS& MACHINES

1) Simulation of AC Circuits Stability analysis (Bode, Root Locus, Nyquist) of Linear Time Invariant
system
2) Criticize DC Transient responseof series RLC circuit
3) Series and Parallel Resonance.
4) Closed Loop speed control of DC machine using State space model.
5) Design of a PID controller for a DC Servo Systemusing PID Tuner toolbox in MATLAB
6) Analyze the performance of capacitor-start capacitor-run single-phase induction motor through
simulation
7) Simulation of transformer magnetization inrush current using PSCAD
8) Torque-speed characteristics of three phase induction machine for varied voltage and/or frequency
PART-B: POWER ELECTRONICS & POWER SYSTEMS

1) Simulation of single phase full converter for a given firing angle.
2) Simulation of firing circuit for fully controlled rectifier using PSIM
3) Simulation of 3-phase PWM Inverter with sinusoidal pulse-width modulation.
4) Simulation of Buck-converter
5) Calculate the displacement power factor,power factor and THD associated with the power-
electronic interface using PSCAD.
6) Computation of harmonic indices generated by a rectifier feeding an R-L load.
7) Single area load frequency control with and without pi controller.
8) Two area load frequency control with and without pi controller.

1. Development of Servo Voltage Stabilizer.
2. Development of Motor speed regulator using tachometer and/or current sensor.
3. Frequency response characteristics of Lag and lead compensation network. DC motor with controlled
ac rectification.
4. Simulation study of variable speed wind energy conversion system- DFIG.
5. Synchronization of alternator with infinite bus using PSCAD
6. Design of DC-DC converter with IEEE standards
68
161
Text Books:
1. M.H.Rashid,”Introduction to PSPICE using ORCAD for circuits and Electronics”Pearson/Prentice
Hall,2004
2. Nassir H.Sabah,”Circuits analysis with PSPICE A simplified Approach” CRC Press,Taylor& Francis
group 2017.
3. Brain R.Hunt,RonaldL.Lipsman,JonathanM.Rosenburg, “A guide to Matlab for begginners and
experienced users, Cambridge university Press 2006.
Reference Books:
1. Raj Kumar Bansal, Ashok Goel, Manoj Kumar Sharma “MATLAB and Its Applications in
Engineering”,Pearson Education India
2. Dennis Fitzpatrick,“Analog Design and Simulation Using OrCAD Capture and PSpice”Publisher
:Newnes An imprint Elsevier,2nd edition.
3. KraigMitzner,”Complete PCB Design Using OrCAD Capture and PCB Editor”
Publisher:Newnes/Elsevier, ISBN 0750689714, 9780750689717
162
16PE704 Power Systems Lab

3 0 0 2
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret various characteristics of over current and voltage relays

2. Interpret various characteristics of distance relays
3. Inspect the breakdown strength of the oil
4. Assess the characteristics of the fuse
5. Evaluate the performance of long transmission lines
6. Summarize compensation techniques
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
Perform any 10 experiments from the given list
1) To study time vs. voltage characteristics of under voltage induction relay
2) To study time vs. voltage characteristics of attraction type relay
3) To study time vs. current characteristics of over current induction relay
4) To study time vs. current characteristics of directional over current relay
5) To study time vs. differential current characteristics of percentage biased differential relay
6) To study time vs. current characteristics of digital distance relay
7) To determination of breakdown strength of oil by variable distance Electrodes
8) To find the time vs. current characteristics of fuse.
9) To find the A, B, C, D parameters of the long T/M line.
10) To study performance of the long T/M line under no load condition and light load conditions and at
different Power Factors
11) To study the Ferranti effect of the long T/M line under no load condition.
12) To find efficiency and regulation of the long T/M line under loaded condition.
13) Application of compensation techniques to improve the performance of long transmission line

1. Development of over Voltage and under Voltage protection.
2. Development of a transmission line model.
3. Simulation of various types of faults
4. Performing Ferranti effect on the developed transmission line model.
Text Books:
1. Ned Mohan ”Electric Power System”John Wiley & SonsInc,2012
2. Badari Ram, D.N Vishwakarma, “Power System Protection and Switchgear”, TMH Publications, 2nd
edition, 2011
3. I.J.Nagaraj and D.P.Kothari, “Modern Power System Analysis” Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2007
4. Sunil S Rao“Switchgear and Protection”, Khanna Publishers, 13th edition, 2017
69
163
16EE801 Ethics for Electrical Engineers

3103
Course outcomes
1. Interpret the core values and awareness on professional ethics and human values
2. Interpret engineering as social experimentation
3. Identify the responsibilities of an engineer for safety, risk benefit analysis and professional rights
4. Summarize the role of electrical engineers in assessing industrial safety
5. Outline the operational issues of Electrical Apparatus
6. Outline the operational issues of power grid
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 12
1 3 1 3 3
2 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 1
4 3 3 3 1
5 1 1 1 3
6 1 1 1 3
Unit I
Human Values and Engineering Ethics (15 Hours)
Morals, Values and Ethics, Integrity, Work ethic, Service learning, Civic virtue, Respect for others, Living
peacefully, Caring, Sharing, Honesty, Courage, Valuing time, Cooperation, Commitment, Empathy, Self-
confidence, Character, Spirituality.
Senses of Engineering Ethics, Variety of moral issues, Types of inquiry, ohlberg’s theory, Gilligan’s theory,
Consensus and Controversy, Models of professional roles, Theories about right action, Self-interest, Customs
and Religion, Uses of Ethical Theories.
Moral dilemmas, Moral Autonomy
Unit II
Safety, Responsibilities and Rights in Social Experimentation (15 Hours)
Engineering as Experimentation, Engineers as responsible Experimenters, Codes of Ethics, Balanced Outlook
on Law, Safety and Risk, Assessment of Safety and Risk, Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk, Respect for
Authority, Collective Bargaining, Confidentiality, Conflicts of Interest, Occupational Crime, Professional
Rights, Employee Rights.
Intellectual Property Rights
Unit III
Operational Issues of Electrical Apparatus (15 Hours)
Code of practice for construction, installation, protection, operation and maintenance of electric supply lines and
apparatus, Installation and Testing of Generating Units, Meters, maximum demand indicators and other
apparatus on consumer’s premises, Point of commencement of supply, Test for resistance of insulation, Earth
leakage protective device, Use of energy at high and extra-high voltages Maximum stresses; Factors of safety,
clearances in overhead lines
Role, qualification and licensing of electrical inspector
Unit IV
Operational Issues of Power Grid (15 Hours)
Terminology, Objective, Scope and Structure of Indian Electricity Grid Code (IEGC), Role of various agencies
under IEGC, Functioning of interstate transmission, Operating code, Scheduling and dispatch
Connection code
Text books:
1. .S.Naagarazan, “Professional Ethics and Human Values”, New Age International Ltd Publishers,
2006
164
Reference books:
1. The Indian Electricity Grid Code (IEGC), Central Electricity Regulatory Commission, Section 178 of
the Electricity Act, 2003
2. Indian Electricity Rules 1956
3. Douglas W. Cromey, Sci Eng Ethics. 2010 December ; 16(4): 639–667. doi:10.1007/s11948-010-9201-
Sample Question (s)

Remember 40 30 ---
Understand 40 30 50
Apply 20 40 50
Analyze --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Engineering Ethics
2. Define IPR
3. Define the role of electrical inspector
4. Define power grid
Understand
1. Explain the term, ‘moral dilemma’
2. Explain the relation between autonomy and authority.
3. Explain the term conflict of interest
4. Explain the necessity of operation and maintenance of electric supply lines
5. Explain the objective of maintaining grid code
6. Categorize various clearances in overhead lines
7. Differentiate the working between NLDC, RLDC and SLDC
Apply
1. Assess the principle of ‘pre and post-conventional level’ of moral development
2. Assess the importance of Industrial Standards
3. Identify the test for measuring resistance of insulation
4. Identify the code for interstate power transmission
5. Differentiate between ‘morality’ and ‘ethics’
6. Differentiate between ‘caring’ and ‘sharing’
70
165
16EE802 Power System Protection

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the terminology of power system protection

2. Demonstrate the operation of various circuit breakers
3. Demonstrate the operation of different types of relays
4. Identify suitable protection schemes for various power system equipments
5. Outline the operation of electrostatic and digital relays
6. Apply digital logic in relay communications
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO 3 PO14

1 3 1 1
2 2 3 1
3 2 3 1
4 3 2 3
5 3 1 1
6 2 3 3
Unit I
Circuit Breakers
Basics of Protection & its significance, Circuit Breakers: Elementary principles of arc interruption, Restriking
and Recovery voltages - Restriking Phenomenon, Average and Max. RRRV- Current Chopping and Resistance
Switching - CB ratings and Specifications, Auto-reclosures, Description and Operation of Oil Circuit breakers,
Air Blast Circuit Breakers, Vacuum Circuit Breakers and SF6 circuit breakers, MCB and MCCBs, Isolators.
Difference between a Fuse, an Isolator and a Circuit breaker.
15 Hours
Unit II
Electromagnetic Relays
Principle of Operation and Construction of Attracted armature, Balanced Beam, induction Disc and Induction
Cup relays. Instantaneous, DMT and IDMT relays.
Over current/ Under-voltage relays, Directional relays, Differential Relays and Percentage Differential Relays.
Translay Relay, Universal torque equation,
Distance relays- Impedance, Reactance and Mho relays.
Fundamental requirements of Protective Relays, Types of Protection.
15 Hours
Unit III
Power system components protection
Generator Protection-Protection of generators against Stator faults, Rotor faults, Restricted Earth fault and Inter-
turn fault Protection.
Transformer Protection - Percentage Differential Protection, Buchholz relay Protection.
Line Protection -Over Current, Carrier Current and Three-zone distance relay protection using Impedance
relays. ZnO and Rod gap Lightning arresters, grounding wires, Peterson coil.
Bus bar Protection – Differential protection.
Voltage surge, lightning.
15 Hours
Unit IV
Static & Digital Relays
Static Relays: Introduction, Static Relay Components, Comparators – Amplitude & Phase, Static Over current
Relay, Static Distance Relay and Static Poly-phase Relay.
Digital Relays: Introduction, Digital Logic Communication, Direct Relay-to-Relay Digital Logic
Communication, Digital Message Security, Relay interface with Utility, Microprocessor based Over current,
Impedance, Reactance & Mho Relays, Relay Testing,
Static Relays versus Electromagnetic Relays.
15 Hours
166
Total: 60 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Badri Ram, D.R.Viswakarma, “Power System Protection and Switchgear”, Tata McGraw Hill
Education, Private Limited, 2012. 2 ndEdition, 2013
2. J.B.Gupta, “Switchgear and Protection”, S. . ataria & Sons, 2009.
Reference (s)
1. V. . Mehta, ohit Mehta, “Principles of Power Systems”, S.Chand & Company Ltd., 2005.
2. Sunil S ao, “Switchgear and Protection”, hanna Publishers, 13th Edition 2015-16
3. Paithankar and S. .Bhide, “Fundamentals of Power System Protection”, PHI publications, 2nd Edition
2010.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 40 20 ---
Apply 20 40 60
Analyze --- --- 40
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Label the circuit diagram of relay
2. List the advantages of vacuum circuit breaker
3. Define arc voltage
4. List any three problems associated with differential relay.
Understand
1. Formulate the expression for restriking voltage
2. Illustrate the SF6 circuit breaker with neat diagram
3. Explain any three types of lightning arresters.
4. Classify voltage balance differential relay and translay relay.
5. Explain the working principle of restricted earth fault relay for the protection of stator winding of
alternator.
Apply
1. For 132KV system the reactance and capacitance up to location of circuit breaker is 3ohms, and
0.015µF, respectively. Find i) frequency of transient oscillation, ii) maximum value of restriking
voltage iii) RRRV
2. A star connected 3-phase,10-MVA,.7.5 kV alternator has a per phase reactance of 10%. it is protected
by Merz-Price circulating current principle which is set to operate for fault currents not less than
200A.Find the value of earthling resistance to be protected in order to ensure that only 10% of the
alternator winding remains unprotected.
3. Find the time of operation of a 5 amp 3 second over current relay having current setting of 125% and
time setting multiplier of 0.6 connected to supply circuit through a 400/5 current transformer when the
circuit carries a fault current of 4000A. use the table
Operating Time 2 4 6 8 10 12
PSM 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5
Analyze
1. Distinguish between Electrostatic and Electromagnetic relays
2. Vacuum circuit breakers are mostly suitable for rural areas. Justify
71
167
16EE011 Artificial Intelligence Applications to Power Systems

4 0 0 3
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the soft computing techniques applications in power systems

2. Summarize different fuzzification and defuzzification techniques
3. Illustrate various mathematical models of artificial neural networks
4. Explain application of genetic algorithm in power system optimization
5. Develop various load forecasting techniques using ANN
6. Select appropriate AI technique for power system applications
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO 2 PO3 PO 5
1 3 2 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 2 2
4 2 2 3
5 2 2 3
6 2 2 3
Unit – I
Introduction to AI and Fuzzy Logic (15 Hours)
Introduction and definition of AI, difference between soft computing techniques and hard computing systems,
expert systems brief history of ANN, Fuzzy and GA.
Introduction to fuzzy logic, Comparison between Fuzzy and crisp logic, Fuzzy sets, Membership function, Basic
fuzzy set operations, properties of Fuzzy set, fuzzy relations, Fuzzy interference system, Mamdani, Sugeno, Fuzzy
rule based system
Defuzzification methods
Unit – II
Artificial Neural Network (15 Hours)
Introduction to artificial neural network, History of neural network research, Basic concepts of Neural
Networks, Human brain, Model of Artificial Neuron, Neural Network architectures, Single layer feed forward
Network, Multi-layer feed forward network, recurrent networks, and characteristics of NN, Learning Methods
Perceptron, and Adaline Madaline Networks. Architecture of Back propagation Network, Nonlinear activation
operators, single and multilayer ANN.
Training and testing of ANN
Unit – III
Genetic Algorithm (15 Hours)
Working principles, difference between GA and traditional methods, Different types of coding methods, fitness
function, different types GA operators 1. Roulette wheel selection 2. Stochastic remainder Roulette wheel
selection, Rank selection, Tournament selection and stochastic universal sampling, different types of cross over
methods in GA, Mutation, Schema theorem, elite preserving operator, GA’s for constrained optimization
Understanding the working of GA using flow chart
Unit – IV
Applications of AI in power system (15 Hours)
Applications of ANN, Fuzzy logic and GA in power systems operation and control for solving problems of load
forecasting, voltage control, voltage stability, security assessment, feeder load balancing, AGC, Economic load
dispatch, Unit commitment.
Condition monitoring
Text Books:
1. S. a asekaran, G. A. Vi ayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic algorithms” PHI
publication, second edition, 2017
168
2. alyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design” PHI publication, second edition, 2012
Reference Books:
1. alyanmoy Deb, “Multi-objective Optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms” Willey Publication,
2001
2. evin Warwick, Arthur Ekwue a Agrawal, “Techniques in power Artificial intelligence systems”
1997
Sample Question (s)

Remember 40 20 ---
Apply 20 40 20
Analyze --- --- 30
Evaluate --- --- 50
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define AI.
2. Define Artificial Neural Network.
3. State the applications of Genetic Algorithm.
4. List out basic fuzzy set operators.
5. State supervised learning.
Understand
1. Explain how ANN is useful for intelligent power system
2. Explain advantages and disadvantages of GA in detail
3. Illustrate neural network architecture
4. Outline Fuzzy interference system in detail.
5. Outline one of the load forecasting techniques using genetic algorithm.
Apply
1. Build GA rules for constrained optimization.
2. Develop Fuzzy rule based power system.
3. Make use of Tournament selection and stochastic universal sampling
4. Develop operation of Multi-layer feed forward network
5. Develop the basic architecture of Back propagation Network
Analyze
1. List the application of AI in power systems operation and control
2. Contrast single and multilayer ANN in detail
3. Distinguish soft computing techniques and hard computing systems.
4. Analyze the significance of voltage stability and voltage control in power system protection
5. Inspect the operation of Tournament selection and stochastic universal sampling
Evaluate
1. Explain economic load dispatch problem in power system using GA
2. Evaluate Fuzzy interference system for classification of faults in a power system network
72
169
16EE012 Design and layout of Power Systems

4 0 0 3
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the power equipment used in transmission and distribution networks
2. Identify appropriate locations for installing power equipment
3. Identify the parameters and layout for designing substations based on power and service requirement.
4. Analyze the parameters for transmission line design
5. Evaluate the parameters for distribution line design
6. Select the layout for installing transmission and distribution lines
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO 3 PO 8
1 3 1 3
2 2 3 1
3 2 3 1
4 2 3 1
5 2 3 3
6 2 3 3
Unit – I
Layout and Installation of Power Equipment’s (15 Hours)
Introduction to transmission and distribution network power equipment, Installation of power transformers –
Reactors – Installation of Insulators – Erection of earthing systems and secondary circuits – Installation of CT’s
and PT’s and CVT’s – Installation of fuses and their rating – Installation of Isolators and Circuit breakers –
Installation of Capacitor banks –IEE rules.
Working of CT’s, PT’s and CVT’s
Unit – II
Design and Layout of Substations (15 Hours)
Types of Substations – Indoor and outdoor substations – Layout diagram of 11 kV / 440 V, 220 / 11 KV
substations – Substations requirements, their functions and location – Substation – Switchgear installations –
Busbar arrangements and design – Load break switches – Switching substations Location CT’s and PT’s –
materials for Busbar – Substations earthing.
Selection of Site and Location for substation construction
Unit III
Design and Layout of Transmission Lines (15 Hours)
Requirements of transmission Lines - Selection of voltage levels for H.T transmission lines - Choice of
conductors - spacing of conductors - Types of Insulators – specifications of transmission lines – Electrical and
Mechanical design of transmission lines – stringing of transmission lines – Tower designs – Types, single
circuit, Double circuit towers – Transmission line Earth wires – IEE rules.
Surge Impedance loading
Unit – IV
Design and Layout of Distribution Systems (15 Hours)
Primary and secondary distribution system design – Calculation of distribution sizes, voltage drops – voltage
regulation – Design scheme for Rural Distribution system – Design scheme for industrial distribution schemes –
Power distribution for computer automation – layout for Town Electrification – Switchgear for L.T. and H.T.
Distributions – IEE rules for Distribution.
Types of distribution cables
Text Books:
1. M.V. Deshpande, “Elements of Power Station Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006
2. P. . Nag, “Power Plant Engineering-Steam and Nuclear”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2008
3. S.S. ao, “Protection and Switch gear”, hanna Publication, 2006.
170
Reference Books:
1. Mahesh Verma, “Power Plant Engineering”, Metropolitan Book Co, Pvt. Ltd. 2005
2. George W. Sutton (Editor), “Direct Energy Conversion”, Inter University Electronics Series Vol- 3,
McGraw-Hill, New York.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 30 ---
Understand 30 ---
Apply 40 20 20
Analyze --- 40 40
Evaluate --- 40 40
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List different types of transmission towers.
2. Define voltage regulation in a distribution system.
3. State the purpose of earthing of electrical power apparatus.
4. List different types of substations.
Understand
1. Explain the steps involved in selection of voltage level for a HT transmission line.
2. Illustrate the layout scheme for rural and industrial distribution system.
3. Outline the procedure for installing a power transformer.
4. Compare and contrast indoor and outdoor substations.
Apply
1. Select the electrical and mechanical design parameters for constructing a 132 kV transmission line.
2. Design a scheme for distribution of power for an industry.
3. Develop a layout for 220/11 kV substation.
Analyze
1. Compare different transmission tower types with their relative merits and demerits
2. Distinguish between rural and industrial distribution design schemes.
Evaluate
1. Evaluate the design parameters for a 132kV transmission line.
2. Develop a layout for town electrification and justify the answer.
73
171
16EE013 Electrical Installation, Design & Estimation

4 0 0 3
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the concepts of estimation and costing

2. Select a suitable wiring system based upon the cost and application
3. Develop a wiring system for domestic and industrial applications
4. Estimate the cost of erecting an overhead line and service connections for different ratings
5. Estimate the cost of erecting an underground distribution line
6. List the various materials required with specifications for erecting a substation
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO 3
1 3 2
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 2 3
5 3 3
6 2 2
Unit- I
General principles of estimation and wiring systems (15 Hours)
Purpose of estimating and costing, proforma for making estimates, preparation of materials schedule, costing,
price list, tender document, net price list, market survey, overhead charges, labour charges, electrical point
method and fixed percentage method, contingency, profit, purchase system, enquiries, comparative statements,
orders for supply, payment of bills. Tenders – its constituents, finalization, specimen tender.
Introduction, methods of wiring, systems of wiring, comparison of different wiring systems, Selection of wires
and cables, wiring accessories and protective devices.
Types of cables used in internal wiring.
Unit- II
Wiring estimation (15 Hours)
Internal wiring Estimation: Standard practice as per IS and IE rules. Planning of circuits, sub-circuits and
position of different accessories, electrical layout, preparing estimates including cost as per schedule rate pattern
and actual market rate (single storey and multi-storey buildings having similar electrical load).
Electrical installation for power circuits: Relevant IE rules and IS standard practices, planning, designing and
estimation of installation for single phase motors of different ratings, electrical circuit diagram, starters,
preparation of list of materials, estimating and costing exercises on workshop with singe-phase, 3-phase motor
load and the light load (3-phase supply system)
Determination of rating of fuses.
Unit- III
Installation of service connections and overhead transmission line estimation (15 Hours)
Service line connections estimate for domestic and Industrial loads (over-head and Under- ground connections)
from pole to energy meter.
Typical AC electrical power system, main components of overhead lines, line supports , conducting materials,
guys and stays insulators, planning and designing of lines with different fixtures, earthing etc. based on unit cost
calculations.
Repairing and jointing of conductors.
Unit-IV
Estimation of underground distribution lines and substations (15 Hours)
Substation: Types of substations, substation schemes and components, estimate of 11/0.4 KV pole mounted
substation up to 200 KVA rating, earthing of substations, Key Diagram of 66 KV/11KV Substation.
General construction of cables, requirements of cables, classifications of cables,methods of laying underground
cables.
Substation auxiliaries supply
172
Textbook (s)
1. J.B Gupta, S. ataria & Sons, “A Course in Electrical Installation, Estimating and Costing”, 2nd
edition, 2013.
2. aina, Battacharya, “Electrical Design: Estimation & Costing”, new age international publication, 5th
edition 2014
Reference (s)
1. Sur eet Singh, “Estimating and Costing”, Dhanpat ai & Co., 2nd edition, 2003.
2. S.L Uppal, hanna “Estimating and Costing”, Publishers, 2nd edition, 2004.
3. N Alagappan, B Ekambaram, “Electrical Estimating and Costing”, TMH, 2nd edition, 2006.
Sample Question (s)

Remember 40 --- ---
Apply 20 20 20
Analyze --- 20 20
Evaluate --- 40 60
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define estimation and state its purpose
2. Define power wiring
3. Name the factors on which the fusing current depend.
4. List the points to be considered at the time of erection of overhead lines
5. List the main requirements of line supports
Understand
1. Interpret the size of conduit for different ratings of motors
2. Classify various types of domestic wiring and suggest their suitability for respective installation.
3. Outline the function of earthing for transmission lines.
4. Explain the procedure of earthing 11kV line supports.
5. Summarize the functions of lightning arrestors.
Apply
1. Choose the size of conductors used for transmission and distribution of electrical power
2. Model the distribution line for the given power system network.
3. Plan the accessories necessary for installation of pole mounted substation.
Analyze
1. Analyze how the ratings of cables and fuse wires for wiring a motor installation are determined.
2. Survey different types of domestic wiring systems.
3. Classify different types of industrial wiring systems.
4. Discover the significance of earthing systems in distribution systems.
Evaluate
1. Compare outdoor and indoor substations and outdoor substations.
2. Estimate the quantity and cost for the installation of an 11kV/415V, 400kVA indoor type substation..
74
173
16EE014 Energy Audit, Conservation & Management

4 0 0 3
Course Outcomes
1. Outline the energy demand and supply, energy crisis and future energy scenario.
2. Summarize energy auditing techniques
3. Develop cash flow models
4. Interpret the requirement for the efficient use of energy in electrical systems.
5. Outline the need for demand side management.
6. Identify various energy management measuring devices and tools.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PO6 PO8

1 1 1 3 3
2 3 3 1 1
3 3 3 1 1
4 3 3 2 1
5 2 3 1 1
6 2 3 1 1
Unit I
Energy Scenario and Energy Environment ` (12 Hours)
Energy Scenario: Energy situation – world and India, Commercial and Non-Commercial Energy, Primary
Energy Resources, Commercial Energy Production, Final Energy Consumption, Energy Needs of Growing
Economy, Energy Sector Reforms in India. Energy Strategy for the Future, Energy Conservation Act-2001 and
its Features
Energy and Environment: Air Pollution, Climate Change, Energy Security, Energy Conservation and its
Importance.
Air Pollution
Unit II
Energy Auditing and Energy Economic Analysis (16 Hours)
Energy Auditing: Energy conservation schemes – Short, medium and long term. Elements of energy audits-
energy index-cost index-energy cost, Energy use profiles-pie chart-Sankey diagram, Types of energy audits
Energy Economic Analysis: Costing techniques-cost factors-breakeven charts-capital sources-interests-capital
recovery-depreciation methods-budgeting-standard costing-cash flows, Methods of investment appraisal-rate of
return method, pay back method, net present value method, internal rate of return method.
Taxes and tax credit
Unit III
Energy Efficiency In Electrical Systems (16 Hours)
Electricity billing, Electrical load management and maximum demand control, Power factor improvement and
its benefit, Selection and location of capacitors, Performance assessment of PF capacitors, Distribution and
transformer losses. Maximum demand controllers, Automatic power factor controllers, Energy efficient motors,
Soft starters with energy saver, Energy efficient transformers, Electronic ballast, Occupancy sensors, Energy
efficient lighting controls, Energy saving potential of each technology.
Variable speed drives
Unit – IV
Demand Side Management (16 Hours)
Introduction to DSM, concept of DSM, benefits of DSM, different techniques of DSM – time of day pricing,
multi-utility power exchange model, time of day models for planning, load management, load priority
technique, peak clipping, peak shifting, valley filling, strategic conservation, energy efficient equipment
Concept of ABT
Text book(s)
1. W Murphy, G Mc ay, “Energy Management”, Elsevier Butterworth Heinemann Publications, India
2013
174
2. A S. Pabla, “Electrical Power distribution”, TMH, 8th edition, 2011
Reference(s)
1. D.P.Sen, . .Padiyar, Indrane Sen, M.A.Pai, “Recent Advances in Control and Management of Energy
Systems”, Interline Publisher, Bangalore, 1993.
2. Ashok V. Desai, “Energy Demand – Analysis, Management and Conservation”, new age international
pvt ltd 1998
Sample Question (s)
Cognitive level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test 75(%)
Remember 40 20 ---
Apply 10 40 50
Analyze 50
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Energy
2. List various types of energy resources present in Globe
3. Select best renewable energy source
4. Define principle of energy audit
5. Define energy management and auditing
6. Define power factor
Understand
1. Summarize the duties of energy auditor and manager
2. Explain the types of energy audit
3. Explain energy policies and IETS
4. Illustrate load management
5. Outline energy auditing report in tabular form
Apply
1. Identify various energy auditing measuring devices
2. Organize how role of IT is important in EA&M
3. Choose the advantages of power factor measurement
4. Demonstrate various lighting techniques
Analyze
1. Distinguish between tariff and billings
2. Analyze preferential tariff with flow diagram
3. Analyze Electricity Act 2003
4. Contrast Peak clipping and valley shifting
75
175
16EE015 Power Quality

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Classify the power quality problems in power system

2. Identify power quality issues in power system
3. Select suitable device for power quality measurement
4. Interpret the harmonic distortion for various loads
5. Choose the devices for controlling the harmonics distortion.
6. Analyze power quality bench marking and monitoring
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO 3 PO 8
1 2 3 2
2 3 2 1
3 1 2 1
4 2 3 1
5 1 2 1
6 2 3 3
Unit I
Introduction & Voltage Sag
Power quality –voltage quality, concerned about power quality, the power quality Evaluation procedure, Terms
and Definitions, Transients, Long-duration voltage variations, short-voltage variations, voltage imbalance, wave
form distortion, voltage fluctuation, power frequency variations, power quality terms CBEMA and ITI curves.
Voltage Sag: Sources of sags and interruptions, Estimating voltage sag performance, fundamental principles of
protection, solutions at the end-use level, Motor-starting sags, utility system fault-clearing issues.
Voltage sag mitigation techniques
16 Hours
Unit II
Transient Over Voltages
Sources of over voltages, principles of over voltage protection, devices for over voltage protection, utility
capacitor-switching transients and utility system lightning protection.
Mitigation of over voltages
15 Hours
Unit III
Harmonics
Harmonic Distortion, Voltage versus current distortion, Harmonics versus Transients, power system qualities
under non-sinusoidal conditions, Harmonic indices, Harmonic sources from commercial loads, Harmonic
sources from Industrial loads.
Effects of Harmonics, Harmonic distortion evaluations, Principles of Controlling Harmonics, Devices for
Controlling Harmonic Distortion
Techniques for harmonic mitigation
16 Hours
Unit IV
Power Quality Bench Marking & Monitoring
Benchmarking process, RMS Voltage variation Indices, Harmonics indices Power Quality Contracts 2009-
10177. Monitoring considerations, power quality measurement equipment, Power quality Monitoring standards.
Power quality analyzer
13 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
Text Book (s)
1. oger C. Dugan, Mark F. Mc Granaghan, Surya Santoso, H. Wayne Beaty, “Electrical Power Systems
Quality”, TMH Education Pvt. Ltd. 2nd Edition, 2008
2. C. Sankaran, “Power quality”, C C Press. 2nd reprint 2017
176
Reference (s)
1. Alexander usko “ Power Quality in Electrical Systems” The McGraw-Hill Companies 2007
2. J. Arrillaga, N. . Watson, S. Chen, “Electrical systems quality Assessment”, John Wiley & Sons 2000
3. Math H. J. Bollen, “Understanding Power quality problems”, 2001
Sample Question (s)

Remember 40 30 ---
Apply 20 40 50
Analyze --- --- 50
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Power quality.
2. Define Harmonics
3. State the voltage sag and swell.
4. List out the protection voltage devices.
5. What are the sources of Power Quality problems?
Understand
1. Illustrate the CBEMA Curve
2. Explain the procedure for the Power quality Evaluation.
3. Interpret the effect of harmonic distortion on capacitors, transformers and motors.
4. Explain different devices for improving power system voltage regulation.
5. Summarize power quality Monitoring standards.
6.
Apply
1. Choose the proper devices for the protection against over currents and explain.
2. Identify the different power quality problems occurred in apower system
3. Utilizing the filters how harmonics are eliminated.
Analyze
1. Compare CBEMA and ITI curves
2. Analyze the wave forms of the different power quality issues
3. Categorize the devices for Controlling Harmonic Distortion
76
177
16EC011 Embedded Systems

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarise embedded system life cycle and components involved in design

2. Explain the differences between embedded system with general purpose systems
3. Organize the embedded system design with respect to quality attribute for real time application
4. Implement an application on embedded system with the help of hardware and firmware
5. Resolve the issues related to implementation of real time applications
6. Differentiate various IDEs to implement embedded system for real time applications
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO 2 PO 3
1 3 1 1
2 3 1 1
3 2 3 2
4 3 1 2
5 1 3 1
6 1 3 1
Unit I
Introduction
Definition ,Embedded system versus general Computing Systems History of Embedded Systems, Classification
of Embedded Systems, Major application areas of Embedded Systems , Purpose of Embedded Systems, The
typical Embedded System, core of Embedded System ,Memory ,sensors and actuators. Communication
Interface, Embedded Firmware, other system components, PCB and Passive Components .
A case study on embedded systems is to make human life easier.
17 Hours
Unit II
Embedded systems-characteristics and quality attributes
Characteristics of Embedded Systems, Quality Attributes of Embedded Systems, Application Specific
Embedded Systems, Washing machine example, Domain Specific Example, Automotive Embedded Systems,
Explaining the characteristics with an example.
Study on Automatic Railway gate Design 13 Hours
Unit III
Embedded system hardware and firmware design
Introduction to Embedded hardware, Analog and Digital electronic components, I/O Types with Examples,
Serial and Parallel communication devices, Wireless devices, Timers and Counting Devices, Watchdog timer
and Real time clock. Embedded firmware design approaches and development languages, ISR concept,
Interrupt sources, Interrupt servicing mechanism, Multiple interrupts, DMA, Device driver programming,
Concepts of C versus Embedded C, Compiler versus Cross-compiler
Firmware design of digital clock in embedded C
15 Hours
Unit IV
Hardware software co-design, implementation and testing
Fundamental Issues in Hardware and Software Co-Design, Computational models in Embedded Design,
Hardware software tradeoffs, Integration of Hardware and Firmware, ICE, Issues in Embedded system Design.
Implementation and Testing, CAD and hardware Translation tools. Pre-processors, Interpreters, Compilers and
Linkers. Debugging tools, Quality assurance and testing of the design. Testing on host machine, Simulators and
Laboratory tools
PCB layout design for a Traffic light controller
15 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Shibu . .V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”,1st Ed, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited
,2009
178
2. Tammy Noergaard , “Embedded systems Architecture” , Elsevier publications, second edition 2013
Reference (s)
1. a amal , “Embedded Systems”, TMS, Second Edition ,2008.
2. Jean. J.Labrosse, “Embedded System building blocks”, CMP publishers, 2nd Edition,2000.
3. Frank Vahid, Tony D. Givargis, “Embedded System Design-A Unified Hardware/Software
Introduction”, Wiley Publications, 2002
Sample Question (s)
Remember 20 10 --
Understand 40 20 --
Apply 20 30 40
Analyze 20 40 60
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define embedded system
2. Define Watchdog timer
3. List any four Quality attributes for embedded systems
4. List any two IDE tools used for embedded system testing
Understand
1. Illustrate the unique features of embedded systems than normal computer systems
2. Explain about PCB and passive components used for embedded system design
3. Explain Quality attributes in detail.
4. Illustrate the differences between C and Embedded C in firmware programming
5. Explain about Various debugging tools used for embedded system applications
Apply
1. Execute a real time embedded system by using various hardware components
2. Find the differences between real time and non real time applications
3. Predict the proper translation tools for embedded firmware design in the implementation of real time
applications
4. Execute a real time application testing with the help of embedded system
5. Implement a automated washing machine and estimate the transaction time
Analyze
1. Differentiate Automated embedded system and general computer systems
2. Identify different ways of increasing the efficiency of embedded system by giving appropriate
justification
3. Organize the Embedded system with OS and without OS, Identify the differences
4. Justify the transaction time should be minimum for Airbag controller in Automobiles
5. Differentiate the debugging tools available for embedded systems design
77
179

B Tech

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B Tech

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GMRIT

Academic Regulations, Curriculum and Syllabi

Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering

GMR Institute of Technology

1. Eligibility for Admission……………………………....................................................... iv

The Vision of GMRIT

 To be among the most preferred institutions for engineering and technological

The Mission of GMRIT

Academic Regulations for B. Tech. Programme*

1. Eligibility for Admission

b. Admission eligibility-Under Lateral Entry Scheme

2. Duration of the Programme

III. Computer Science and Engineering (CS)

a. Integrated Courses: Integrated courses are exclusively designed to provide a

4.1. Credit Distribution for Courses Offered

4.2. Structure of curriculum

a. Full Semester Internship (FSI) Model

A. Course Pattern for Four year Regular Programme (FSI)

VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16

B. Course Pattern for Four Year Regular Programme (Non - FSI)

VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

C. Course Pattern for Three Year Lateral Entry Programme (FSI)

VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16

Total 24+4+1 Audit courses 10 + Term paper +Mini project+ 132

Internship report +CCEC +

VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

4.3 Credit Break-up for Various Category of Courses

Total Theory Courses : 36 @ 3 credits each = 108

CCEC Activities : 2 @ 1 credits = 2

c. For three year lateral entry Programme (FSI)

Total Theory Courses : 24 @ 3 credits each = 72

d. For three year lateral entry Programme (Non FSI)

Total Theory Courses : 26 @ 3 credits each = 78

4.4 Division of Marks for Continuous and Semester End Assessment

Marks Marks for

Range of Percentage Letter Qualitative Grade

5.1 Continuous Assessment Pattern for all Courses

h. Full Semester Internship

On Site Assessment : 30 Marks

i. Co-Curricular and Extra Curricular (CCEC) Activities

j. Employability Skills (ES)

 Assessment for Aptitude skills

Assessment of Soft Skills

h. Industry Driven One Credit Courses

a) It is desirable for a candidate to put on 100% attendance in all the subjects.

Classification of degree will be as follows:

i. CGPA ≥ 7.5 : Degree with Distinction

e) Quick Supplementary Examination

9. Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses

10. Withdrawal from the Examination

a. s/he represents “she” and “he” both

11. Curriculum: The curriculum of all the UG Programmes is given below

To be a nationally preferred Electrical & Electronics Engineering department of learning for

1. To provide high-quality education in Electrical & Electronics Engineering to prepare

Program Educational Objectives (PEOs)

PEO 1: Engage in ongoing learning and professional development through self-study,

Program Outcomes (POs)

Department of Electrical & Electronics Engineering

3 16EE018 Power System Devices 3,14 4 - - 3

2. Types of learning strategies

 Industry driven 3-credit elective courses

16HSX01 English Communication Skills I

1. Infer explicit and implicit meaning of a text